PL300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION

PL300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION Instruction Manual

UME_PL300_eng Rev.: AE (08/13) © All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by whatever means, without the prior written permission of Ingeteam Power Technology. Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right to make any changes without prior notice.

INDEX 

1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 10 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7

54BScope of the manual ......................................................................................................................... 10 5BFunctions ........................................................................................................................................ 10 56BModel coding ................................................................................................................................... 12 57BUser interface .................................................................................................................................. 14 58BHardware configurations ................................................................................................................... 15 59BEnvironmental conditions .................................................................................................................. 17 60BTests ............................................................................................................................................... 17 1.7.1 14BElectrical tests ......................................................................................................................... 17 1.7.2 142BEnvironmental tests ................................................................................................................. 17 1.7.3 143BMechanical tests ...................................................................................................................... 18 1.8 61BWiring diagrams ............................................................................................................................... 19

2.

HARDWARE ...................................................................................................................... 39 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

62BConstructive characteristics. Horizontal box (PL300H) ........................................................................ 39 63BConstructive characteristics. Vertical box (PL300V) ............................................................................. 39 64BConstructive characteristics. TCP mounted ......................................................................................... 39 65BRear terminals.................................................................................................................................. 40 6BOptions for rear communications ports: .............................................................................................. 40 67BRS485 connection detail between several units .................................................................................. 42 68BEthernet Communication................................................................................................................... 44 2.7.1 14BEthernet by GOF ...................................................................................................................... 44 2.7.2 145BEthernet through RJ45 cable .................................................................................................... 44 2.8 69BTechnical characteristics................................................................................................................... 45 2.8.1 146BAuxiliary power supply voltage ................................................................................................... 45 2.8.2 147BOutput contacts ....................................................................................................................... 45 2.8.3 148BDigital inputs (optoisolated) ...................................................................................................... 46 2.8.4 149BIRIG-B input ............................................................................................................................ 46 2.8.5 150BAnalogue outputs ..................................................................................................................... 47 2.8.6 15BPhase and neutral current circuits (single rated current 1/5 A) .................................................... 47 2.8.7 152BSensitive neutral or isolated neutral current circuits ................................................................... 48 2.8.8 153BVoltage circuits ........................................................................................................................ 48 2.8.9 154BMeasurement accuracy ............................................................................................................. 48 2.9 70BOperating frequency ......................................................................................................................... 48 2.10 71BPhase order.................................................................................................................................... 49

3.

UNIT CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 50 3.1 2BP 7 rogramming of digital inputs and logic inputs ................................................................................... 50 3.2 3BF 7 licker management in digital inputs ................................................................................................. 52 3.2.1 15BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 52 3.2.2 156BSettings range for flicker management ....................................................................................... 53 3.3 74BProgramming of digital outputs .......................................................................................................... 53 3.4 75BProgramming of LEDs ....................................................................................................................... 53 3.5 76BProgramming of General settings ....................................................................................................... 54 3.5.1 157BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 54 3.5.2 158BSetting ranges (table 0, single) ................................................................................................. 55 3.6 7BCommunication configuration ............................................................................................................ 56 3.6.1 159BCommunication via front door (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2) (COM 1) .......................... 56 3.6.2 160BCommunication via rear port no. 1 (Port 2) (COM 2) ................................................................... 56 3.6.3 16BEthernetCommunication ........................................................................................................... 57 3.7 78BOther configuration settings .............................................................................................................. 59 3.7.1 162BAccessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console ................................................. 59 3.7.2 163BAccessible only via keyboard/display .......................................................................................... 60

4.

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS .................................................. 61

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A. PL300 User Manual

III

INDEX 

4.1 9BP 7 hase overcurrent protection ............................................................................................................. 61 4.1.1 164BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 61 4.1.2 165BSettings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 61 4.1.3 16BTiming cancellation .................................................................................................................. 62 4.1.4 167BTimed phase inhibition setting (6 tables) ................................................................................... 62 4.1.5 168BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) ....... 62 4.1.6 169BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) .................................... 63 4.2 80BNeutral overcurrent protection ........................................................................................................... 63 4.2.1 170BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 63 4.2.2 17BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) .................................... 63 4.2.3 172BSetting range of neutral time inhibition (6 tables) ...................................................................... 63 4.2.4 173BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) ....... 64 4.2.5 174BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) .................................... 64 4.3 81BInstantaneous special operation ......................................................................................................... 64 4.4 82B2nd harmonic restraint ..................................................................................................................... 66 4.5 83BManual closing protection function locking ......................................................................................... 67 4.6 84BDirectionality of the phase and neutral overcurrent protections ............................................................ 67 4.6.1 175BPhase directional in quadrature (67) ......................................................................................... 68 4.6.2 176BPhase directional by sequences (67) ......................................................................................... 69 4.6.3 17BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0) ...................................................................... 71 4.6.4 178BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S- (V2) ....................................................................... 72 4.6.5 179BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S- (V0+V2) ........................................................... 72 4.6.6 180BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by I ................................................................................ 73 4.6.7 18BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+I (V0+Ipol) ........................................................... 73 4.6.8 182BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S-+I (V2+Ipol) ............................................................ 74 4.6.9 183BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S-+I (V0+V2+Ipol) ................................................ 74 4.6.10 184BNeutral directional (67N); Watimetric directional ..................................................................... 74 4.6.11 185BNeutral directional (67N); I*cos( ) / I*sen( )directional ........................................................... 75 4.7 85BSensitive neutral overcurrent protection ............................................................................................. 77 4.7.1 186BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 77 4.7.2 187BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) ........................................ 77 4.7.3 18BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (single level) (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) ......... 77 4.7.4 189BDirectionality ........................................................................................................................... 78 4.8 86BCurrent unbalance protection ............................................................................................................ 81 4.8.1 190BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 81 4.8.2 19BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................... 81 4.8.3 192BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ....................................................... 81 4.9 87BDirectionality of the current UNBALANCE protection ........................................................................... 82 4.9.1 193BNegative Sequence Directional .................................................................................................. 82 4.10 8BBroken conductor protection ........................................................................................................... 82 4.10.1 194BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 82 4.10.2 195BSettings range (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 83 4.10.3 196BBroken Conductor Mode 1 ...................................................................................................... 83 4.10.4 197BBroken Conductor Mode 2 ...................................................................................................... 83 4.10.5 198BBroken Conductor Mode 3 ...................................................................................................... 84 4.11 89BPhase characteristic voltage control (function 51V/50V) .................................................................... 84 4.12 90BHigh Current Lockout ...................................................................................................................... 85 4.12.1 19BDescription ............................................................................................................................ 85 4.12.2 20BSetting (table 0, single) .......................................................................................................... 86 4.13 91BCold Load Pickup ........................................................................................................................... 86 4.13.1 201BDescription ............................................................................................................................ 86 4.13.2 20BSettings (table 0, single) ........................................................................................................ 86 4.14 92BIsolated neutral protection .............................................................................................................. 88 4.14.1 203BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 88 4.14.2 204BSetting ranges ....................................................................................................................... 89 4.15 93BOvervoltage protection .................................................................................................................... 89 Ingeteam Power Technology S.A. PL300 User Manual

IV

INDEX 

4.15.1 205BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 89 4.15.2 206BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 90 4.15.3 207BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ..................................................... 90 4.16 94BUndervoltage protection .................................................................................................................. 91 4.16.1 208BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 91 4.16.2 209BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 91 4.16.3 210BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ..................................................... 92 4.17 95BVoltage unbalance protection .......................................................................................................... 92 4.17.1 21BTimed characteristic .............................................................................................................. 92 4.17.2 21BInstantaneous characteristic ................................................................................................... 92 4.18 96BZero sequence overvoltage protection ............................................................................................... 92 4.18.1 213BSetting range (6 tables) .......................................................................................................... 93 4.19 97BFrequency protection ...................................................................................................................... 93 4.19.1 214BMinimum frequency ............................................................................................................... 94 4.19.2 215BMaximum frequency ............................................................................................................... 94 4.19.3 216BFrequency gradient ................................................................................................................ 94 4.20 98BFuse failure .................................................................................................................................... 96 4.21 9BTeleprotection ................................................................................................................................ 97 4.21.1 217BOperation .............................................................................................................................. 97 4.21.2 218BSetting range (6 tables) .......................................................................................................... 98 4.21.3 219BProtection trip mask (6 tables) ................................................................................................ 98 4.21.4 20BUsed signals .......................................................................................................................... 99 4.22 10BThermal image ............................................................................................................................. 104 4.22.1 21BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 104 4.22.2 2BSettings .............................................................................................................................. 104 4.22.3 23BTrip times ........................................................................................................................... 105 4.22.4 24BHeating curves ..................................................................................................................... 105 4.22.5 25BCooling curves ..................................................................................................................... 107 4.23 10BField loss protection ..................................................................................................................... 108 4.23.1 26BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 108 4.23.2 27BGeneral setting range ........................................................................................................... 108 4.23.3 28BMHO zone setting range ....................................................................................................... 109 4.24 102BPower protection .......................................................................................................................... 110 4.24.1 29BGeneral ............................................................................................................................... 110 4.24.2 230BMinimum power protection ................................................................................................... 110 4.24.3 231BMaximum power protection ................................................................................................... 111 4.24.4 23BReverse power protection ...................................................................................................... 111 4.24.5 23BReactive power reverse protection ......................................................................................... 111 4.24.6 234BMinimum apparent power protection ..................................................................................... 112 4.24.7 235BMaximum apparent power protection ..................................................................................... 112 4.25 103BBreaker monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 113 4.25.1 236BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 113 4.25.2 237BSetting range (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 113 4.25.3 238BCoil supervision example ...................................................................................................... 114 4.26 104BOperation logic ............................................................................................................................. 114 4.26.1 239BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 114 4.26.2 240BSetting ranges (6 tables) ...................................................................................................... 115 4.27 105BBreaker failure protection .............................................................................................................. 115 4.27.1 241BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 115 4.27.2 24BSetting ranges (6 tables) ...................................................................................................... 115 4.28 106BTap Changer Locking (50TCL Function) ......................................................................................... 116 4.29 107BLocking of the protection functions ................................................................................................ 116 4.30 108BFault locator ................................................................................................................................ 116 4.30.1 243BIntroduction ........................................................................................................................ 116 4.30.2 24BProgramming settings and collecting results .......................................................................... 116 4.30.3 245BLocal Source Zero Sequence Impedance Setting .................................................................... 119 4.30.4 246BLocator operation ................................................................................................................. 120 Ingeteam Power Technology S.A. PL300 User Manual

V

INDEX 

4.31 109Bundercurrent PROTECTION (37) .................................................................................................... 124 4.31.1 247BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 124 4.31.2 248BSettings range ..................................................................................................................... 124

5.

AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................. 125 5.1 10BRecloser ........................................................................................................................................ 125 5.1.1 249BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 125 5.1.2 250BOperation .............................................................................................................................. 126 5.1.3 251BSetting ranges (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 128 5.1.4 25BTrips enabling (6 tables) ......................................................................................................... 128 5.1.5 253BEnable of reclosings (6 tables) ................................................................................................ 128 5.1.6 254BOther operation characteristics ................................................................................................ 129 5.2 1BSequence coordination ................................................................................................................... 130 5.3 12BReclosing after tripping by minimum frequency ................................................................................ 130 5.3.1 25BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 130 5.3.2 256BSettings ................................................................................................................................ 130 5.4 13BSpecial recloser to operate with protections with single-pole trip ........................................................ 131 5.5 14BSynchrocheck................................................................................................................................. 131 5.5.1 257BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 131 5.5.2 258BSettings ................................................................................................................................ 132 5.6 15BClose locking with presence or absence of voltage ............................................................................. 133 5.7 16BAutomation function for distribution centres ..................................................................................... 133 5.7.1 259BSlack springs automation functions ......................................................................................... 133 5.7.2 260BVoltage presence .................................................................................................................... 134 5.7.3 261BLocking ................................................................................................................................. 134

6.

OTHER SETTINGS........................................................................................................... 135 6.1 17BProgramming of logic outputs .......................................................................................................... 135 6.2 18Blogic Selectivity functions ............................................................................................................... 136 6.3 19BMeasurements chronological record ................................................................................................. 136

7.

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 137 7.1 20BE 1 vents reports ................................................................................................................................ 137 7.2 21BFault records .................................................................................................................................. 139 7.3 2BM 1 easurements ................................................................................................................................ 141 7.3.1 26BMeasurements at the secondary .............................................................................................. 141 7.3.2 263BMeasurements at the primary .................................................................................................. 142 7.3.3 264BVn-Vsinc measurement ........................................................................................................... 144 7.4 123BMeasurements historical report ........................................................................................................ 144 7.4.1 265BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 144 7.4.2 26BSetting range (6 tables) .......................................................................................................... 144 7.5 124BStatistical data ............................................................................................................................... 145 7.6 125BProtection status ............................................................................................................................ 145 7.6.1 267BBy keyboard / display ............................................................................................................. 145 7.6.2 268BThrough PC (Protections Console) ........................................................................................... 145 7.7 126BOscillograph data recorder ............................................................................................................... 146

8.

OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 147 8.1 27BT 1 ime setting ................................................................................................................................... 147 8.1.1 269BSynchronization ..................................................................................................................... 147 8.2 128BControl messages ........................................................................................................................... 147 8.3 129BLocal/Remote command .................................................................................................................. 152 8.4 130BCommands by keyboard and front pushbuttons ................................................................................. 153 8.5 13BPower supply supervision ................................................................................................................ 153 8.6 132BExternal supply supervision ............................................................................................................. 154 8.7 13BTemperature supervision ................................................................................................................. 154 8.8 134BTest Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 154


VI

INDEX 

9.

OPERATION MODE ......................................................................................................... 155 9.1 35BT 1 hrough keyboard/display ................................................................................................................ 155 9.1.1 270BIntroduction .......................................................................................................................... 155 9.1.2 271BElements of the keyboard /display unit .................................................................................... 155 9.1.3 27BOperating mode ..................................................................................................................... 156 9.2 136BThrough the PC .............................................................................................................................. 159

10.

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS ......................................................... 160

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

137BReception and storage .................................................................................................................. 160 138BConnecting procedure ................................................................................................................... 160 139BUnit addressing ............................................................................................................................ 161 140BCommissioning ............................................................................................................................. 161

APPENDIX I. 0BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY .......................................................................................... 162 APPENDIX II. 1BCURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................... 186 II.1. 1BC 2 EI 255-4 / BS142 Curves ............................................................................................................ 186 II.2. 2BANSI Curves ................................................................................................................................. 199 II.3. 3BU 2 ser curve .................................................................................................................................... 208

APPENDIX III. 2BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS ............................................................................ 210 APPENDIX IV. 3BCOMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU ....................................................... 218 IV.1. 24BSettings ....................................................................................................................................... 218 IV.2. 25BOperation indications .................................................................................................................... 220 IV.2.1 273BSpontaneous message indicating ............................................................................................ 220 IV.2.2 274BSynchronization .................................................................................................................... 220 IV.2.3 275BTreatment and detection of digital changes ............................................................................. 220 IV.2.4 276BTransfer of spontaneous messages .......................................................................................... 220 IV.2.5 27BParticular aspects of the operation ......................................................................................... 220 IV.3. 26BDevice Profile Document ............................................................................................................... 222 IV.4. 27BImplementation table .................................................................................................................... 223 IV.5. 28BSignal list .................................................................................................................................... 225 IV.5.1 278BDigital signals ....................................................................................................................... 225 IV.5.2 279BAnalogue measurements ........................................................................................................ 234 IV.5.3 280BCounters............................................................................................................................... 236 IV.5.4 281BCommands ........................................................................................................................... 236 IV.6. DNP FAULT REPORT .................................................................................................................... 237 IV.6.1 Fault number ........................................................................................................................ 237 IV.6.2 Fault current and fault voltage measures ................................................................................. 237 IV.6.3 Relay operating time .............................................................................................................. 238 IV.6.4 Breaker operating time ........................................................................................................... 238 IV.6.5 Flag of the operated phase ..................................................................................................... 238 IV.6.6 Fault Distance ....................................................................................................................... 238 IV.6.7 Event (trip or start) ................................................................................................................ 238 IV.6.8 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 238

APPENDIX V. 4BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ................................................................................... 241 V.1. 29BProtocol characteristics .................................................................................................................. 241 V.1.1 28BMessage format...................................................................................................................... 241 V.1.2 283BMODBUS functions ................................................................................................................ 241 V.1.3 284BMessage examples ................................................................................................................. 242 V.1.4 285BUnit status request ................................................................................................................. 246 V.1.5 286BChange request of digital signals ............................................................................................. 247 V.1.6 287BData request by user map ....................................................................................................... 248 V.1.7 28BSynchronization ..................................................................................................................... 248 V.1.8 289BCommand execution ............................................................................................................... 249 V.1.9 290BError codes ............................................................................................................................ 249 Ingeteam Power Technology S.A. PL300 User Manual

VII

INDEX 

V.2. 0BP 3 arameters.................................................................................................................................... 249 V.3. 1BU 3 nit addresses map ....................................................................................................................... 250 V.4. 2BD 3 ata formats ................................................................................................................................. 251

APPENDIX VI. 5BIEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ............................................. 255 VI.1. 3BSettings ....................................................................................................................................... 255 VI.2. 34BTables ......................................................................................................................................... 258 VI.3. 35BInteroperability profile IEC 870 5 101 ...................................................................................... 261 VI.3.1 291BSystem or device (system specific parameter) ......................................................................... 261 VI.3.2 29BNet configuration (net specific parameter) .............................................................................. 261 VI.3.3 293BPhysical layer (net specific parameter).................................................................................... 262 VI.3.4 294BLink layer (net specific parameter) ........................................................................................ 263 VI.3.5 295BApplication layer ................................................................................................................... 264 VI.3.6 296BApplication basic functions .................................................................................................... 268

APPENDIX VII. 6BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ........................................................................... 272 VII.1. VII.2. VII.3. VII.4. VII.5.

36B870-5-103 Communication Protocol Function ............................................................................... 272 37BSettings ...................................................................................................................................... 273 38BControl signals ............................................................................................................................ 273 39BControl analogue measurements ................................................................................................... 274 40BCommands.................................................................................................................................. 274

APPENDIX VIII. 7BIEC 61850PROTOCOL ..................................................................................... 275 VIII.1. 41BIntroduction ............................................................................................................................... 275 VIII.2. 42BPrevious steps toconfigurethe deviceTr......................................................................................... 276 VIII.2.1 297BIED Import to project .......................................................................................................... 277 VIII.3. 43BProtection Configuration ............................................................................................................. 278 VIII.3.1 298BIED Properties .................................................................................................................... 278 VIII.3.2 29BCommunications ................................................................................................................. 279 VIII.3.3 30BDatasets ............................................................................................................................. 281 VIII.3.4 301BReport Control Blocks (RCB) ................................................................................................ 282 VIII.3.5 302BGoose Control Blocks (GOCB) .............................................................................................. 283 VIII.3.6 30BGooseSubscription .............................................................................................................. 283 VIII.3.7 304BSettings ............................................................................................................................. 284 VIII.3.8 305BCommands ......................................................................................................................... 284 VIII.3.9 306BPrivate parts ....................................................................................................................... 284 VIII.4. 4BProtection update ....................................................................................................................... 285

APPENDIX IX. 8BPREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. 287 IX.1. 5BF 4 ailure detection .......................................................................................................................... 287 IX.2. 6BE 4 rror handling procedure ............................................................................................................... 288

APPENDIX X. 9BRECEPTION TESTS ............................................................................................. 289 X.1. 47BMaterial needed ............................................................................................................................ 289 X.2. 48BMeasurement test .......................................................................................................................... 289 X.2.1 307BMeasurements in display ........................................................................................................ 289 X.2.2 308BMeasurements in console........................................................................................................ 289 X.3. 49BProtection functions....................................................................................................................... 290 X.3.1 309BHardware status ..................................................................................................................... 291 X.3.2 310BInstantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency) ...................................................................... 291 X.3.2.1. Pickup and dropout in the trip ............................................................................................. 291 X.3.2.2. Speed of the instantaneous trip ........................................................................................... 291 X.3.2.3. Instantaneous trip with additional time ................................................................................ 292 X.3.2.4. Function locking test .......................................................................................................... 292 X.3.3 31BTimed units (current and voltage) ............................................................................................ 292 X.3.3.1. Pickup and dropout ............................................................................................................ 292 X.3.3.2. Definite time ...................................................................................................................... 292 Ingeteam Power Technology S.A. PL300 User Manual

VIII

INDEX 

X.3.3.3. Tripping times through curves ............................................................................................. 292 X.3.4 312BCurrent unbalance units ......................................................................................................... 292 X.3.4.1. Pickups ............................................................................................................................. 293 X.3.4.2. Trip times .......................................................................................................................... 293 X.3.5 31BBroken conductor unit ............................................................................................................ 293 X.3.5.1. Pickups ............................................................................................................................. 294 X.3.5.2. Trip times .......................................................................................................................... 294 X.4. 50BRecloser........................................................................................................................................ 294 X.4.1 314BInitial tests ............................................................................................................................ 295 X.4.1.1. TRIP (D),RECLOSURE (R),NORMAL (N)) ............................................................................. 296 X.4.1.2. D,R,D,R,N ......................................................................................................................... 296 X.4.1.3. D,R,D,R,D,R,N ................................................................................................................... 297 X.4.1.4. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R. ............................................................................................................... 297 X.4.1.5. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R,. DEF. TRIP ............................................................................................. 297 X.4.2 315BEnabling checking test ........................................................................................................... 298 X.4.2.1. Enabling of allowed trips ..................................................................................................... 298 X.4.2.2. Recloser enabling ............................................................................................................... 299 X.4.3 316BTests with/without reference voltage ........................................................................................ 299 X.4.4 317BRecloser locking test .............................................................................................................. 299 X.4.5 318BTime measurements ............................................................................................................... 299 X.4.5.1. Recloser time ..................................................................................................................... 299 X.4.5.2. Reclaim time ..................................................................................................................... 299 X.5. 51BCoil supervision ............................................................................................................................. 300 X.6. 52BChecking of the display and clock operation .................................................................................... 300 X.7. 53BTime setting of the unit .................................................................................................................. 301

APPENDIX XI. 10BDEFAULT SETTINGS .......................................................................................... 302


IX

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The equipment of the family PL-300 are multi-function protection relays using numerical technology, and they constitute the basic element of protection, measurement and control for cogeneration facilities or for HV/MV electrical bays. They can be used as autonomous elements of protection, control and measurement of an electric bay, or integrated within an Integrated Protection and Control System. Inside the family different models exist that differ to each other for some hardware aspect or for their functionality. The Firmware is common for all the models; the available functions for the user in each model are defined in a circuit of programmable logic (PLD). The Firmware is chargeable in the equipment through the serial port, what facilitates the versions updating.

1.1 SCOPE OF THE MANUAL 54B

This manual not only applies to a certain PL300 model, but to the whole family. For each specific model only the physical characteristics and functions of the model are applied. The manual consists of two volumes: the first contains the information regarding configuration, functions etc. and the second contains the following appendixes: curves for the operation of the timed functions, communication protocols, keyboard/display menu structure, etc. describes the functions of the specific model and its interconnections diagram.

1.2 FUNCTIONS 5B

Protection  Standard functions  Three phase overcurrent protection (3x50/51, with two instantaneous levels)  Neutral overcurrent protection (50N/51N, with two instantaneous levels)  Phase current unbalance protection (46)  Broken conductor protection (46BC)  Breaker monitoring  Close and trip circuit monitoring  Breaker failure  2nd harmonic restraint  Functions depending on model  Sensitive neutral overcurrent (50SN/51SN)  Directionality for the phase overcurrent (3x67)  Directionality for the neutral overcurrent (67N)  Isolated neutral directional (67IN)  Second directional overcurrent unit (67,67N), independent of the first unit  Voltage controlled overcurrent (50/51V), Cold Load Pickup, High Current Lockout  Special functions (zones, pilot protection, negative sequence directional...)  Phase voltage protection: overvoltage (3x59), undervoltage (3x27), unbalance (47)  Zero sequence overvoltage protection (59N, 64)  Frequency protection: maximum (81M), minimum (81m), df/dt (81R)  Power protection (32): maximum, minimum, reverse  Fuse failure surveillance


10

GENERAL DESCRIPTION   Thermal image (49)  Fault locator  Field loss (40)  Undercurrent protection (37)

Automations  Functions depending on model  Three-phase recloser (overcurrent trips)  Recloser for single-phase overcurrent trips  Recloser for restoration after frequency trips  Synchrocheck  Special automatisms for distribution centres (Slack springs, Voltage presence)

Measurements  Phase and neutral current measurement (optional: sensitive neutral)  Simple and compound voltage measurement  Active, reactive and apparent power measurement  Active and reactive energy measurement  Power factor measurement  Current maximeter  Negative sequence measurement (I2/I1) in %

Data acquisition  Events chronological reports  Fault chronological reports  Maximum and minimum measurement historical  Oscillograph data recorder

Other characteristics  Settings tables. Except for the configuration settings, which are single table settings, there are 6 tables for the various setting groups. One of the 4 tables is the active one in a certain moment. The active table selection can protections console or by activation of a digital input.


11


1.3 MODEL CODING 56B

The PL300 protection family has the following models:

Non directional: NB: 50/51 + 50/51N + 46 + 46BC + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC NC: Model NB + 50/51SN + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 68FF ND: Model NC + 59 + 27 + 47 + 59N + 81O/U + 81R + 25 NE: Model ND + FL (for all of them, the 79 function is optional)

Directional: DB: 67 + 67N + 46 + 46BC + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC DC: Model DB + 67SN + 67IN + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 68FF DD: Model DC + 59 + 27 + 47 + 59N + 81O/U + 81R + 25 + 37 DE: Model DD + 2nd unit 67/67N + 50BF (single-phase) DF: Model DE + FL (for all of them, the 79 function is optional)

Distributed generation interconnection: IB: 50/51 + 67N + 46 + 46BC+ 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 68FF + 59 + 27 + 47 + 59N + 81O/o + 81R + 25 + 32 + 79 + 79 (81o) + High current lockout IC: Model IB + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 2nd unit 67/67N + 37

For distribution centres: CR: 50/51 + 50/51N + 46 + 46BC+ 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 49 + 79 +High Current Lockout + Special automatisms

Special models: they are those that, in their functionality, do not exactly correspond to any of the families described: E1: 67 + 67N + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 51V + 79 +High Current Lockout + LF E2: 67 + 67N +67NS + 51V + 27 + 59 +59N + FF + 81 + 32 + 49 E3: 50/51 + 50/51N + 50/51NS + 67NA + 7 E4: 67 + 67N + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 51V + 79 +High Current Lockout + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC + 81 + 25 + 32 + LF E5: 67 + 67N + 67NA + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC + 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + High Current Lockout + 79 E6: 67 + 67N + 67NA + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC + 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + LF + High Current Lockout + 79 E7: 50/51 + 50/51N + 50/51NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC + 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + High Current Lockout + 79


12


Model coding:


13


Transformer arrangement:

Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model

NB NC ND* ND* NE* DB DB + current polarized 67N DC DC + current polarized 67N * DC + current polarized 67N * DD* DD* DD + current polarized 67N DE* DE + current polarized 67N DF* DF + current polarized 67N IB IB + current polarized 67N * IB + current polarized 67N * IC IC + current polarized 67N * CR

T4 IN IN IN IN Same IN IN IN IN ISN IN ISN ISN Same Same Same Same IN IN VO Same Same IN

T5

T9

ISN ISN VSYNC VO calculated VO VSYNC IN calculated transformer arrangement as model ND VO VO IO ISN VO ISN IO VO calculated VO IO IN calculated ISN VSYNC VO calculated VO VSYNC IN calculated IO VSYNC IN and VO calculated transformer arrangement as model DD transformer arrangement as model DD + current polarized 67N transformer arrangement as model DD transformer arrangement as model DD + current polarized 67N VO VSYNC IO VSYNC VO calculated IO VSYNC IN calculated transformer arrangement as model IB transformer arrangement as model IB + current polarized 67N

The units that have a V0 measuring input enables selecting the functions and protections related to this magnitude and this can be done directly with an average value or with the vector sum of the three phases of tension. See transformer arrangement examples in the wiring diagrams.

1.4 USER INTERFACE 57B

 Local. The front board has:  16 key keyboard  4 signalled push-buttons 

I: breaker closure



O: breaker opening



L/R: Local / Remote

 

unwished manoeuvres. It must be pushed at the same time you push the other buttons for them to have effect. These pushbuttons must be pushed at least for 0.5 seconds to be considered active.

 

 2 line, 16-character LCD  7 red LEDs and one green/red  RS232 connector for direct connection with a PC. Procome protocol.  Remote. Depending on model, the rear board has one or two ports which can be Glass fiber optic (ST type connector), Plastic fiber optic, RS232 or RS485 for connection to PC, modem or Substation Control unit (in Integrated Systems). The protocol can be Procome, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC 870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-103.


14

GENERAL DESCRIPTION   Ethernet communication (RJ45, GFO)  It is only applied in those models equipped with an Ethernet port 

PROCOME encapsulated



DNP encapsulated



Peer to peer communications.



61850

 IEC 61850 communication options 

Single RJ45 Ethernet



Single FOC Ethernet



Double GFO Ethernet redundancy

 For serial communication these IEC 61850 models (R-type box) include: 

1 RS232 port Procome protocol



1 GFO (unique option in case of double GFO Ethernet) or RS485 protocol DNP3.0.

1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS 58B

Here below is a description of the hardware possibilities defined in specific models:

Box type:  Horizontal  Vertical

Terminal type:  For pin type terminals  For closed terminals

Terminals:  Torque of terminals mounted on the rear panel.  Supply terminals 

Minimum:

0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)



Maximum:

0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)

 I/O terminals: 

Minimum:

0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)



Maximum:

0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)

 Current and voltage terminals (plug-in connector) 

Minimum:

0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)



Maximum:

0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)

 Current and voltage terminals (closed terminals) 

Minimum:

0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)



Maximum:

1.3 Nm (12 in-lb)

 Terminal wiring The terminal cables must be made of single-section copper AWG 12 to 18 (4 mm2 to 0.8mm2)

 Supply terminals 

Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)

 I/O terminals:


15




Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)

 Current and voltage terminals 

Section AWG 12 cables (4 mm2)

Power supply:  125 / 220 Vdc  24 / 48 Vdc *For more details see 2.8.1.Auxiliary power supply voltaje section.

Digital inputs voltage range:  Extended (low): 18 up to 160 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).  Extended (high): 86 up to 280 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).  Restricted 24 Vdc: 18 up to 34 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).  Restricted 48 Vdc: 36 up to 60 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).  Restricted 125 Vdc: 85 up to 150 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).  Restricted 220 Vdc: 165 up to 264 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).

Number of digital inputs/outputs:  Standard:  8 inputs (5 independent, 3 with a common point)  7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)  Extended (option 1): adds to the standard  9 inputs (6 independent, 3 with a common point)  7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)  Extended (option 2): adds to the standard  5 independent inputs  6 outputs (4 independent, 2 with a common point)  2 analogue inputs (0 to 5 mA); ask the factory about other ranges.  Extended (option 3): adds to the standard  27 inputs (first 12 with a common point and next 15 with another common point). 

Rear communication:  Glass optical fiber (GOF)  Plastic optical fiber (POF)  RS232  RS485  GOF + GOF  POF + POF  RS232 + RS232  RS485 + RS232  GOF + RS232  GOF + Ethernet (RJ45)  GOF + Ethernet (OF)


16

GENERAL DESCRIPTION   RS232 + Ethernet (RJ45)  RS485 + Ethernet (RJ45) In case of having two rear ports, the one mentioned in second place is in parallel with the front RS232 (they occupy the same port) except in the case it is Ethernet.

Analogue inputs: The unit can have up to 9 analogue inputs (through transformer). Inputs 1, 2 and 3 are used for phase currents measurement. Input 4 is used for neutral current measurement. Input 5 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:

 No input  Sensitive neutral or isolated neutral current measurement  Zero sequence voltage measurement V0 Inputs 6, 7 and 8 are used for the phase voltages measurement. Input 9 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:

 No input  Line voltage measurement for the Synchrocheck function  Zero sequence voltage measurement V0

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 59B

Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity

-20 up to 85 ºC -40 up to 85 ºC up to 95% without condensation

1.7 TESTS 60B

1.7.1 Electrical tests 14B

Measurement of dielectric rigidity Measurement of insulation resistance Pulse (shock wave) HF disturbances Fast transients Immunity to electrostatic discharges Voltage pulses Micro-cuts Radiated electromagnetic interference Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to conducted radiofrequency signals Immunity to low frequency radiated fields

s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/ s/

IEC255-5, series C (2 kV, 1 minute) IEC 255-5, > 10 Gigaohms at 500 Vdc IEC -255-5, appendix E., class III IEC -255-22-1, class III IEC 61000-4-4, class IV IEC 61000-4-2, class IV IEC 61000-4-5, class IV IEC 60870-2-1, 100ms at 110 Vdc EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-4-3, class III IEC 61000-4-6, class III IEC 61000-4-8

1.7.2 Environmental tests 142B

Cold Dry heat

s/ IEC 68-2-1 (-40ºC) s/ IEC 68-2-2 (+85ºC)


17


Humid heat Change of temperatura Operating range

s/ IEC 68-2-3 (+70ºC, 93% relative humidity) s/ IEC 68-2-14 (-20º/70ºC 2 4-hour cycles) -10ºC. up to 55ºC

1.7.3 Mechanical tests 143B

Vibration test Shock and bump test

s/ IEC 255-21-1 class II s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I


18


1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS 61B

All the following wiring diagrams show one of the possible digital input and output programming (very simple). See all the In the outputs with change-over contact the common point is the middle one. -

.

NB and CR models


19


NC model


20


ND, NE, DD, DE y DF models (with V0 calculated cod. ** **1*****01)


21


ND, NE, DD, DE and DF models (with IN calculated, , cod. ** **1*****02)


22


DB model (cod. DB **1******0)


23


DC model (cod. DC **1*****00)


24


DC model with polarization with 67N current (V0 calculated cod. DC **1*****11)


25


DC model with polarization ith 67N current (IN calculated, cod. DC **1*****12)


26


DD, DE and DF models with polarization by 67N current (IN and V0 calculated, cod. ** **1*****13)


27


IB, IC models (cod. I* **1*****00)


28


IB, IC models with polarization by 67N current (V0 calculated cod. I* **1*****11)


29


IB, IC models with polarization by 67N current (IN calculated, cod. I* **1*****12)


30


Special models Some special models only have its functionality as special. For example, the wiring diagram of E1 Type models is the same as that of NC family.

EH3030/EH8030 model (Special type E1)


31


Sometimes, the units can be used with different wiring to those indicated. Examples:

EH3018 model (Special type E2)


32


EH8007 model (special type E3)


33


EH3211 model (special type E4)


34


EH3273model (special type E5) and EH3272model (special type E6)


35


EH8274model (special type E7)


36


The terminal numbers indicated in the previous wiring diagrams is for units with pin type terminals. If the units have closed type terminals, the only difference lies on those terminals corresponding to T6 and T9 transformers, because VA, VB and VC measurement transformers, have a common point (compound voltages cannot be connected with closed type terminals, but only single voltages can).

Connections of the analogue inputs in models with closed type terminals:

Connections of the extension boards (optional)


37


Block diagram


38

HARDWARE 

2. HARDWARE 2.1 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. HORIZONTAL BOX (PL300H) 62B

Unit external dimensions

2.2 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. VERTICAL BOX (PL300V) 63B


2.3 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. TCP MOUNTED 64B



39

HARDWARE 

2.4 REAR TERMINALS 65B

Standard (all for pin type terminals)

Option with closed type terminals for analogue inputs

2.5 OPTIONS FOR REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORTS: 6B

Single port

OF (glass or plastic)

RS485

RS232


40

HARDWARE 

Double port

OF + OF

RS485+RS232

Ethernet RJ45+ OF

RS232+RS232

Eth.RJ45+RS232

OF+RS232

Ethernet OF +OF

Eth.RJ45+RS485


41

HARDWARE 

2.6 RS485 CONNECTION DETAIL BETWEEN SEVERAL UNITS 67B

SCREEN

COMPU TER

NETWORK END R 120 Ohms

SCREEN

Screened twisted pair

SCREEN

DB9 Female type rear connector (in the unit)

PL/PD/PM UNIT

SCREEN

SCREEN PL/PD/PM UNIT

SCREEN

NETWORK END R120 Ohms

LAST UNIT

PL/PD/PM UNIT

Rest of DB9 connector terminals without3 inner Although there is an internal connection in the unit between 1 and 2 pin and between pin number and 4, if a connection is done on the bus side, as it is shown in the figure, a unit can be removed without causing a loss in the chain continuity. connection


42

HARDWARE 

Optical fibre connection to radio modem


43

HARDWARE 

2.7 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION 68B

2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF 14B

The characteristics of the optical channels are as follows: 

Baud rate:

100Mb



Connector:

ST



Optical transmitter:

LED



Optical receiver:

PIN Photodiode



Optical output:

Without modulating.



Work wave length:

Glass c = 1300nm



BER



Multimode glass optical fiber:



The values consider the temperature range from 20ºC to +85ºC.



Losses depending on the Fibre type.

10-9 62.5/125 m.

Max. allowed losses Losses Km Connection losses 4 db 0.5 db Glass 62.5/125 m 8 db

The transmission maximum distance is given by:

l

PP PC ME 

PP= Losses allowed in the link



PC= Inset losses of additional connections



ME= Aging margin. 3 db must be considered



= Cable loss in db/Km

 

Reachable maximum distance: Glass 62.5/125 m

Under the worst conditions In the best conditions 1.25 Km 2 Km

2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable 145B



Interface through isolated transformer of 600 impedance ohms



Insulation 500 V



Connector RJ45 (female)



Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.



Cable type: Shielded



Cable length: 100 m max


44

HARDWARE 

2.8 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS 69B

2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage 146B

Power supply technical data: Auxiliary power supply 24-48 Vdc Range Ripple 110-125-220 Vdc Range Ripple Burden

18-60 Vdc 20 % over the rated current 86-280 Vdc 20% over the rated current 8W min/ 18W max

The units have been designed to be installed and run in environments equipped with a safe and stable direct current supply. The switched, high-capacity power supplies can be used with alternating current within the following limits: 

From 18 to 60 Vdc peak values for the 24-48 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 14 Vac to 42 Vac RMS approximately.



From 18 to 280 Vdc peak values for the 110-125-200 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 70 Vac to 195 Vac RMS approximately.

The digital outputs can operate both in DC and in AC power supply systems. The units have been tested and certified to IEC standards for installation and operation in direct current systems. They have not been tested to AC equipment standards.

2.8.2 Output contacts 147B

Relays 1 to 6 and 8 to 13: 

Carry

5 A at 25ºC



Make (0.5 s)

30 A



Breaking capacity (resistive load)



 for 220 Vdc:

0.4 A

 for 125 Vdc:

1A

 for 48 Vdc:

3A

Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)

 for 220 Vdc:

0.2 A

 for 125 Vdc:

0.5 A

 for 48 Vdc:

0.5 A

Relays 7 to 14: 

Carry

5 A at 25ºC



Make (0.5 s)

30 A



Breaking capacity ( resistive load)

 for 220 Vdc:

0.15 A

 for 125 Vdc:

0.4 A

 for 48 Vdc:

2A


45

HARDWARE 



Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)

 for 125 Vdc:

0.3 A

 for 48 Vdc:

0.5 A

2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated) 148B

Extended range: 

High: Operating range 86 up to 280 Vdc (inactive below 60 Vdc)



Low: Operating range 18 up to 160 Vdc (inactive below 13 Vdc)



Burden: < 3 mA

They are single-directional. In the interconnection diagrams they are presented as follows: n n+1

And the corresponding polarity is: n

+

n+1

-

Restricted range: 

24 Vdc: operating range 18 up to 34 Vdc (inactive below 13 Vdc)












Burden: <=3 mA

They are two-directional (they do not have polarity)

2.8.4 IRIG-B input 149B



Demodulated input, TTL level



Type of cable: 2 shielded twisted wires



Isolation: 500 V


46

HARDWARE 

Connections:

The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an optocoupler; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA. The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on its capacity of supplying output current; a typical value could be 70 mA, so 6 units could be connected, (although the length and the type of wire can also influence). The wire must be shielded and twisted.

2.8.5 Analogue outputs 150B



Range:

0 to 5 mA



Accuracy:

+- 1% of the scale background



Maximum load:

1200 Ohms



Isolation:

1 kV

2.8.6 Phase and neutral current circuits (single rated current 1/5 A) 15B



Thermal capacity

 Continuous

20 A

 For 1 second:

500 A

 For ½ cycle

1250 A



Burden for In = 5 A

<0.2VA



Burden for = 1 A

0.02VA


47

HARDWARE 

2.8.7 Sensitive neutral or isolated neutral current circuits 152B





Thermal capacity

 Continuous

20 A

 For 1 second

500A (1 sec.)

Burden for In = 0, 25 A

0.002VA

2.8.8 Voltage circuits 153B



Thermal capacity

 Continuous

260V

 For 1 second

5 Un

 Burden for 63.5 V

0.015 VA

 Burden for 100 V

<0.03 VA

2.8.9 Measurement accuracy 154B



Current

 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In) 

With In = 1:

class 1 (1% of In)



With In = 5:

class 0.5 (0.5% of In)

 Protection range (0.1 to 200 A) 

1% of the real value, for I >1 A



3% of the real value, for I <1 A

(In the zone in which the measurement range and the accuracy protection are overlaid, the accuracy will be the best one) 

Voltage

 Accuracy 

0.5% of the nominal voltage Un up to 1.2*Vn

Dephase angle

 Accuracy 

1º

Active power

 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In*1.2*Vn)



 With In = 1:

class 1 (1% of Pn)

 With In = 5:

class 0.5 (0,5% of Pn)

Frequency

 Accuracy

0.01Hz

2.9 OPERATING FREQUENCY 70B



Rated: 50 or 60 Hz (programmable)



Operating range: fn

5 Hz


48

HARDWARE 

2.10 PHASE ORDER 71B

ABC or CBA (programmable)


49

UNIT CONFIGURATION 

3. UNIT CONFIGURATION The settings that are defined next configure the unit, for what they are basic. Some are only accessible by keyboard/display; others are also accessible by Console. All of them are of single table (Table 0). By keyboard/display you access the programming of the table 0 through the menu .

3.1 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL INPUTS AND LOGIC INPUTS 72B

In the unit there are two different types of inputs: the digital inputs (physical, wired in the field) or logical inputs (internal). h at the same time. The programming of digital inputs is as follows: ht. By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG

CONFIG. INPUTS

SELECT. N0/NC INPUTS ACTIV. T. CONFIG INPUTS allows programming a digital input among the following possibilities:

 Breaker status  Reference voltage (for the recloser)  External protection (79/50BF). It causes reclosure (depending on the enables) and activates the Breaker failure function (three-phase)

 Close command. It activates the closure relay  Open command. Activates the general trip  Instantaneous inhibition. If it is active, the overcurrent instantaneous does not trip, but they count the time passed since their picking up. So, when de input is deactivated and the additional programmed time is elapsed, they trip instantaneously.

 Set table 1. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 1 as the active table:  Set table 2. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 2 as the active table.  Set table 3. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 3 as the active table.  Set table 4. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 4 as the active table.  Set table 5. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 5 as the active table.  Set table 6. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 6 as the active table  Set Local command/Remote  Close circuit supervision 1 with 52 open  Close circuit supervision 1 with 52 close  Trip circuit supervision 1 with 52 open  Trip circuit supervision 1 with 52 close  Close circuit supervision 2 with 52 open  Close circuit supervision 2 with 52 close  Trip circuit supervision 2 with 52 open


50

UNIT CONFIGURATION   Trip circuit supervision 2 with 52 close  to fault recognition for keyboard/display.

 df/dt breaker (Level 1 to Level 4). Option for 81R function  Teleprotection reception (for 85 function)  Guard signal loss (for 85 function)  Zone 3 address reverse (for 85 function)  79/50BF. External protection A, B, C. They cause reclosure (depending on the enables) and they activate the respective Breaker Failure functions (single-phase).

 Slack springs. For the corresponding automation  Fuse failure. It activates the function with the same name.  Thermal image reposition. It resets the thermal image temperature.  67 NS Isen(phi) or Icos(phi). It allows using any algorithm, regardless of the setting in the neutral directional.  67 NS Isen(phi) or Icos(phi). It allows using any algorithm, regardless of the setting in the sensitive neutral directional.

 Close locking, it locks all the close commands, recloser, pushbutton, command, and digital input.  Relay locking; while it is active, it sets the relay out of service.  Recloser locking. If it is active, it locks the recloser and it does not allow its unlocking by communications.  TOC phases trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC neutral trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC sensitive neutral trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC unbalanced trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC phases High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC neutral High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  TOC neutral sensitive High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.  Not allocated. The input can be used by the protection for lockout or logical, or not be used, anyway its state can be transmitted to control You should not program more than one input with a determined function. SELECT. NO/NC. It defines if the input must be interpreted like active when it is viewed closed or when it is viewed open. Regardless of what has been selected, the digital inputs programmed in outputs, logics, leds, state signalling will display one when there is voltage in the input and zero when there is no voltage in the input. For example, for the status of the circuit breaker, if we use a contact 52a we should program the corresponding input as NO (when it closes it will indicate closed circuit breaker), while if we use a 52b we should program it as NC (when it opens it will indicate closed circuit breaker). T.ACTIV.INPUTS (inputactivation time). It is a software filter for the activation / deactivation of digital inputs. The HW filter is of 1 ms, and it can be extended by software in the number of programmed milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms). The programming of logical inputs is as follows: re of the two located on the right. By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG

CONFIG. INPUTS

LOGICAL INPUTS SELECT. N0/NC


51


A logical input is a virtual input (not physical), where its status depends on the status of the corresponding logical input (input 1 corresponds to signal 1, input 15 to signal 15). Its function is the one that has been programmed (the programming possibilities are the same as for the digital inputs). This procedure enables the assignation of the relay internal signals to those inputs as if they were wired field signals. Up to 15 logical inputs are permitted (there are only 15 logical signals). NO/NC selection, input active when the logic is active or inactive. Delay is not applied to the activation. Example: if pr when logical input 3 is active. digital input and as logical input.

3.2 FLICKER MANAGEMENT IN DIGITAL INPUTS 73B

3.2.1 General description 15B

The flicker consists of a rapid and continuous change in a digital input, normally associated to a failure in the input contact. This function enables to perform a control that will disable the inputs or digital signals that flicker avoiding that they could interfer in the integrated control system because when a digital signal has been disabled, it will not display the status changes. Three settings have been added in the digital inputs in order to management the flicker: 

Minimum Nº of changes to mark the flicker: Minimum Nº of changes of a signal that should be generated in a specific interval of time in order to consider that the contact is faulty and that the mentioned signal will be disabled. (changes are not updated nor its status is refreshed).



Maximum Nº. of changes to mark the flicker: Maximum Nº of changes of a signal that should be generated in a specific interval of time in order to consider that the contact is not faulty and that a signal previously disabled is enabled.



Flicker time interval (sec.): Time interval is calculated in seconds in order to enable and disable the digital signals by flicker.

Once a higher number of programmed changes have been detected, the signal will be displayed as invalid; a Procome change will be generated indicating the change as invalid and from this moment, the mentioned signal will not detect anymore changes. There are three options in order to enable the signals previously disabled: 

Unit manual reset.



Automatic enable: if a digital input previously disabled changes status less time than the maximum number of changes that mark the flicker (parameter), in the flicker time interval (parameter), the mentioned input will be enabled. If the parameter for the máximum number of changes in the flicker has value 0, the automatic enabling for the digital signals will not be carried out.



Operator enable: default order or programmed by the user (general order that can be sent from the console or from the Control Center) by giving orders to the unit to enable all of the digital inputs that are disabled.The order will enable the disabled digital inputs without affecting the flickering management, which means that if after the order a flicker is detected in the inputs, they will automatically be disabled.


52


3.2.2 Settings range for flicker management 156B

Setting Minimum number of changes necessary to establish intermittence Maximum number of changes necessary to eliminate intermittence Time interval for intermittence (sec.)

Min.

Max. Step

0

255 1

0

255 1

1

60

Remarks

1

3.3 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS 74B

By console it is carried By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG

PROG. OUTPUTS OUTPUT ACTIV. T.

The functionality of each digital output can be programmed like an OR of the logical signals available in this unit (see point In the programming through Console (recommended), for each digital output it is clicked with the mouse in the cells corresponding to the signs whose OR wants to be activated by the output (dot-matrix programming). w the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to YES) and that of opening failure. If it is of the type e is keyboard/d The time of activation of outputs defines the minimum time of operation of each physical output once it has been activated (in seconds). The range is 0.05 to 5 sec. It appears in the last line of the screen. the following possibilities NO SIGNAL (the output remains without assigning, but it can be activated by control commands) SAME SIGNALS (it is not wished to change the current programming) signals with the arrow ; when we arrive to a indicated.

3.4 PROGRAMMING OF LEDS 75B

Through Consol By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG

PROG. LEDs

The proceedings are totally analogous to the programming of digital outputs, except that the activation time is not programmed and that the keyboard/display, digital input or command


53


3.5 PROGRAMMING OF GENERAL SETTINGS 76B


Relay in service: it has to be at Yes in order to have the protection fully operative. If it is at NO the protection responds to the communications and the keyboard/display in order to be put in service; besides it activates the relay and/or LED Breaker number: it is an identifying text. It can be programmed as alphanumerical by communications, but by keyboard only as numerical. Event mask: In the masked, from the PC. They can not be masked from the keyboard.

Transformation ratios: used by the protection only to give measurements referred to the primary. Nominal voltage: it is the nominal single-phase voltage. It is used by the protection to give measurements in Procome format (the scale range of the voltage measurements is 1.2 times the nominal voltage). -

-

phase). In the case of units with closed terminals only the single ones can be applied. Voltage measurement: it indicates over which voltages the voltage protections must be applied. tings of voltage Type and Measurement On the same Console screen, and by keyboard/display on CORRECTION FACTOR (at the same level as PROG.CHART 0) can be found the following settings: number for which the counter is increased in one unit. ans the kVARh number for which the counter is increased in one unit. and reactive power given to control (it does not affect to data given by display). It is, in per unit values, the scale range in which measurements are given related to the corresponding power to 1.2In and 1.2 Vn. It means that if the range required

0T

POWER BACKGROUND 0T6U

U0T6

3 × 1.2 In × 1.2 Vn

Example 1. In = 5 A, Vn = 63.5 V (110 / 3) 0T

0T

If it is required that the power scale range should be the power corresponding to 6 A (1.2 * 5) and 76.2 V (1.2 * 63.5). POWER BACKGROUND = 3 * 6 * 76.2 POWER SCALE = 1 Example 2. In = 5 A, Vn = 63.5 V (110 / 3) 0T

0T

It is required a power scale range of 1000 W.


54


POWER BACKGROUND = 1000 POWER SCALE = 1000 / (3 * 1.2 *5 *1.2 * 63.5) = 0.729

Only by keyboard/display in IRIG-B FORMAT (at the same level of PROG.TABLA 0) the following setting can be found: " IRIG-B Format ": it determines if the year is taken into account or it is not in the Irig synchronization. The options are: the unit disposes of two analogue outputs, which offer an output in milliamperes proportional to the measured value. They can be programmed among the following options (only through a console): 

I maximum, secondary current maximeter. Background scale 6A



VA, VB, VC and V average, secondary simple voltages. Background scale Vn*1.2



VAB, VBC, VCA, U Compound average, secondary compound voltages. Background scale 3*Vn * 1.2



IN, IA, IB, IC, I average, secondary currents. Background scale 6A



[P(Active Power)], Secondary P absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1.2*6



[Q(Reactive Power)], Secondary Q absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1.2*6



[S(Apparent power)], Secondary S absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1,2*6



[Cos A], Absolute value of phase A power factor. Background scale 1



[Cos B], Absolute value of phase B power factor. Background scale 1



[Cos C], Absolute value of phase A power factor. Background scale 1



[Cos average], Absolute value of average power factor. Background scale 1



Distance to fault, expressed in % of the line total length



The operation of the analogue output used to give distance to fault is explained in the section

3.5.2 Setting ranges (table 0, single) 158B

Setting Relay in service Breaker number Events mask Phase curr. turn. ratio Neutral cur. turn. ratio Sens. N. cur. turn ratio Voltage turn. ratio Simple rated voltage (V) Type of voltage Measurement of voltage

Min.

Max.

Step

1 1 1 1 40.0

3,000 3,000 3,000 9,999 200.0

1 1 1 1 0.1

Notes YES/NO 5 alphanumeric char.

It is referred to the simple voltage Simple/Compound Phases in which it is measured B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)

IRIG-B Format Analogue output 1 Analogue output 2

Setting Active energy constant (kWh) Reactive energy constant (kVARh) Power correction factor

Min. 1 1 0.010

Max. 9999 9999 2.000

Step 1 1 0.001

Notes


55


3.6 COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION 7B

3.6.1 Communication via front door (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2) (COM 1) 159B

The PL300 unit has an address identifying number, which makes possible to identify the messages sent to the unit, from the PC, via its front port (or via its rear port in parallel), with protocol PROCOME. This address is programmable from the s Console. The units leave the factory with the address 4. This number is the one used in the Engineering program when defining the installation. If, for any reason, this number is changed in Engineering, the address programming has to be changed, and vice versa. If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as They are also

parity, 1 bit of Stop.

In addition to the keyboard/display, the settings may be displayed/programmed from a PC using the Protections Console. 115200 baud rate or higher, they are only used for firmware teleload, and not to be used in normal operation.

3.6.2 Communication via rear port no. 1 (Port 2) (COM 2) 160B

"SELEC.COMMU. COM2" or from the "GENERAL SETTINGS", "Configuration General" screen in the Protections Console. The options are: Procome, DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 or IEC870-5-103 .

Procome: a setting group is programmed which is analogous to the one defining the front port (it is not necessary that they have the same values).

DNP: If the option chosen is DNP, the address is programmable from the keyboard/di one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of DNP parameters without being programmed. They have to be programmed by the user. If a replacement of the PL300 unit by other is made, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed. The unit also has an identification number of the Master unit to which is connected, and which only accepts messages address 0. The baud rate, the parity and the number of STOP bits are also programmable. The units leave the factory at 9600 baud, without parity, 1 Stop bit.

Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC with the Protection Console. For more detail on communication DNP, see the corresponding Appendix


56


MODBUS: If the chosen option is MODBUS, the address is programmable from This address does not need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of the MODBUS parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user. 3T

3T

If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed. They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT signal (internal). C Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC with the Protection Console. For more detail on MODBUS, see the corresponding Appendix.

IEC 870-5-101: If the chosen opti e front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of the 101 parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user. If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed. They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT signal (internal). The established communication settings can be seen on displa Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC For more detail on 101 communication, see the corresponding Appendix. This protocol can not be used with RS485 port.

IEC 870-5-103: oes not need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of the 103 parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user. If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed. They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT signal (internal).

Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC For more detail on 103 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.

3.6.3 EthernetCommunication 16B

It is only applied in models with Ethernet port.


57


In order to configure the Ethernet port the fist parameter to be configured corresponds to the TCP/IP communication selection. It is programmed from the keyboard/display, by entering "CHANGE SETTINGS", "PROG. TABLE 0", The options of this parameter are: Procome, DNP, Procome+DNP, Comm. Horizontal and No. the operation according to this parameter is as follows:

Procome Through Ethernet port communication with Procome protocol is possible. In this case the selection of Procome protocol in col, whilst in the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out through the selected protocol, except Procome.

DNP: Through Ethernet port communication with DNP protocol is possible. In this case the selection of DNP protocol in the other DNP protocol, whilst in the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out through Procome protocol.

Procome + DNP: Through Ethernet port communication with Procome and DNP protocols. In this case no communication is allowed by the other port Procome and DNP protocol, whilst in the second rear port (if available) the setting is "No".

Horizontal Com. Through Ethernet, communication among several protection relays is possible, according how they are programmed. Each relay can communicate with other two relays sending 8 different programmable signals to each of them. These programmable signals can be selected among those available in the unit and it will receive 8 signals from each of the 1 to 8. the necessary parameters to configure the horizontal communication are the 

Protection IP address. It indicates the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated by dots.



Relay 1 IP address (Identifier). It indicates the protection 1 IP address with which communication is desired. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated by dots. If the IP address is programmed as 0.0.0.0 , then it will not communicate with that relay.



Signals to be transmitted Relay 1. They are the signals that are going to be sent to Relay 1 (that with the protection programmed in the previous parameter as the protection IP address).



Relay 2 IP address (Identifier). It indicates the protection 2 IP address with which communication is desired. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated by dots. If the IP address is programmed as 0.0.0.0 , then it will not communicate with that relay.



Signals to be transmitted Relay 2. They are the signals that are going to be sent to Relay 2 (that with the protection programmed in the previous parameter as the protection IP address).



The operation is as follows: each relay communicates with the other two, by sending the state of these signals every 10 ms; if a change is detected in the programmed signals, it immediately sends the states and repeats them 5 ms and 10 ms later. If there are no new changes it goes back to its normal operation and it sends the states every 10 ms again. In order to determine communication failures it is necessary to wait 40 ms; if within this time no communication is received from the relay 1 or 2, failure will be given with the corresponding relay.

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

0T

 unit itself, that is, they can be made logics, move them to outputs and so on etc.

NO Communication is not carried out through Ethernet port. In this case, the second rear port (if available) communicates through the selected protocol, Procome is allowed. The remaining configuration parameters of Ethernet port are configured with the Sipcon console, in the menu These parameters are those below: 

Generals


58

UNIT CONFIGURATION   Protection IP address. It shows the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal 0T

0T

notation separated by dots.

 Subnet mask. It defines which part of the IP address identified by the network. They are 32 bits, in 0T

0T

decimal notation separated by dots. All those IP addresses that do not fulfil the net mask, that is, those which do not have the part of the net mask at 1 are not considered to belong to the net and they are not treated. For example, the mask 255.255.255.000 allows 256 server addresses that would share the first three values of the address.

 Gateway. Link gate. It shows the IP address the messages will be sent to for those servers tat do not 0T

0T

belong to the local net. It will be the IP address of the unit in charge of carrying out the router functions of the net.

 No. of connections. It is fixed at 1. 0T



0T

Procome

 IP master address. It shows the PC address (customer unit) 0T

0T

 Port. It shows the port the master unit is connected to. 0T

0T

 UCL address. It is the protection address the protocol responds to. 0T



0T

DNP

 Communicates with any master regardless of the IP it have.The port to connect is 20,000  All other settings related to the protocol would be the same than serial except related itself to serial communication

3.7 OTHER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS 78B

These settings may be accessed via the keyboard/display or the Protections Console. When accessing via the Console,

3.7.1 Accessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console 162B

Frequency It can be 50 Hz or 60 Hz. It is a fundamental protection setting. If it is not the correct one, the measurements and, therefore, the protection operation will be wrong.

Language It can be English or Spanish. It relates to the texts shown on display.

Phase order It can be A, B, C or C, B, A. It affects only to the protection functions of broken conductor and unbalance (currents and voltages). To verify that the order correspo inverse/direct component is close to 0%, when introducing 3 balanced currents of about 1 A.

Push-buttons enabling/ LEDs and locking by command -

ur settings:

pushbuttons and the keys can be used to order commands. These buttons will be only effective when the unit is in

associated to this pushbutton. Then the unit is set in local and the functional pushbuttons can be used.


59


nothing. enabling

Functional keys enabling in remote mode Enables the keys to be used as push buttons when the unit is in remote mode. This is applicable to programmed, functional and command keys.

Allows locking via protocols Enables an order issued via a communications protocol to lock a protection function. When the setting is the locking commands received via communications are ignored.

Enabling power supply for its operation

Neutral parameter es

3.7.2 Accessible only via keyboard/display 163B

Calibration This menu position is exclusively to be used by the Ingeteam Power Technology SA technicians, according to a certain procedure. It should not be used by the user.

Testing mode This position of the menu must exclusively be used by the technicians of Ingeteam Power Technology SA, according to a certain procedure. It can not be used by the user.

Display contrast setting The procedure to follow is the following one: 

By pushing key ↑ and ↓

 

-key keyboard) for 3 to 5 seconds, you can enter the contrast setting menu ↑

↓

In already carried out.


60

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS 

4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS 4.1 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 79B


Three-phase overcurrent protection, with the next selectable characteristics (function 50/51):

Timed characteristic 

Inverse normal time( I BSC or I ANSI)



Inverse short time(IC BSC)



Inverse long time (IL BSC)



Very inverse time (MI BSC or MI ANSI)



Extremely inverse time (EI BSC or EI ANSI)



Very inverse special time (MIEs BSC)



Moderately inverse time (ANSI)



4 User curve(USER 1 to USER 4)



Definite time



Drop out with disc emulation option

Instantaneous characteristic 

Two instantaneous elements



Additional time

The operation of this protection is coordinated with the reclosing function. Some protection families have a second directional overcurrent function (67,67N), independent of the first one, and which will be called HIGH2.

4.1.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) 165B

PHASES Setting Enable Pickup (A)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.05

200.0

0.01

Curve type

Time index Definite time (s)

0.05 0.5 0.0

1.09 30.0 600.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

TIME chart.

Notes YES/NO/pickup/YES+drop out Definite time Normal curve, very inverse, extrem. Inverse, etc. User curve 1 to 4 For IEC curves For ANSI curves Definite time if it is TF type

They can be modified depending on the voltage, if If the Enable setting is set at YES, the function can generate trips, if it is at NO it is not carried out. If it is at PICK UP, it P, This happens by emuling the disc (see below). This is general for overcurrent functions. The pick up current is set in Amperes in the secondary.


61


Working in definite time, the relay trips after the set time, since the starting current has been exceeded, is elapsed, independently from the current value. Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The curves which are normal, very inverse and extremely inverse can be selected as corresponding to the standard BS142 (IEC 2554) or ANSI. Besides, there is a special very inverse BSC and the moderately inverse ANSI. In Appendix II graphics and formulas for calculating the time are given, as a function of the ratio between the current and the pickup current. If the ratio is higher than 40, 40 will be taken for calculating. Besides, there is the possibility of programming 4 user curves. The unit allows setting the drop time characteristics, emuling the induction disc of the electromechanical relays and allowing a better coordination of the protection. If the enabling is set at YES + REDROP and the current decreases below the 95% of the set value, the trip drops instantaneously and the pickup drop time will depend on the selected curve (family and index) and o the current. If the selected curve is definite time, the pickup will drop when the programmed time since it decreases below the pick up If the enabling is set at YES and the current decreases below the 95% of the set value, the trip and the pick up drop instantaneously. The maximum error in times, for values higher than 50 ms, is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the two). For the definite time setting of 0 ms, the behaviour is the same as for the instantaneous characteristic (see next paragraph). Note. If an unacceptable index value is programmed for a type of curve, the unit takes the closest acceptable value.

4.1.3 Timing cancellation 16B

CANCELATION) a digital or logical input can be programmed for every overcurrent timed , so that if the function is activated it is not timed any more and behaves as instantaneous.

4.1.4 Timed phase inhibition setting (6 tables) 167B

Setting

Min.

Max

TOC lock if IOC started

Step

Remarks YES/NO

This setting enables the inhibition of the timed characteristic in the event of the pick-up of the instantaneous characteristic

4.1.5 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) 168B

These settings can be found chart. Setting Enable Phase instantaneous trip (A) Additional time (s) Special function(only in normal)

PHASES Min

Max.

Step

0.05 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.01 0.01

INSTANTANEOUS

Notes YES/NO/Pick up

The trip current is set in secondary Amperes.


62


If additional time 0 is programmed, for current values between the tripping current and 1.5 times that value, it trips between 40 and 50 ms; for 2 times the tripping current between 35 and 40 ms, and from 3 times the tripping currents, on 30 to 35 ms. If an additional time is programmed, this is added to the indicated time With additional times higher than 50 ms the maximum time error is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the two).

4.1.6 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) 169B

INSTANTANEOUS (HIGH) chart. Setting Enable Phase instantaneous trip (A) Additional time (s)

Min...

Max.

Step

0.05 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.01 0.01


The characteristics of the times are the same as in the previous paragraph.

4.2 NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 80B


In neutral earthed installations, the neutral overcurrent protection has the same possible characteristics as the described for phase overcurrent, and independent settings (function 50N/51N).

4.2.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) 17B

GROUND Setting Enable Pickup (A)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.05

200.0

0.01

Curve type

Index Definite time (s) Ground type (only in HIGH2)

0.05 0.5 0.0

1.09 30.0 600.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

TIME chart.

Notes YES/NO/pickup/YES+Drop Definite time Normal curve, very inverse, extrem. Inverse, etc. User curves For IEC curves For ANSI curves Time if the type is TF Trafo / Calculated

The remarks about curves and accuracy are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

4.2.3 Setting range of neutral time inhibition (6 tables) 172B

Setting Limit current (A) TOC lock if IOC started

Min. 0.05

Max. 200.0 YES/NO

Step 0.1

Notes

The neutral time inhibition setting allows the inhibition of this characteristic from the moment the neutral instantaneous characteristic picks up onwards.


63


The limit current is the one after which it stops following the curve and it trips in the time the curve gives for this value, that is, the curve turns into a horizontal line from this value. If you do no want to use it, program the maximum value.

4.2.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) 173B

GROUND

INSTANTANEOUS

chart. Setting Enable Neutral instantaneous time (A) Instantaneous additional time (s) Special operation Ground type (only in HIGH2)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.05 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.01 0.01


Trafo / Calculated

The trip current is set in secondary Amperes. The remarks about functioning time are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

4.2.5 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) 174B

( INSTANTANEOUS (HIGH)chart. Setting Enable Neutral instantaneous trip (A) Additional time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.05 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.01 0.01


The characteristics of times are the same as the ones indicated for phases.

4.3 INSTANTANEOUS SPECIAL OPERATION 81B

The settings corresponding to the phase, neutral and sensitive neutral instantaneous (only in the low level), are extended with the settings below:

 Special operation: Options:  NO  Enab. after closing (Enable ONLY after closing)  T. after closing (Timing after closing )  T. after reclosing 1 (Timing after reclosing 1)  Special fixed time. It is the instantaneous operation time, during the special operation.  Special operation time. It is the time during which the special operation is maintained Note 1. In the trip permission screen there are independent masks for every instantaneous level. Note 2. The operation described below implies the setting E be at YES and that the recloser is In It is enabled at NO; the instantaneous is disable under any condition. If the recloser is out of service, the masks do not have any effect.

(although it can be blocked).

 Operation (with setting of the function Enable at YES): 


64

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS  

the instantaneous is disabled.

If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.

 Option a true instantaneous.


65

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS   If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.



rmission screen

 If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.  In other closings, different to the first reclosing, the unit operates as it does no, that is, it depends on the masks and when it is enabled, it is with the normal additional time.

4.4 2ND HARMONIC RESTRAINT 82B

It locks the first level of the units 51, 50, 51N, 50N and 46 (time and instantaneous unbalance). For 50/51 units, restraint is available for a single phase or for all phases. If it is programmed as restraint of the phase itself: In order to activate the locking, the following must be given at least in this phase and simultaneously:

 The fundamental current must be higher than the minimum value for inrush.  The ratio between the 2nd harmonic value and the fundamental one must exceed the threshold set.  The 2nd harmonic must be higher than 50mA. In order to deactivate the locking, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

 This phase is below the 95% of the minimum current, or  This phase is below the 95% of the restraint percentage threshold In this case it is the same for neutral. In the absence of a Neutral transformer, a Neutral 2nd harmonic restraint is effected with the calculated measurement.

If the conditions are given in one phase or in neutral, it is enough to lock the unbalance functions.


66


The settings (6 tables) are those below: Setting

Min.

Max.

Step

5 0.1 0.1

100 200 200

1 0.01 0.01

Phase enabling Neutral enable 2nd harmonic threshold (%) Phase minimum threshold (A) Neutral minimum threshold (A)

Notes NO Restraint for phase Restraint for all phases NO YES

4.5 MANUAL CLOSING PROTECTION FUNCTION LOCKING 83B

Note.- this function is only available in the EH3211 model.

This function is only active when the unit is manual, that is, when the recloser is locked either by command, input, R key, or by setting. If the unit does not have recloser, this functionality is always active. This function is an OR of one function that checks the modules and another function which checks the angle of the direct and inverse sequence currents. The conditions for the activation of the locking signal are the following ones:

 I2 > k * I1 , where k can be set  Ang(I2) - Ang (I1) > Aj.angle, where Aj.angle can be set Each condition has its own enabling; if both are enabled, the output will be an OR of both of them. If the direct and reverse sequences are lower than 0.15A, the output of the function will be zero. Functions cannot be locked in such a situation. The settings (6 tables) are as follows: Setting

Min

Max

Step

0

10

0.01

Enable module Module k constant

NO YES

Enable angle Angle

Notes NO YES

0

359

1

4.6 DIRECTIONALITY OF THE PHASE AND NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS 84B

Depending on model, the described protection functions can be directional. if it is FOWARD or REVERSE, it indicates that the function must act as directional (in one direction or in the other one) and if it is set as NO it must act as NON DIRECTIONAL. For the neutral directional there are 4 directional types: the angular, the watimetric, the I*cos( ) and the I*sen( ).


67


Watimetric directional and the cosen type directional are practically equal, with the only exception that one is set to W and the other one to A. Note. even when the Torque Control set at YES (FOWARD or REVERSE), the directionality can be blocked (make it operate as non-directional) by tion.

possibilities are related next and afterwards the functions operation is described.

 Phase direction criteria. It is applied in the phase directional function (67). Next are the possibilities:  Phase angle (degrees). Programmable from 0 to 360º. It is applied in the phase directional function (67) and in the neutral directional function (67N) in case the S- neutral direction criterion has been chosen.

 Neutral polarization. This setting is only for models that have the possibility to polarize the neutral direction by current. In this case, the possibilities are V (polarization by voltage only), I (polarization by current only) or V+I (polarization by both parameters).

 Neutral directional type. It can be pro  Neutral direction criteria. It is applied in the neutral directional function when it is polarized by voltage. The possibilities are: S0 (zero voltage polarization), S- (polarization by negative voltage sequence), or S0+S(polarization by both parameters). If several polarization criteria combinations are used, the fault will be decided to be forwards if some of the criteria show it is forwards.

 Neutral angle (degrees). Programmable from 0 to 360º. It is applied in the neutral directional function (67N) in case the S0 neutral direction criterion has been chosen.

 Minimum active power. It is used forWatimetric directional. Setting range from 0 to 2000W in steps of 1W. P=Vn*In*cos( - c) 0T

=Angle between Vn and In.

 If the power is higher than this value in negative it is considered to be forward fault. If it is higher than this value in positive value it is backwards fault.

 Minimum current. It is used forI*cos( ) and I*sen( )directional. Setting range from 0.05 to 200A in steps of 0.01A.

I minimum=In*cos( - c) 0T

= Angle between Vn and In.

 If. the I minimum is higher than this value in negative it is considered to be forward fault. If it is higher than this value in positive value it is backwards fault.

 Polarization voltage. It is the minimum value of the polarization voltage, below which it is considered that the direction is not known with certainty.

 Vn minimum threshold. In order to allow the pick up of the neutral directional unit, a Vn minimum threshold must be exceeded.

 Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional). If it is set as YES allows the overcurrent trip if the polarization voltage is lower than the minimum polarization voltage; if it is set as NO in those conditions the overcurrent trip is not allowed.

 Phase zone width and neutral zone width. They are settings that show the angle that the trip zone of the phase and neutral units will respectively cover. That is, if the maximum torque line is set to 0º and the pick up zone width is set to 70º the relay will trip between +35º y 35º. This zone has to be added 5º at each side to obtain the locking zone. In this zone the relay maintains the last state in which it was (Front or back). That is, if it comes from a trip zone, this trip is maintained until the locking zone is crossed. If it comes from a non-trip zone it is maintained without tripping until crossing that zone. For example, if we want the tripping zone between

4.6.1 Phase directional in quadrature (67) 175B

Operation For the phase directionality detection, the polarization voltage is the one corresponding to the connection in quadrature (90º), where each phase current is compared with the compound voltage between the other two phases.


68


Locking zone Cycle no.-4

Phase directional

It works as three single-phase units in which the polarization voltages are the voltages composed by the healthy phases. These voltages will be obtained through calculation or through transformer measurement depending if the setting voltage type shows that the introduced signals are simple voltages (calculation) or compound (measurement). In case the phase order ABC is polarized with Vab, Vbc and Vca against Ic, Ia, and Ib. In case the phases order CBA is polarized with Vba, Vcb and Vac against Ic, Ia and Ib. There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained.

Memory It is polarized by the positive sequence voltage while it is higher than a threshold. If the voltage is lower than this value it is polarized by means of the voltage memorized 2 cycles before disappearing the voltage. This memorization is maintained 0.5 seconds.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used when the polarization voltage falls below a threshold (Polarization V setting), so that if it is set as YES, it indicates forwards (trip permission) and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse (no permission). The memory treatment would have been previously done.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling per phase. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional)set as YES if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals reverse and forward.

4.6.2 Phase directional by sequences (67) 176B

Operation  

Negative sequence directional The direction is determined comparing the negative sequence voltage and current, being I2 higher than a threshold and V2 higher than a threshold.


69


90-setting angle < arg(I2)-arg(V2)<270-setting angle 3T

Negative sequence directional locking  

If the negative sequence voltage is lower than a threshold (Polarization V setting) the positive sequence directional is carried out. If the negative sequence current is lower than a threshold (0.068 A) the previous selection is maintained.

Positive sequence directional The direction is determined comparing the positive sequence voltage and current. 90-setting angle > arg(I1)-arg(V1) > 270-setting angle 3T

There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained. Memory 6TU

It is polarized by the positive sequence voltage while it is higher than a threshold. If the voltage is lower than this value, it is polarized by means of the voltage memorized 2 cycles before the voltage disappears. This memorization is maintained 0.5 seconds. 6TU


70


Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional). This setting is used when the polarization voltage(V1) falls below a threshold (setting), so that if it is set as YES, it indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse. The memory treatment would have been previously done. Signalling 6TU

It provides forward and reverse signalling. If the direction is forwards, the signals Forward A, Forward B and Forward C get activated. If the direction is reverse, the signals Reverse A, Reverse B and Reverse C get activated. With trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled. With trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals reverse and forward.

4.6.3 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0) 17B

Operation with polarization by V0, zero sequence voltage The direction is determined using the neutral current (3·I0) with the neutral voltage as polarization, (3·V0). The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The fault is considered forwards if: 90-setting angle
There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained. The measurement of 3V0 can be obtained through a transformer or calculated using the phase simple voltages. If the The measurement that measurement

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used when the polarization voltage (3·V0) falls below the threshold (Setting Vpolarization), so that if it is set as YES, it indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. Being the trip permission set as NO if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled.


71


Being the trip permission set as YES if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals reverse and forward.

4.6.4 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S- (V2) 178B

Operation with Polarization by V2, reverse sequence voltage The direction is determined using the negative sequence current with the negative sequence voltage (V2) as polarization. The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The setting angle is the same as that used for the phase directional. 90-setting angle < arg(I2)-arg(V2)<270-setting angle 3T

There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used when the polarization voltage (V2) falls below the threshold (Vpolarization Setting), so that, if it is set as YES, it indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. Being the trip permission set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled. Being the trip permission set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.

4.6.5 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S- (V0+V2) 179B

Operation with polarization by V0 and V2 The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria. If any of them determines that the direction is the trip direction, the trip permission is given.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used only when in both of the previous units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold (Vpolarization setting).

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. The directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion. Being the trip permission set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled.


72


Being the trip permission set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.

4.6.6 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by I 180B

Operation with polarization by current The direction is determined comparing the earthing current (Ipol) with the neutral current. The trip direction happens when both currents are in phase. For the direction to be checked the following condition must be fulfilled Ipol>0.068 A.

There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained, both if it is polarized by voltage or by current.

Locking by lack of polarization If the polarization current (Ipol) falls below a threshold (0.068A), it indicates that the fault is reverse and there is no trip permission.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling.

4.6.7 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+I (V0+Ipol) 18B

Operation The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V0 and I). If any of them determines that the direction is the trip direction, the trip permission is given. The earth fault directional output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used only when in both of the previous units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold (Vpolarization setting) in the case of the V0 and below 68 mA in the case on the current.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. The directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion. Being the permission trip set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled. Being the permission trip set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.


73


4.6.8 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S-+I (V2+Ipol) 182B

Operation The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V2 and I). If any of them determines that the direction is the trip direction, the trip permission is given. The earth fault directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used only when in both of the previous units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold (Vpolarization setting) in the case of the V2 and below 68 mA in the case of the current.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. The directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.

4.6.9 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S-+I (V0+V2+Ipol) 183B

Operation The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V0, V2 and I). If any of them determines that the direction is the trip direction, the trip permission is given. The earth fault directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used only when in the three units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold (Vpolarization setting) in the case of the V0 and the V2 and below 68 mA in the case of the current.

Signalling It provides forward and reverse signalling. The directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled. Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.

4.6.10 Neutral directional (67N); Watimetric directional 184B

It is used for lines with compensations by means of Petersen coil. In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit the following must be fulfilled: Exceed the VN minimum threshold:

 For forwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 97 and 263. 

97

74

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS   For backwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 277 and 83. 

277
 The power P=Vn·In·cos( - c) must exceed the P minimum threshold in absolute value. If P sign is negative, the fault is forward. It is positive it is reverse. The equation to calculate P is the following one:

P

Re (V) cos

Im(V) sin

Re (I)

Im(V) cos

Re (V) sin

Im(I)

4.6.11 Neutral directional (67N); I*cos( ) / I*sen( )directional 185B

) operation mode changes to I*sen( ). This input, if programmed, cancels the setting: if it is deactivated the algorithm I*cos( ) is carried out and if it is activated, the I*sen( ), regardless the setting. It does not affect the watimetrical directional or the angular.

4.6.11.1 I*cos( ) directional In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit, the following must be fulfilled: Exceed the VN minimum threshold: The minimum current I minimum=In·cos( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value. If the sign is negative , the fault is forward. If it is positive, it is reverse.

 For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 97 and 263. 

97
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 277 and 83. 

277
The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current. If we are in the trip zone, the directional gives trip permission when the Io·cos( - c) value exceeds the setting (in negative value).

I·cos v i

Re ( V) cos

Im( V) sin

Re ( I)

Im( V) cos

Re ( V) sin

Im( I)

V


75


As the neutral units allow the trips with forward and reverse faults the characteristics will have the following form:

4.6.11.2 I*sen( ) directional In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit, the following must be fulfilled: Exceed the VN minimum threshold 

The minimum current I minimum=In·cos( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold set in absolute value. If the sign is negative , the fault is forward. If it is positive, it is reverse.

 For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 187 and 353. 

187
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 7 and 173. 

I·sin v

i

7
Im( V) cos

Re ( V) sin

Re ( I)

Re ( V) cos

Im( V) sin

Im( I)

V


76


Lockin g zone

Tripping zone

4.7 SENSITIVE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 85B


Sensitive neutral overcurrent protection, with the same possible characteristics as the ones described for phases (except that there is only one instantaneous element), and independent settings (function 50SN/51SN).

4.7.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) 187B

Setting Enable Pickup (A)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.005

10.000

0.001

Curve type


0.05 0.5 0.0

1.09 30.0 1800.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO/Pickup/YES+Drop Definite time Normal inverse curve, Very inverse curve, Extremely inverse curve User curve For IEC curves For ANSI curves

The remarks about curves and accuracy in times are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

4.7.3 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (single level) (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) 18B

Setting Enable Sensitive neutral instant. trip (A) Additional time (s) Special function (only in normal)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.005 0.00

10.0 600.00

0.001 0.01



77


The tripping current is set to secondaryAmps. The remarks about operating times are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

4.7.4 Directionality 189B

not). There are four types of directional for the sensitive neutral. The angle (polarization byV0, it works as the neutral one), the watimetric, the I·cos( ) and the I·sen( ). The directional watrimetic and the cosine type directional are almost the same, with the only difference that one is set o W and the other one to A.

They work as a torque control of the sensitive neutral units. These units will be set in order to trip backwards or forwards. Setting Directional type

Range Angular I·cos( ) / I·sen( ) Watimetric

Step

Minimum active power (homopole)

0-100W

0.01W

Characteristic angle c

0-350º

1º

Minimum I

5mA

10 A

Description

For the watimetric directional P=Vn·Ins·cos( - c) =Angle between Vn and In. If the power is higher than this value in negative value it is considered as a forward fault it is higher than this value in positive, it will be a backwards fault... For all the sensitive neutral directional Setting that allows taking into account the characteristics of the system that can be used in lines with isolated neutral or with Petersen coil Common setting with the cosine directional of Fi. It is used for the directional I·cos( )and the I·sen( ) minimum I =Ins·cos( - c) =Angle between Vn and Ins. If the minimum I is higher than this value in negative value, it is considered to be forward fault If it is higher than this value in positive it is a backward fault.

4.7.4.1 Watimetrical directional It is use for those lines with compensation via Petersen coil. In order to allow the directional unit pickup, the following must be fulfilled:

 Exceed a minimum threshold of VN.  For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 97 and 263. 

97
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 277 and 83. 

277
The power P=Vn·Ins·cos ( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold of P in absolute value. If P sign is negative, the fault is forwards. If it is positive, it will be backwards.


78


The equation to be done to calculate P is the following one:

P

Re (V) cos

Im(V) sin

Re (I)

Im(V) cos

Re (V) sin

Im(I)

4.7.4.2 I*cos( ) / I*sen( ) directional It works as a torque control of the neutral sensitive unit. It has an input I·cos( ) to I·sen( ). This input, if programmed cancels the setting; if deactivated it carries out the algorithm I*cos( ) and if it deactivated the I*sen( ), regardless the setting. It does not affect the watrimetic or the angular directional.

4.7.4.2.1 I*cos( )directional In order to allow the picking up of the directional unit the following conditions must be fulfilled: 

Exceed a VN minimum threshold.



The minimum current I minimum=Insects( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forwards. If it is positive, it is backwards.

 For forwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 97 and 263. 

97
 For backwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 277 and 83. 



I·cos v

277
The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence pole current. In the trip zone, the directional allows the trip when the Io·cos( - c) value exceeds the setting (in negative value).

i

Re ( V) cos

Im( V) sin

Re ( I)

Im( V) cos

Re ( V) sin

Im( I)

V


79


As the sensitive neutral units allow the trip with forwards and backwards faults, the characteristics will be as follows:

4.7.4.2.2 I*sen( ) directional In order to allow the picking up of the directional unit the following conditions must be fulfilled:  

Exceed a VN minimum threshold. The minimum current I minimum= Ins·sen( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forwards. If it is positive it is backwards.

 For forwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 187 and 353. 187
 For backwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and must be between 7 and 173. 7
I·sin v

i

Im( V) cos

Re ( V) sin

Re ( I)

Re ( V) cos

Im( V) sin

Im( I)

V


80


Lockin g zone

Tripping zone

4.8 CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION 86B


It contains the timed and instantaneous unbalance protection functions. The protection works exactly in the same way as the phase overcurrent protection, taking as measurement input 3 times the modulus of negative sequence current

 3 • I2

   Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic

where a=1|120º

It must be taken into account that the phase sequence A-B-C or C-B-A is programmable, so that the I2 depends on that setting.

4.8.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) 19B

UNBALANCE Setting Enable Pickup.(A)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.1

200.0

0.01

Curve type


0.05 0.5 0.1

1.09 30.0 600.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

TIME chart.

Notes YES/NO/Pickup/YES+Drop Definite time Normal inverse curve, Very inverse curve, Extremely inv. curve User curve For IEC curves For ANSI curves Time if TF type

The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

4.8.3 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) 192B

UNBALANCE

TIME chart.


81


Setting Enable Unbalance instantaneous trip (A) Additional time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.1 0.10

200.0 60.00

0.01 0.01

Notes YES/NO/Pickup/YES+Drop

The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases

4.9 DIRECTIONALITY OF THE CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION 87B

BACKWARDS, indicates that the function is desired to work as directional (in one or other direction); if it is at NO, it will work as NO DIRECTIONAL. The inverse directional sequence is employed for the unbalance directional.

4.9.1 Negative Sequence Directional 193B

The direction is determined using the negative sequence current with the negative sequence voltage (V2) as polarization. The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The setting angle is the same as that used for the phase directional. 90-setting angle < arg(I2)-arg(V2)<270-setting angle 3T

There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained.

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional) This setting is used when the polarization voltage (V2) falls below the threshold (Vpolarization Setting), so that, if it is set as YES, it indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse.

4.10 BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION 8B


This is a definite time protection unit.


82


There are three operating modes: The pick-up value varies in accordance with the mode selected

4.10.2 Settings range (6 tables) 195B

BROKEN CONDUCTOR Table Setting

Min

Max

Step

Pick-up (expressed as a decimal)

0.10

0.50

0.01

Definite time (sec) Minimum phase current threshold (A) I0/I1 maximum (mode 2) I0/In maximum (mode 3)

0.05 0.30

300.0 5.00

0.01 0.01

0.000

0.500

0.001

Enabled

Remarks YES / NO / Start (mode 1) / Yes (mode 2) / Yes (mode 3) / Start (mode 2) / Start (mode 3) Expressed as a decimal. I2/I1 (mode 1 and mode 2) Expressed as a decimal. I2/In (mode 3) In = Rated current (5A)

Expressed as a decimal. I0/I1 (mode 2) Expressed as a decimal. 10/In (mode 3) In = Rated current (5A)

When the open-phase protection is enabled as Start Up (mode 1, 2 or 3), the unit does not trip, but rather it actives "Broken Conductor Alarm" signal once the set time elapses as of the detection of the broken conductor.

4.10.3 Broken Conductor Mode 1 196B



Pick-up. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse sequence and direct sequence current.

 I2  I1

   Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic    Ia a • Ib a 2 • Ic

In which=1|120º

The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed from the moment the pickup setting value is exceeded.




Pick-up. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse sequence and direct sequence current.

 I2  I1 

 Ia  Ia

  a 2 • Ib a • Ic   a • Ib a 2 • Ic

In which=1|120º

I0/I1 maximum setting of zero sequence percentage in relation to direct sequence I0/I1.

The unit must register that I0/I1 is below a threshold in order to permit a trip.

 I0  I1

  Ib Ic    Ia a • Ib a 2 • Ic  Ia

In which=1|120º

In order to detect a broken conductor, the following conditions must be met:  

The ratio in modules of the inverse sequence current between direct sequence current must exceed the pick-up setting value. The I0/I1 reading must be below a threshold in order to permit a trip.


83


 current threshol is closed. 

The direct sequence as inverse must have a value of at least 0.15 A (all secondary).

The relay when the programmed time elapses following the detection of the broken conductor.


In this operating mode, the inverse and zero sequences are calculated in relation to the rated current. 

Pick-up. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse sequence and the rated current (5A).

 I2  I nom

   Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic / 3  I nom

In which=1|120º



I0/I maximum rated current. Zero sequence percentage setting in relation to rated current (5A) I0/Inom.



The unit must register that I0/Inom is below a threshold in order to permit a trip.

 I0  I nom

   Ia Ib Ic / 3  I nom

In which=1|120º

In order to detect a broken conductor, the following conditions must be met:  

The ratio in modules of the inverse sequence current between the rated current must exceed the pick-up setting value. The I0/In reading must be below a threshold in order to permit a trip.

 econdary), and there must be no current in one or in two of the phases when the breaker is closed. 

The direct sequence as inverse must have a value of at least 0.15 A (all secondary).

The relay when the programmed time elapses following the detection of the broken conductor.

4.11 PHASE CHARACTERISTIC VOLTAGE CONTROL (FUNCTION 51V/50V) 89B

The timed phase overcurrent protection function can be controlled by voltage, in the way that the starting current decreases if the voltage control is lower than the nominal voltage. To activate this function the setting "voltage acceleration" of the settings -CURRENT PROT.-PHASE TOC.-ACCEL. ENABLE) must be set to "YES". (If it is set to NO, the effective settings are the ones programmed in the time delay phase overcurrent unit). The control by voltage has two possible operation ways, depending on the setting of the "voltage control" on the screen number 3 of the overcurrent protection settings (or by keyboard/display in PROTECT. FUNCTION-PA.CRTLV-ENABLE). If it is set to NO, the unit operates in control mode 1 and if it is set to YES, in control mode 2.

Mode 1 (51V). The pickup current is controlled by the compound voltage V, corresponding to that phase, used as control. This function affects both levels of timing. When the control voltage is 10% of the nominal voltage, the controlled pickup current is 10% of the programmed value. When the control voltage is 90% of the nominal voltage, the controlled pickup current is 90% of the programmed value.


84


Between both values, the pickup current variation is lineal in respect to the control voltage. For control voltage values higher than 90% of the nominal voltage, the pickup current is the programmed one.

Mode 2 (51V). When the control voltage is lower than the control voltage (one programmed value), the effective settings of the function 51 stop being the programmed in "phase time unit", to This function is subordinated to the phase timed unit, in the sense of making it operative with other settings, but if the phase time delayed function is not enable, the function 51V has no effect. This function affects The settings are the following: Enable control by voltage : YES/NO (as it has been said YES means operating in mode 1, NO in mode 2, as long as the phase time delay "Acceleration" is set to YES) Voltage control: 10 to 200 V

Mode 2 (50V). In an analogue way to the former one, when some of the compound voltages are lower than the control voltage (one programmed value), the effective settings of the function 50 stop being those programmed in "phase instantaneous unit" (as This function is subordinated to phase instantaneous, in the sense of making them operative with other settings, but if both phase instantaneous functions are not enabled, the function 50V has no effect. All the instantaneous functions (normal, The settings are the following: Enable: YES/NO (YES means operating in mode 2, NO means not operating) Voltage control: 10 to 200 V Settings of phase instantaneous Summary: The function 51V can operate in Mode 1 or Mode 2 The function 50V can operate only in Mode 2. It is possible the operation of the function 51V in Mode 1 and the function 50V in Mode 2. The setting change does not affect the enabling of the functions affected.

4.12 HIGH CURRENT LOCKOUT 90B

4.12.1 Description 19B

There are two other instantaneous settings groups, one for phases and other for neutral (not for sensitive neutral). They are different from the usual ones for the two following characteristics: If they give a trip, it will be moved on to Definitive Trip. The number of trip is programmable (1 to 4) within the sequence of Running Cycle from which the function is active.


85


4.12.2 Setting (table 0, single) 20B

They are accessible through keyboard/display in "Table 0" - "Protection" - "High current lockout", or through Console in 

For phases (PHASES chart)

 Enable: YES/NO  Pickup (A): 0.05 to 200 A  Definite time: 0 to 60 sec  Trip number: 1 to 4 

For neutral (NEUTRAL chart)

 Neutral enable: YES/NO  Pickup: 0.05 to 200 A  Additional time: 0 to 60 sec  Trip number: 1 to 4

4.13 COLD LOAD PICKUP 91B

4.13.1 Description 201B

This function aims to avoid non wished trips in the following situation: after being the line de-energized for a period of time and re-energized later, the load can exceed the protection setting without the presence of a fault. This may be due to the accumulative inrush current caused when connecting all the loads (furnaces, heaters, coolers etc.) at the same time. This phenomena can occur not only at the moment of the breaker manual closing, after having remained open for a certain time, but also with the breaker permanently closed due to the operation of another upstream breaker. What the function does is detecting when those conditions are given and changing the tripping settings during a programmable time. The function is activated when the current in the 3 phases is below 0.1 A, then the programmed time starts to run to d lead to the cold load situation). Once that time has expired and the current has not exceeded again 0.2 A, the value of the current is checked again. If the current is below 0,1 A, the protection value settings normally used are replaced by the cold load settings.When any of the phase current exceed 0.2 A, a counter with programmable time starts, during which the setting are the cold load pickup ones, when expiring this time, the setting are again the usual ones.

4.13.2 Settings (table 0, single) 20B

They are accessible through keyboard/display in "Table 0" - " Special Protections" - "Cold load" , or through Console on the given: 

Phase time unit



Neutral time unit



Phase instantaneous unit



Neutral instantaneous unit



Sensitive neutral time unit



Sensitive neutral instantaneous unit

They are also under the name "Cold load pickup" the ones which define the function activity range: 

YES/NO


86




Cold load time: 0 to 10000 sec. Time for determining the cold load.



Operating time: 0.1 to 3600 sec. (1 hour) with 0.01 second resolution. It is the operation time of the all the overcurrent protection

Remarks: s deassumed by the Reclosing function.

Example with breaker opening and closure


87


Example with very low load

4.14 ISOLATED NEUTRAL PROTECTION 92B


isolated neutral systems (67 IN function ). It can be used as non directional. 

Input signals

 Zero sequence current (IG): Comes from the connection in parallel of the secondaries of 3 phase current transformers or from a toroid transformer embracing the 3 phases.

 Zero sequence voltage (VG): If there are simple voltage signals for each phase, it can be calculated internally. Other ways, it is measured from the open delta of three voltage transformers, with secondary nominal voltage of 110/ 3 V. A setting indicates which of the procedures is used. 

Measurements range

 Current: 2mA to 1 A  Voltage: 0.5V to 200V (3*110/ 3) The characteristic curve of this protection function is the following:

VN VN TRIP ZONE TRIP ZONE VH VH VL VL IL

IL

IH IH

IN IN


88


They are settable parameters: 

Enable. If it is set to YES allows the protection units actuation; set to NO inhibits the actuation and in PICKUP it operates but without tripping.

 

Low current (IL in the characteristic curve). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.



High current (IH). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.

 IH >= IL must be fulfilled. 

Low voltage (VL). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. 0.1 V resolution.



High voltage (VH). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. 0.1 V resolution. VH >= VL must be fulfilled.



First trip timing. Range 0 to 60 sec. 0.01 sec. resolution



Switch to instantaneous timing. Range 0 to 10 sec. 0.1 sec. resolution

Operating as directional, the relay will trip when the point defined by the measured VG and IG values is within the trip zone of the characteristic curve, being the DELAYED with respect to VG an angle in the interval 90º 50% of thesetting, ithin the characteristic zone, regardless of the angle. The first trip is timed according to the corresponding setting parameter, the successive trips that happen during the time us; the first one from that time is timed again.

4.14.2 Setting ranges 204B

Parameter Enable Torque control Low current (A) High current (A) Low voltage (V) High voltage (V) First trip timing (s) Switch to instantaneous timing Neutral zone coverage (degrees)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.005 0.005 0.5 0.5 0.00 0.0 90

1 1 60.0 60.0 60.0 10.0 170

0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.1 1

Notes YES/NO

4.15 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 93B


Three-unit overvoltage protection, which can be simples or characteristics to choose from (function 59):

Timed characteristic : 

Inverse time. ( I BSC or I ANSI)



Short Inverse time (IC BSC)



Long Inverse time(IL BSC)



Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)



Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)






4 User curves.( USER 1 to USER 4)


89




Definite time.

Instantaneous characteristic: 

Instantaneous unit.



Additional time.

The functioning of this protection does not cause automatic reclosing


Setting Enable Pickup (V)

Min.

Max.

Step

6

200

0.1

Notes YES/NO Definite time Normal inverse curve, Very inverse curve, Extremely. Inv. curve User curve For IEC curves For ANSI curves

Curve type


0.05 0.5 0.0

1.09 30.0 600.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

The timed curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units. The pickup voltage is set to secondary Volts. Working with definite time, the relay will trip at the end of the programmed time since the pickup voltage is exceeded, independently of the voltage value. Working with curve, the tripping time depends on the selected curve (family and index) and on the voltage value. In the Appendix II are given the graphics and formula for calculating the time, in function of the ratio between the voltage and the pickup voltage. The remarks about accuracy in times are the same as the given for the overcurrent function.


Setting Enable Phase instantaneous trip (V) Additional time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

6 0.00

200 60.00

0.1 0.01

notes YES/NO

These settings can The tripping voltage is set to secondary Volts. The remarks about times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function. 8TNote.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the unit is picked up, the drop occurs when the voltage drops to the 99% of the value programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 98% if it is lower).


90


4.16 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 94B


Three-unit overvoltage protection, which can characteristics to choose from (function 27) :

Timed characteristic: 

Inverse time. ( I BSC or I ANSI)



Short Inverse time (IC BSC)



Long Inverse time(IL BSC)



Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)



Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)






4 User curves.( USER 1 to USER 4)



Definite time.

Instantaneous characteristic: 

Instantaneous unit.



Additional time.

The functioning of this function does not cause automatic reclosing.


Setting Enable Pickup (V)

Min.

Max.

Step

6

200

0.1

Curve type


0.05 0.5 0.0

1.09 30.0 600.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO Definite time Normal inverse curve, Very inverse curve, Extremely inv. curve User curve For IEC curves For ANSI curves

The timed curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units. The pickup voltage is set to secondary Volts. Working with definite time the relay trips once expired the programmed time since descending below the pickup voltage, independently of the voltage value. Working with curve, the tripping time depends on the selected curve (family and index) and on the voltage value. In the Appendix II are given the graphics and formula for calculating of time, in function of the ratio between the starting voltage and the voltage. The remarks about times are the same as the ones quoted for the overcurrent function.


91



Setting Enable Phase instantaneous trip (V) Additional time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

6 0.00

200 60.00

0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO

The tripping voltage is set to secondaryVolts. The remarks about times are the same as the ones quoted for the overcurrent function. 8TNote.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the unit is picked up, the drop occurs when the voltage goes up to the 101 % of the value programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 102 % if it is lower).

4.17 VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PROTECTION 95B

4.17.1 Timed characteristic 21B

It is a definite time protection unit. The pickup value set is, in per unit the ratio between the negative and positive sequence voltage modulus. The relay trips once expired the programmed time since the pickup value is exceeded.

Settings ranges (6 tables) Setting Enable Pickup Definite time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.10 0.0

0.50 600.0

0.01 0.01

Notes YES/NO In per unit. V2/V1

4.17.2 Instantaneous characteristic 21B

It is a definite time protection unit. It only checks if the phase order is the programmed one or the opposite one... In the case that the order is opposite to the programmed one it will trip after a programmed time.

Setting ranges (6 tables) Setting Min. Enable Definite time (s) 0.00

Max.

Step

60.00

0.01

Notes YES/NO

4.18 ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 96B

Zero sequence overvoltage protection (function 64 or 59N). The pickup value set is the zero sequence voltage coming from the open delta connection of the secondaries of the three voltage transformers or the calculated zero sequence voltage (3 Vo) as vectorial sum of the phase simple voltages.


92


) possibiliti The function has the following characteristics to choose from

Timed characteristic (IEC or ANSI programmable curves):  Inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)  Short Inverse time (IC BSC)  Long Inverse time(IL BSC)  Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)  Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)  Moderately inverse time (ANSI)  4 User curves.(USER 1 to USER 4)  Definite time.

Instantaneous characteristic:  Instantaneous unit.  Additional time. The functioning of this protection does not cause an automatic reclosing. The function can be deactivated by setting (timed and instantaneous at the same time).

4.18.1 Setting range (6 tables) 213B

Setting Enable Pick up (V)

Min.

Max

Step

2

200

0.1

Curve type

Time index Definite time(s) Instantaneous pickup (V) Additional time (s)

0.05 0.5 0 2 0

1.09 30.0 600.0 200 60.00

0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO Definite time Normal inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse User For IEC curves For ANSI curves Definite time(s) Instant pickup (V)

8T

The time delay curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units. The starting voltage is set to secondary Volts. On definite time, the relay trips when the programmed time expires since the starting voltage is exceeded, independently of the voltage value.

4.19 FREQUENCY PROTECTION 97B

This function has 5 steps, programmable as minimum frequency or maximum frequency.


93


The following settings are independent for each step (6 tables): Parameter Enable Value (pick up) (Hz) Definite time (s) Type

Min

Max

Step

40 0

70 600.00

0.01 0.01

Notes YES/NO

Maximum/Minimum

The setting common to all the step are the following ones: Parameter Supervision minimum voltage (V) No. of frequency pick up cycles

Min 12 3

Max 200 15

Step 1 1

Notes

The response time of this unit will be the one corresponding to the number of pick up cycles programmed in the setting plus 35 ms.

4.19.1 Minimum frequency 214B

ops out if during two cycles the frequency is correct.

Locking allowed.

4.19.2 Maximum frequency 215B

This unit causes pick up if the frequency is above the set value during a number of cycles equal or higher than the setting two cycles the frequency is correct.

Locking If the allowed.

4.19.3 Frequency gradient 216B

4.19.3.1 General description This function has 4 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit is higher than the set value. There are three options. 

Detection of NEGATIVE variations, i.e., a decrease in frequency.



Detection of POSITIVE variations, i.e., an increase in frequency.



Detection of BOTH variations, i.e., a decrease and an increase in frequency.


94


4.19.3.2 Settings (6 tables) Setting

Min

Max

Step

40 0 0.20 0 3

70 100.0 5 2 15

0.01 0.1 0.05 0.01 1

Enable. df/dt. Max. frequency supervision(Hz) Supervision minimum current (A) Pickup value (df/dt) (Hz/s) Definite time (s) Nº of pickup cycles D81

Notes NO/NEGATIVE/POSITIVE/BOTH (for all steps) (for each step) (for all steps) (for each step) (for each step) (for all steps)

The frequency measurement of each cycle is executed refreshing it each half cycle, as the figure shows.

The algorithm is executed every 5ms only if the phase B voltage has crossed zero. Both positive and negative crosses are measured but the frequency measurement is executed in complete cycles. The frequency is measured up to 35Hz. Below this value, the frequency units are not activated. The functioning of the frequency rate of change for the NEGATIVE variations options is described below. The same operating function applies to the other options, with the exception of positive or both variations. Always consult the frequency difference. The algorithm stores the periods of the last 5 cycles of the signal and calculates the frequency derivative comparing the frequency measurement of the present cycle with the measurement 5 cycles before having in account the time space between both. df/dt=(f1-f5)/(T1+T2+T3+T4) Being: f5 =frequency measurement 4 cycles ago f4 =frequency measurement 3 cycles ago f3 =frequency measurement 2 cycles ago f2 =frequency measurement 1 cycle ago f1 =Last frequency measurement

F (Hz)

T 4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end T1 period of the last cycle

f5

f4

f3

f2

f1

=Arc tan (df/dt) T4

T3

T2

T1

T


95


This calculus is repeated having in account the measurements separated by two cycles so that it makes sure that the frequency has been falling the whole time, that is, it is not a spurious measurement that can lead to a trip. For the unit to pickup, the frequency gradient must be exceeded in module during the set number of cycles. The pickup happens only if the value of df/dt is negative, that is if the present frequency value is lower than the value 5 cycles before. During the pickup process one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process. That is, if for example 3 cycles are required to cause pickup, it is enough if the threshold is exceeded 3 times out of 4 consecutive measurements. Once the unit has picked up, for it to trip, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between the value of df/dt set and a dropout value equal to df/dt minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.

Df/dt
Cycle no.-4

f
TRIP

T addict. Df/dt

Df/dt (step 1 ) (step1)

(Step 1)

TRIP f
Cycle no.

Df/dt (step 1) & 81m (step 1))

If some of the inputs are programmed as breaker associated to the frequency gradient, the trip is locked until that output is viewed open. Once the unit has picked up, for it to dropout the measurement of df/dt must be seen 0.05Hz/s below the set value.

Locking The frequency derivative units are locked by: 

Minimum supervision current. If the minimum current that flows through the phase A is lower than the an the threshold appears, the relay waits 10 cycles before starting to execute the frequency gradient function.



Minimum supervision voltage. If the voltage in phase B is lower than the setting, the pickup of the llowed. When a voltage higher than the threshold appears, the relay waits 10 cycles before starting to execute the frequency gradient function

4.20 FUSE FAILURE 98B

Fuse failure conditions are the following ones:

 Direct sequence current I1 above 0.1 % of the background scale (200A)


96

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS   The increase and decrease of current direct sequence I1 and of the neutral current IN regarding the current measured 2 cycles before must be lower than 0.1 of the background scale (200A). Voltage direct sequence V1 memorized 2 cycles before must exceed VFF Voltage direct sequence V1 must be lower than the 95% of VFF

VFF

VN

50 63.5

( V)

being VN the single nominal voltage. in the display (Table 0

Protections-Fuse failure)). The function is activated until V1 voltage exceeds VFF.

fuse failure outputs is not activated because what the relays has detected is a fault and not a fuse failure situation. programmed time. Fuse failure will only deactivate if the inputs is deactivated. Fuse failure may be used as a blocking signal for other functions.

4.21 TELEPROTECTION 9B

4.21.1 Operation 217B

It is based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output terminals In these schemes, the zones 1, 2 and 3 (F, Forward) look forward and the zone 3R (R, Reverse) looks backward. Zone 3 direc function (50), even if the function is enabled or not. If torque control is set as NO, the direction is forward. Zone 1 units include the three overcurrent units (timed and the two instantaneous levels) There are two basic types of schemes: 

Locking scheme: The signal received indicates that the fault falls outside the zone to be protected. An overreach zone may trip if the lockout signal is not received after a given waiting period.



Permission scheme: The signal received gives permission for an instantaneous trip within the overreach zone. Additional ECO and reverse direction blocking ca be used.

The following protection schemes may be selected: 

Permissive overreach



Permissive underreach



Directional locking



Directional unlocking

Additionally, together with the schemes, the following can be selected: 

ECO



Inverse direction locking


97



Setting

Min

Max

Step

0 0 0

1 1 0.15

0.01 0.01 0.01

0

9.99

0.1

0

9.99

0.1

Protection scheme Drop off time for input RTP Additional lockout time (s) Guard signal loss time (s) Enable ECO Minimum RTP time for ECO (s) Enable inverse direction lockout Inverse direction lockout time

Remarks Permissive overreach Permissive underreach Directional locking Directional unlocking

YES/NO YES/NO



Protection scheme: selects the type of scheme.



RTP (TRTP) drop time: time during which the teleprotection reception input (RTP) remains stored.



Additional block-out time (TBLQ): Waiting time of the block-out signal.



Guard signal loss time (TPSG): Waiting time after receiving the channel loss input.



Enabling ECO: Enables the ECO function.

 

Minimum RTP time for ECO (TMIN): Time during which the RTP input must be seen so that the ECO signal is activated. Enabling of reverse direction block-out: It enables the storage of the reverse direction. ercurrent prot.

keyboard/display.

4.21.3 Protection trip mask (6 tables) 219B

This setting can only be programmed using a PC, not by keyboard/display.

taking into account the masks. the pilot wire scheme. Unconditional trip output and general trip output are activated. ( overreach, underreach or directional unlocking) are selected in trip logic settings. If a trip with acceleration is given, be activated and not general trip output.

will be activated and not general trip output. You can simultaneously select for a function unconditional and permissive or unconditional and locking, in this way the trips of the units indicated in the permissive and blocked mask can be accelerated, if the adequate conditions are given. It has to be taken into account that these masks are examined in the moment of giving the trip command; therefore it has

after closing, after second reclosure. During security time after second reclosure it will not trip by neutral instantaneous, because this command will not even be executed.


98


4.21.4 Used signals 20B

Below the meaning is explained: ETP is called the teleprotection signal sent by a terminal. In any event, the ETP signal sent by a terminal is kept active for at least 50 ms, even though the reason that has caused its activation may disappear. 3T

3T

RTPE and RTP. Both are different, and therefore the RTPE is the input of the teleprotection received by a terminal; while the RTP follows the RTPE input in order to get activated, but it keeps the input stored for the TRTP time in order to be deactivated. If TRTP is adjusted equal to zero, then the RTP coincides with the RTPE input. In the teleprotection schemes, RTP is used. 3T

3T

Teleprotection Reception

Z3(R)MEM: Locking signal due to reverse direction change. See the section that corresponds to reverse direction locking. 3T

3T

MINC trip: OR of enabled protection units for unconditional trips that have trip. These units will trip after the time set, without taking into account the pilot wire schemes. 3T

3T

MPER pickup: OR of enabled protection units for permissive trips that have picked up. These units will trip if they have pickup when the teleprotection signal /RTP MEM) reach them. If they do not receive permission by this input, they do not trip. 3T

3T

MBLOQ pickup: OR of enabled protection units for blocked trips that have picked up. These units will trip, if they continue in pickup status, after exceeding the locking signal time (TBLQ) and the signal (RTP) has not arrived. If they were locked by this input, they would not trip. 3T

3T

4.21.4.1 Notes REVERSE. Trips, bay pilot wire schemes will reclose depending on the masks set for external protection.

Main pilot protection schemes  Permissive underreach (PUTT)  Pilot protection signal (ETP) is sent with the activation of zone 1.  It generates instantaneous pilot protection trip when receiving the teleprotection signal (RTP) along with the activation of a unit in zone 1, 2 or 3 (depending on the settings of trip mask) whenever memorized zone3 (R) (Z3(R)MEM) is not activated. The Z3(R)MEM signal can be eliminated from the logic only by disabling the


99


The logic diagram of this function is:



Permissive overreach (POTT)

 This scheme uses the teleprotection signal in the overreach zone 2 (or 1 or 3, depending on the mask) of the line. Instantaneous trip by teleprotection, when the teleprotection signal is received along with the activation of a unit in zone 2, whereas memorized zone 3 (Z3(R)MEM) is not activated. Z3(R)MEM signal can be eliminated from the logic disabli Z3(R)MEM would be always at 0.

 Pilot protection signal sending with the activation of units in zone 2, without backwards fault detection Z3(R)MEM The logic diagram of this function is:

 Directional locking  Pilot protection instantaneous trip with activation of zone2, if RTP signal is not received, once the locking time is elapsed and no fault is seen in zone 3 Z3(R)MEM.

 ETP locking signal is sent if the fault is seen backwards Z3(R)MEM.  The channel stop signal (STOP) is activated if a fault is detected forwards (Z1,Z2 or Z3) without seeing a fault in zone 3 Z3(R)MEM.

 The logic diagram is shown below:


100


 Directional Unlocking  Pilot protection instantaneous trip with activation of Z2, if the unlocking signal (RTP) is received or if only the channel loss signal (RPSG) is received during the guard signal loss time (TPSG). Since the moment in which the guard channel loss signal is activated a 150ms time span is opened during which the trip can be given if the RPGS signal is activated during the programmed time (TPSG) without RTP reception. After these 150ms the guard channel loss signal will have no effect over the pilot protection trip. Therefore, it is indispensable that the time TPSG is programmed to a value lower than 150ms so that the loss signal guard activates the trip. Once the guard signal is recovered 200ms will be waited before starting again the aforementioned logic in case the guard channel is lost again.

 The ETP output is the same as in the POTT scheme. The Z3(R)MEM signal can be eliminated from the continuously as 0.


101



102


Additional pilot protection schemes  

Reverse direction locking It is used on double-circuit lines in order to prevent the immediate tripping of a protection that is seeing a fault backwards (and the carrier signal, which is sent to it by the forward protection) when the power flow direction changes (due to opening of the parallel line breaker). It delays the pilot protection tripping for a few cycles in order to give the remote terminal time to remove the permission (ETP) signal after the change of flow direction due to the breaker opening. The Z3 signal is used with a storage time (Z3(R)MEM), thereby obtaining the Z3(R)MEM signal to be used in the rest of the schemes, as shown in the following figure.

Reverse Directional Locking



The figure shows a flow scheme when the fault occurs and when the breaker is opened. If this scheme is not used, the effect could be the following:



When the failure occurs, terminal C sees it in zone 1, D in zone 1 or 2 according to the length, B backwards and A in zone 2. In this situation, C opens the breaker and sends the ETP signal to D. A likewise sends ETP to B.



When the breaker is opened and the flow changes, A would see the fault backwards and B would see it in zone 2 or 3 (F), whereby it could trip before A removes the RTP signal.

Flow Change due to breaker opening



ECO



It is used in the permissive schemes (overreach, underreach and directional unlocking).



The pilot protection instantaneous trip is the one corresponding to the selected scheme.



The teleprotection signal is sent with either of the following conditions:

 According to the selected scheme.  If the RTP is received and the fault is not detected either forward or backward during a minimum programmable time or the breaker is open. The ECO signal only provides a pulse of 50 ms.


103


4.22 THERMAL IMAGE 10B


This function calculates a temperature according to the recent and present load conditions of the protected unit. This temperature is visualized in the display in % with respect to the trip value; when reaching the programmed value an alarm relay is activated (if there is any programmed) and when reaching the 100% the thermal image trip relay (if the unit is enabled) and the corresponding signalling are activated. Once the unit has tripped by this unit, the relay does not dropout while the calculated temperature is above the reposition threshold and the rest of the locking conditions are fulfilled. The ↓ =0? and pushing ↓ during 2 seconds) or through console command. The time to trip is given by the following curves, which give the time according to the ratio between the current and the programmed rated current, and the programmed cooling constant. According to the following formula (starting from temperature 0):

being t :

trip time : cooling constant

I: average current ..I0:programmed rated current Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.

4.22.2 Settings 2B

Setting Enable Heating time constant (min) Cooling time constant (min) Threshold alarm (%) Rated current (A)

Min.

Max.

Step

3 3 50 0.1

60 180 99 200.0

1 1 1 0.01

Notes YES/NO


104


4.22.3 Trip times 23B

4.22.4 Heating curves 24B

The heating curve is calculated from the following formula:

Being: Tf = final temperature Ti = initial temperature t = time


105


= = heating time constant

For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced As in

The heating curve is

The next figure gives as an example, the heating curves, with 3 minutes time constant, for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2


106


4.22.5 Cooling curves 25B

The cooling curve is calculate from the following

Being: Tf = final temperature Ti = initial temperature t = time = cooling time constant Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), tripping temperature, in order to arrive to a final temperature of current I = 0), the formulae is reduced to

Tf = 0 (that is with

Example: cooling curve with 3 minutes constant

Combined examples cooling and heating:

starting from there it goes back indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both time constants of 3 minutes):


107


2. Lets suppose that during 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 = 0.5, then with I/I0 = 1.5 until reaching 100%, where it trips, and starting from there it is cooled with I//I0 = 0 (both time constants of 3 minutes).

4.23 FIELD LOSS PROTECTION 10B


Field loss protection (generator excitation), with the following selectable characteristics (function 40): 2 MHO trip zones with independent settings 1 directional unit common to both zones 1 undervoltage unit common to both zones. The enabling can be carried out independently for each zone.

4.23.2 General setting range 27B

Setting Enable Minimum voltage pick up Directional unit angle

Min

Max

Step

10.0 0

65.0 180

0.1 1

Notes YES/NO Clockwise

The directional unit angle allows the locking of the protection in a certain direction. The impedance value seen by the protection is calculated from the direct sequence current and voltage.


108


4.23.3 MHO zone setting range 28B

Setting Z1A impedance setting (offset) (Ohm) Z1B impedance setting (diameter) (Ohm) Undervoltage surveillance zone 1 Alarm timing zone 1 (s) Alarm timing zone 1 (s)

Min -20.0 0.0

Max 20.0 120.0

Step 0.1 0.1

0.0 0.00

10.0 10.00

0.1 0.01

Notes

YES/NO

Zone MHO 2 disposes of the same setting range as the MHO 1 one. Settings Z1A and Z1B delimite the tripping zone MHO 1 (as Z2A and Z2B for zone MHO 2). The setting Z1A represents the offset (in ohms) of the zone higher part. This value can be positive (see Z1A in figure 1) or negative (see Z2A, for zone MHO 2). Setting Z1B represents the diameter of the zone MHO 1. The protection will act indistinctively depending if the zone is under undervoltage conditions or not. The following must occur in order to be under undervoltage conditions:

 The measurement in any of the voltage phase is under the value of the undervoltage pick up or  Undervoltage surveillance setting of this zone is disabled. In the moment the generator enters one of these MHO zones, a timer gets active. If the zone is not under undervoltage conditions, the zone alarm time will get active. However, if the zone is under undervoltage conditions, the activated timer will be the trip one of the given zone. This last timer will have to be set to a value lower than the other one, because when there are undervoltage conditions the fault must be cleared quickly, since there are very few possibilities for the generator to get recovered, and it can cause the electrical system to become instable. Once the timer time is elapsed, the corresponding outputs will get active.

Signals related to field loss: 

Alarm MHO 1



Alarm MHO 2



Trip MHO 1



Trip MHO 2



Undervoltage MHO 1



Undervoltage MHO 2


109


The measurement transmitted is as follows:

Bytes No. 2

Format Word

Specification Procome

Data Impedance Module

Vn * 1,2 * 20

It is the voltage (1.2 *Vn) divided by the minimum current. In order to carry out the relative calculations and impedances, the direct sequence current has to be the same or higher than a minimum value, fixed in 0.05A. That way, the maximum impedances corresponds to the quotient between the maximum voltage and minimum current.

4.24 POWER PROTECTION 102B

4.24.1 General 29B

From the current and voltage measurements, the protection calculates the active and reactive power and the power factor, and according to those values, it carries out some protection functions indicated below. The trip thresholds are programmed in percentage relation to the nominal apparent power, S = 3 * V * I, being: 

V: simple nominal voltage (phase-

  n power protections. In case of programming 1 A, although the physical possibility of programming the minimum ranges as 1% exists, the effective minimum range is 2.5 %, as there is a minimum current threshold established in 25 mA.

4.24.2 Minimum power protection 230B

4.24.2.1 General description It protects against excessive decreases in the generated power and it compares the active power with the minimum power given by the setting. If the generated power is lower than the set value, the protection will trip the corresponding relay. Any reverse power will be considered below the minimum power threshold, so it will operate this protection.

4.24.2.2 Setting ranges Setting Enable Minimum power protection (%) Additional time (s)

Min

Max

Step

Notes YES/NO

1.0

200.0

0.1

0.00

60.00

0.01

Step 1 in versions before Q

The tripping power is set in % of the rated power, which is defined by the set value for the rated voltage and by the If the additional time is programmed as 0 the trip will happen in 35ms. If an additional time is programmed, this time is added to the afore mentioned time.


110


4.24.3 Maximum power protection 231B

4.24.3.1 General description It protects against excessive increases in the generated power. The operation is similar to the previous. The protection will trip the corresponding relay when the generated active power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LOSet.

4.24.3.2 Setting range Setting HI-Set enable Maximum power trip HI-Set (%) Additional time HI-Set (s) LO-Set enable Maximum power trip LO-Set (%) Additional time LO-Set (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

1.0 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.1 0.01

1.0 0.0

200.0 600.0

0.1 0.1

Notes YES/NO Step 1 in versions before Q YES/NO Step 1 in versions before Q

4.24.4 Reverse power protection 23B

4.24.4.1 General description The protection actuates when the power flow gets reversed and the power exceeds the set value. In this situation the protection trips the relay or relays programmed for it. This function has also got two units with different settings for timing ranges.

4.24.4.2 Settings range Setting HI-Set enable Maximum power trip HI-Set (%) Additional time HI-Set (s) LO-Set enable Maximum power trip LO-Set (%) Additional time LO-Set (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

1.0 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.1 0.01

1.0 0.0

200.0 600.0

0.1 0.1


4.24.5 Reactive power reverse protection 23B

4.24.5.1 General description The protection acts when the reactive power flux is reversed (field loss in generators) and this exceeds the set value. In this situation, the protection will trip the relay or relays programmed for it. There is also the possibility of programming two settings with different time ranges.


111


4.24.5.2 Setting ranges Setting Enable HI-Set React. Power reverse trip HI-Set (%) Additional time HI-Set(s) Enable LO-Set React. Power reverse trip LO-Set (%) Additional time LO-Set (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

1.0 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.1 0.01

1.0 0.00

200.0 600.0

0.1 0.01


4.24.6 Minimum apparent power protection 234B

4.24.6.1 General description It is a protection against excessive decreases in the generated power. From the voltage and current measurements, the protection calculates the active and reactive power and the power factor and compares the apparent power with the minimum power given by the setting. If the generated power is lower than the set value, the protection trips the corresponding relay.

4.24.6.2 Setting range Setting

Min.

Max.

Step

Enable Minimum power trip (%) Additional time (s)

1.0 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO Step 1 in versions before Q

The tripping power is set in % of the rated power, which is defined by the set value for the rated voltage and by the

4.24.7 Maximum apparent power protection 235B

4.24.7.1 General description It is a protection against excessive increases in the generated power. The operation is similar to the previous. The protection will trip the corresponding relay when the generated apparent power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LOSet.

4.24.7.2 Setting ranges Setting HI-Set enable Maximum power trip HI-Set (%) Additional time HI-Set (s) LO-Set enable Maximum power trip LO-Set (%) Additional time LO-Set (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

1.0 0.00

200.0 60.00

0.1 0.01

1.0 0.0

200.0 600.0

0.1 0.1



112


4.25 BREAKER MONITORING 103B


This function produces an "event" and a control signal, when there is a number of trips higher than programmed during the programmed time, passing to definitive trip. When manual closing occur, the period of time is reinitialized. An event is also generated each time when, after a trip, the kI2 counter exceeds the programmed threshold (it is a pole to pole treatment). While on this situation the corresponding signal is sent to control. For the pole wear calculation, the wished type of calculation can be programmed, between kI2*t, kI2 and kI. 

If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 is calculated, being I the current measured after passing the waiting time set after the trip.



If kI is chosen, only the sum of currents in kA is calculated being I the current measured after passing the waiting time set after the trip.



If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms being I the current measured after passing the waiting time set after the trip. It finishes accumulating when I<0.05 A.

The trip and close circuit supervision allows the checking of the continuity of circuits with up to 2 trip coils and 2 close coils, when the breaker is close and also when it is open (see the connection example n the following page).


Setting Excessive no. of trips Time span for excessive no. of trips (sec.) Trip circuit monitoring enable Close circuit monitoring enable kI2 alarm threshold kI2 initial value Calculation time Waiting time (s)

Min. 1 300

Max. 254 3,600

Step 1 1

Notes

YES/NO YES/NO 0 0

65,535 65,535

1 1

0

0.1

0.01

KI, kI2, kI2t


113


4.25.3 Coil supervision example 238B

The connections for the trip coil would be similar.

detected, in case the failure remains after this time. The coil monitoring function to operate correctly, the breaker status must be cabled.

4.26 OPERATION LOGIC 104B


Trip sealing: if it is set to "YES" when a tripping signal is sent, this signal remains until it sees the circuit breaker opening, even if the trip cause has disappeared. If it is set to "NO" the tripping signal disappears when the trip cause does (although it will be guarantied that the relay remains excited for at least the time programmed in the digital output programming). The open and close failure timings provide the time margin existing between the corresponding command and the signal reception of the circuit breaker operation, to considerate that this has operated correctly. If this is not the case an "event" and a control signal will occur, and a relay will be activated (if there is any programmed with that function) for the open failure and another for the close failure.


114


4.26.2 Setting ranges (6 tables) 240B

Setting Trip sealing Opening failure timing (sec) Closing failure timing (sec)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.020 0.020

100.000 100.000

0.005 0.005

Notes YES/NO

4.27 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION 105B


Output relays can be programmed as: 

Breaker close failure. It looks after the input "52 status".



Breaker open failure. It looks after the input "52 status".



Open failure with overcurrent. It works according to a settings group generically known as "Breaker failure" :

 Enable  Phase restore current  Neutral restore current  Definite time If the function is enabled, it works as follows: if the unit gives a tripping signal or an external protection signal is received through a digital input, a timer will be started; if after the time programmed as "definite time" the current in any phase is higher than the programmed as "phase restore" or the neutral is higher than the "neutral restore", the relay programmed as "Open failure with overcurrent" will be activated. The relay will be deactivated only when phase and neutral currents fall under their restore values. If a LED has been programmed as "Breaker failure (Open failure with overcurrent)", it will be activated in the same way as the relay, but it will be deactivated only by acknowledgment through keyboard/display on "Last fault", as the LED which signalizes trips. The external protection signal is internally memorized, this means it can be an impulsive type. On this way of functioning, it will not be looked at the digital input of the circuit breaker status, but at the values of the currents. Those units, with single-phase breaker failure, give individual signals for each pole. The reposition settings are the same as those of the three-phase one. These functions can be activated by digital inputs of external protection of each pole.


Setting Enable Phase restore (A) Neutral restore (A) Definite time (sec)

Min.

Max.

Step

0.05 0.05 0.00

200.0 200.0 60.0

0.01 0.1 0.01

Notes YES/NO


115


4.28 TAP CHANGER LOCKING (50TCL FUNCTION) 106B

The only purpose of this function is to allow tap changer locking if the set current value is exceeded. The settings are the following ones:

 Enable: YES/NO  Locking current threshold: 0.05 A to 200 A correspondent control signal is sent.

4.29 LOCKING OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 107B

Each protection function can be blocked by a digital input or by a logic function (combination of control inputs and/or The locking programming is done by keyboard/display as one setting more of the given function. available in the unit.

4.30 FAULT LOCATOR 108B

4.30.1 Introduction 243B

The fault locator for singles lines implemented with the PL300 protection processes the information collected on each fault, thereby returning the estimated distance to the fault point as a result of its calculations. The initial data necessary for reaching the final calculations are the following: 

Sample to sample values of the voltage and current signals collected at the instant that the fault occurs.



Impedance parameters of the line on which the fault has occurred.



Length of the line.



Transformation ratios of the VTs and CTs of the position that captured the fault.

The result obtained is the distance to the fault in kilometres.

4.30.2 Programming settings and collecting results 24B

The necessary parameters for the distance calculation algorithm to work are the following (all the values are referred to the primary): Abrev. alo Z1 Z2 Z01 Z02 YL2 YL02 ZA1 ZA2

Description Line length Real part of the Direct Sequence Impedance of the line per length unit Imaginary part of idem Real part of the Single Pole Impedance of the line per length unit Imaginary part of idem Imaginary part of the Direct Sequence Impedance of the line per length unit Imaginary part of the Single Pole Admittance of the line per length unit. Real part of the Reduced Impedance of the System Direct Sequence in the edge where the relay is Imaginary part of idem

Units Km /Km /Km /Km /Km 1/( /Km) ·10-9 1/( /Km) ·10-9


116


ZA01 ZA02 ZB1 ZB2 ZAB1 ZAB2 tpV tpI tpI0 I0min I0max RTV RTI RTIN TSAL

located Imaginary part of the idem Real part of the Reduced Impedance of the System Direct Sequence in the edge where the relay is Imaginary part of idem Real part of the Direct Sequence Impedance in parallel with the relay line Imaginary part of idem Variation minimum threshold in the voltage for Fault detection. Variation minimum threshold in the phase current for Fault detection. Variation minimum threshold in the GROUND current for Fault detection. Minimum current of ground after closing (A) Maximum current of ground after closing (A) Current detection Transformatio ratio of the voltage measurement transformer Transformatio ratio of the phase current measurement transformer Transformatio ratio of the ground current measurement transformer Activation time of the analogue output or the measurement to control

V primary A primary A primary A primary YES/NO

0-3600 sec

If the and it works with current prefault values equal to zero, in order to avoid the inrush distortion in these measurements. The "Maximum neutral current (A)" setting is used to filter cross-country faults (simultaneous faults in different lines, e.g., AN in protection line and BN in adjacent line). In situations in which cross-country faults are detected, the protection does not locate the fault, as in such situations the voltages are distorted by fault in the adjacent line and cause miscalculations of the distance to the fault. One characteristic of cross-country faults is that the zero sequence current level detected in the system exceeds the maximum zero sequence current level for single-phase faults. To filter the faults in which this condition is met, the location of the fault is not permitted in situations in which the "maximum neutral current (A)" is exceeded. These parameters of the protection are programmed using the communication with the SIPCON protection console. The screen corresponding to the line parameters is shown in the following figure:


117


The parameters with the transformation ratios of CTs and VTs are communicated to the relay from the general settings screen included in the following figure:

General settings screen

The result of the distance calculation is included in the fault report as indicated in the following figure:


118


Fault report

4.30.3 Local Source Zero Sequence Impedance Setting 245B

The local source zero sequence impedance setting method is shown below. This setting only applies when the relay is set to receive phase to phase voltages and the fault locator is enabled. The settings for the following cases are described. 

Grounding via zig-zag coil.



Rigid or impedance grounding.

4.30.3.1 Grounding via zig-zag coil:

PL300

In those cases in which an artificial grounding neutral by means of a zig-

Real part:

0

Imaginary part:

3 Z0


119


For example, for a 20 kV network with a grounding system by means of a zig-zag coil that limits the neutral current to 500 A, the adjustment process is as follows:

U

20000

3 IN

Z0

3 500

23

ZA0: Real part:

0

Imaginary part:

3 * 23

4.30.3.2 Impedance grounding:

PL300

Z0

In those cases in which an impedance grounding is used, the ZA0 setting is configured as follows: ZA0:

3 Re( Z 0)

Real part:

3 Im(Z 0) Imaginary part:

U2 Xcc S

In which: U:

Network voltage in kV (protection side)

S:

Transformer power in MVA.

Xcc:

Transformer short-circuit impedance in p.u.

4.30.4 Locator operation 246B

The process that the algorithm follows can be summarised in 5 steps, which are explained below: 

Detection of the fault instant.



Pre-fault and post-fault filtering.



Determination of the kind of fault.



Location algorithm.



Presentation of the results.


120


4.30.4.1 Fault detection Once the protection has started up, the fault detection algorithm begins to process the analogue signals received in search of the exact instant at which the fault occurred. This search is made by a comparison of the samples between consecutive cycles. Once the fault instant has been determined, a total of 20 fault cycles are stored in memory, and it waits for confirmation of protection tripping in order to process the stored data. In the event that the protection start-up relapses without tripping, the process of calculating the distance to fault is aborted. In case the protection trips, the processing of the collected signals continues.

4.30.4.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering The distance calculation algorithm uses the basic components of the voltage and current waves. The filtering extracts the said components from the signals stored at the start-up moment. The collected signal is processed using a digital filter that provides the basic voltage and current components. For this stage, a cosine filter is used. The filtering is adapted to the fault cycle number it finds, up to a maximum of 5 cycles and a minimum of 1 cycle. The transition is also detected in evolutive faults, limiting the cycle number to the fist type that appears.

4.30.4.3 Determination of fault type Before launching the distance calculation algorithm, from the pre-fault and fault measurements calculated in the preceding step, it is necessary to define the kind of fault that has occurred. The locator includes an algorithm that determines what phases were affected by the fault. The algorithm used is based on the known Girgis method for distance relays. This procedure, which analyses the various magnitudes of the change between the pre-fault situation and the post-fault situation in the basic component of the currents, has demonstrated an enviable accuracy in its results.

4.30.4.4 Distance calculation The distance calculation algorithm developed for the single line has been designed for a line topology such as the following figure:


121


Vrelay Irelay

Line topology

When a fault occurs on one of the lines corresponding to our relay, the information collected by the locator, located at one of the ends of the same, is reduced to the voltage and current values. The necessary equations for completely determining the system will be obtained from the situation existing at the instant immediately before the fault and from the fault situation itself. The application of the principle of superposing the models in the generators and a suitable mathematical development lead to a system of equations. The use of the expressions obtained allows calculating the distance to the fault. In order to establish the interactive method that allows calculating the distance, the three different kinds of faults must be considered as mentioned in the preceding point.

4.30.4.5 Result presentation The presentation of the results is made in different ways:  

In the fault report that is sent to the PC by communication.



In a control measurement:

 Range : -20% to 100 %  It is maintained active the programmed time (0

7199seconds) or till another fault occurs if the

programmed time is the maximum one (7200 s). 

Optionally, if the unit has an extension board with analogue outputs, as a current signal, in depending on the percentage of the total of the line the fault is in.



In this case, the proportion between the distance and the current is reflected in the following figure:

mA


122


Analogue output (mA) 5 mA

-20%

0%

100%

Distance to fault (% of the total length)

So, the following calculation will be carried out ion order to calculate the distance to the fault starting from the analogue output current: Distance (%) = Current(mA)·120/5

20

And the following one to calculate the current corresponding to a certain current: Current (mA) = [Distance(%)+20]·5/120 The behaviour of the analogue output has some particularities: 

after a fault, it remains active for a programmed time. (from 0 to 3600 seconds).



if, while the current output is active, another fault occurs two things may happen:

 if the recloser is in on-going cycle, the present current output is not modified and it remains active for the whole programmed time.

 if the recloser is not in on-going cycle, the output current is removed or 2 minutes and then the new calculation is presented within the programmed time. Note.- The localizer operation has a very special characteristics when selecting the localizer settings. When this setting is at YES, it works as follows:



If calculating the distance of a fault (activation time of the output without finishing), a new fault is only calculated if we are not in an on-going cycle or definite trip. The first fault of a reclosure cycle is only calculated while we are calculating the value of the first line of the reclosure sequence. If we are not calculating this value, that is, the time to keep the output is zero, we clear all the faults produced (regardless the reclosure cycle).

If the Inrush setting is at NO, try to calculate all the faults that occur. If we are within the time to keep the distances and another fault occurs, we will calculate and present it when the previous fault is already calculated (if we are keeping the distance to a certain fault and some of them occur within that time, we only calculate the last one to occur). Regarding the distance shown in the different protocols, in PROCOME it is possible to choose between showings the maintained fault (with programmable time) and the instantaneous one. In the rest of the protocols (DNP, MODBUS, 101...) the instantaneous fault is shown when selecting the measurement format in counts and the fault with kept time when choosing the calculated format. The distance measurement is given in counts, where the background scale is a un 120% (offset or 20 displacement).


123


4.31 UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION (37) 109B


The relays have two definite time undercurrent levels, based on the minimum current of the three phases. The unit picks up when one of the three phase currents falls below the setting. The choice of open- and closed-breaker trips (ED status of 52) is selectable (by setting).

4.31.2 Settings range 248B

table. Setting Enabled Undercurrent pickup level 1 Additional timing level 1 Undercurrent pickup level 2 Additional timing level 2

Min. Max Step 0.1 0.0 2 0 0.1 0.0 2 0

0,01 0.00 1 600 0,01 0.01 10 0.00 2 1 600 0.01 10 2

Remarks YES always / YES with 52 closed / NO For input with 200A range For input with 40A range

For input with 200A range For input with 40A range


124

AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS 

5. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS 5.1 RECLOSER 10B


The unit enables up to 4 reclosers. Different close times for phase to phase and phase to earth faults. In service/Out of service push-button in the keyboard. Programmable security time after manual closing and after automatic closing. The 5 closure counters (total, first, second, third and fourth closures) are stored in non volatile memory and can be displayed on the display. These counters can be set to 0 by keyboard. Definitions: 

Surveillance or rest status.

 start operating.  



Ongoing cycle status. This status of the recloser is set throughout the entire process in which it is activated from the first trip up to the closing of the breaker and the safety period has elapsed (successful reclosing) or until all the programmed reclosings have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first instance it moves on to Definitive trip status.

 remains open, given that it is a permanent fault. Exit from this status can only be achieved by closing the breaker manually. 

Time for first, second, third and fourth closure.

 closure phases.  

   

Reclaim time after manual closing. It is the time from the moment of circuit breaker manual closing; during this time it is watched if there is a protection trip, and if this is the case, it will be continued to definitive trip instead of to surveillance status. Reclaim time after automatic closure. It is the time from the moment of circuit breaker automatic closing; during this time it is watched if there is a protection trip, and if this is the case the cycle will be continued instead of moving on to Surveillance. Close conditions time (optional use). It is the time margin, after a protection trip, during which the close conditions (Reference voltage presence) must be fulfilled to be able to continue the cycle. It is not used if there is no input programmed


125


5.1.2 Operation 250B

The figures below represent the sequence of events for a recloser which has been programmed for three reclosing attempts, with TR1, TR2 and TR3 as the corresponding reclosing times, with a reclaim Tsec, for different situations:

a.- First successful reclosing

Once the Surveillance status has been reached, a new trip causes the beginning of a new cycle, restarting the reclosing 1, as it is shown next:

WARNING! It may happen that a low current permanent fault causes tripping after expiring the reclaim time. In order to avoid that, in such situation, all the reclosings become first reclosings and a definitive trip is never reached, the reclaim time is automatically extended if there is a starting until it drops-off or trips.

b.- Second successful reclosing.


126


c.- Third successful reclosing.

d.- Moves onto a definitive trip after exhausting the programmed number of reclosings.

e.- Moves onto definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time after a manual closing.


127



Setting Recloser in service Number of closures Waiting time for the first closure, phase to phase faults (s) Waiting time for the second closure, phase to phase faults (s) Waiting time for the third closure, phases to phase faults (s) Waiting time for the fourth closure, phase to phase faults (s) Waiting time for the first closure, phase to earth faults (s) Waiting time for the second closure, phase to earth faults (s) Waiting time for the third closure, phase to earth faults (s) Waiting time for the fourth closure phase to earth faults (s) Reclaim time after automatic closing, phase to phase faults (s) Reclaim time after automatic closing phase to earth faults (s) Reclaim time after manual closing (s) Reference voltage waiting time (s)

Min.

Max.

Step

0 0.05 1 1 1 0.05 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

4 600.0 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600

1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Notes YES/NO

5.1.4 Trips enabling (6 tables) 25B

Through "YES" or "NO" it is programmed for each of the possible tripping conditions 

Phase timed overcurrent



Neutral timed overcurrent



Phase instantaneous overcurrent



Neutral instantaneous overcurrent



Broken conductor and current unbalance

if it is enabled or not in each of the following circumstances 

After manual closing



After the first reclosing



After the second reclosing



After the third reclosing



After the fourth reclosing

The trip disabling by this procedure is effective during the corresponding reclaim time and with the condition that the recloser is engaged. If the enabling of "trip by external protection operation" is programmed "NO", the recloser will not consider that input during the reclaim time, and if a circuit breaker opening occurs for this reason, and without a trip order by their own protection, it will be considered as a manual opening and therefore it will not proceed to reclose.

5.1.5 Enable of reclosings (6 tables) 253B

By using "YES" or "NO" it will be programmed for each of the possible reclosings whether it is allowed or not after each of the 7 possible causes of own trips seen in the previous section, and the trip by external protection operation. It may be the case that a trip command is given by several units and the corresponding reclosing enabling criteria are not coincident. In such situation the reclosing decision will be taken internally, depending on the specifications for the first trip (by order, not by time) analysed according to the following order: 




Neutral timed overcurrent






Neutral instantaneous overcurrent


128




Broken conductor or unbalance



External protection actuation

If it is decided that that reclosing is not enabled, it will be moved on to the next reclosing analysis, until an enabled one is found or until definitive trip is reached. To prevent the reclosing by a determined protection unit, the reclosing blocking settings R1 to R4 must be programmed to "NO" from the last wished reclosing. For example if a reclosing is not wished after phase time delayed trip, and the maximum number of programmed reclosings is 1, all reclosings (R1 to R4) after that type of trip must be programmed to "NO".

5.1.6 Other operation characteristics 254B

 

Recloser Out of service This state is reached by pressing the push-button R on the keyboard, or control order. All relays related to the recloser are de-excited.



Definitive trip



Apart from the already mentioned causes, this status is reached by trip being the recloser locked.



Recloser locked





This state is reached by activation of input or logic programmed as recloser locking. The cycle is not started in it and it comes out, if it was already started, moving on to Definitive trip if the circuit breaker opens by a protection trip. Bus bar voltage monitoring

 is applied, a function which prevents the breaker automatic closing will be executed if the bus bar is deenergized. The use of this input is optional. If no input is programmed as Vref, the recloser automation does not count on the bus bar voltage condition to perform a closing operation.   

Manual operation during the cycle. If during the operating cycle a manual order (or by command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser aborts the cycle and moves onto idle status. Digital outputs related to recloser (and which can be programmed as output relays):

 Recloser in ongoing cycle. Active from the moment when the circuit breaker opens by trip until the Monitoring or definitive trip status is reached.

 Recloser locked. Active if the recloser is disengaged or if the external recloser locking input is activated.

 Closing (breaker closing order)  Definitive trip. Active while on that state.  Cancellation of instantaneous. Active during the reclaim time after an automatic closing. It can be used to block other protections (externals). 

Logic inputs related to the recloser, which can be assigned to physical inputs:

 Breaker status. This input is necessary for the recloser operation.  Reference voltage. It is not necessary. If it is programmed, the recloser function demands to see closed that input to carry out the reclosing; not, if it is not programmed.

 Recloser locking. As its name indicates, it inhibits this automation. It is not necessary if it is not wished to use the locking.

 External protection. It can cause the beginning of a reclosing cycle if the reclosing enabling are set to "YES" due to the "external protection" cause. It is not necessary.


129


5.2 SEQUENCE COORDINATION 1B

This function aims that the recloser moves along the reclosing sequence when he sees a fault being interrupted by other recloser situated downstream, despite he does not come himself to produce trips of its breaker. If the coordination function is enable, the recloser will move into running cycle when detecting a protection start-up after a drop-out of the protection (instead of a trip as usual) and from that moment it will count (cyclewise) the current interruptions as own trips and the current reestablishment as own reclosings. So, in the case of two units in series, being the downstream one programmed with tripping times shorter than the upper one, in front of a permanent fault even lower situated, the unit downstream is the one carrying out effectively the tripping and reclosing operations, but the upper one is following him in his same cycle status. If, for example 3 high speed shots and 1 low speed shot have been programmed for each one, the only one which will be active, with the 4 shots, is the downstream one. If there is no coordination, the downstream one would trip 3 times, other 3 times the upper one and 1 more (and definitive) the downstream one, so that the line section between both units has been opened 3 times without reason. The only set

By

5.3 RECLOSING AFTER TRIPPING BY MINIMUM FREQUENCY 12B


After a trip by minimum frequency, if this function is enabled and not locked, the unit tries only one reclosing. When the unit trips, the breaker closing 79fis at "NO" or if the frequency is higher than the mínimum programmed, or if the voltage is higher than the minimum programmed. If th fulfilled, it moves to definitive trip.

The breaker closing 79f-locking signal will be active until the recloser or definite trip conditions are given. p, ser conditions indefinitely. definitive trip. Setting the recloser out of service by command or by locking by digital input affects both this operating mode and the trip by current operating mode.

5.3.2 Settings 256B

Setting Enable Min. freq. condition to reclose Min. frequency to reclose Reclosing time (s) Reclaim time (s) Waiting enable definite trip Waiting enable definite trip Recloser condition minimum frequency Recloser value minimum voltage

Min.

Max.

Step

40 1 1

70 1,000 300

0.01 1 1

0

86400

1

0

200

0.1

Notes YES/NO YES/NO

YES/NO YES/NO


130


Note: this operation mode isused from version AD of the CPU Firmware

5.4 SPECIAL RECLOSER TO OPERATE WITH PROTECTIONS WITH SINGLE-POLE TRIP 13B

The recloser can be in one of the following 3 statuses:

Out of service. This status is reached by Control command or by command of the protection console. It does not reclose.

In service, three-pole mode. This status is reached by Control command or by command of the protection console or by activation of digital input (if there is any programmed for that function, which is optional). Its operation is the same to the standard in the PL300 protections except for the next aspects:

 The ongoing cycle will start by actuation of the PL300 itself or by activation of the

-

The

-

 The close command is conditioned be wired up to the output of a PL50 unit that will execute the Synchrocheck function.



-pole

In service, single-pole mode. This status is reached by Control command or by digital input activation (if there is any programmed for that function, which is optional). Its operation is the following one:



-



-pole mod closure conditional on the closure permission).

 If the first trip is single-pole, the closure time and the reclaim time can be different of those for the three-pole trip (other settings) and the close command (which is three-pole) is given without taking into account the Synchrocheck function.



-

 It is considered that in a cycle of closures there can only be one single-pole and if there is, it must be the first one. The second and subsequent are always three-pole. So unlike the closure and reclaim times for three-pole trips, that are 4, there is one only closure time and one reclaim time for the single-pole trip.

5.5 SYNCHROCHECK 14B


the compliance of the conditions established by setting. Two digital o a signal for a closure automation function, if there is any. This function can be disabled (by setting or by digital input), in which case there will always be closure permission. The function compares the voltage signals of the same phase at both sides of the breaker (that we will call A and , being A the bar side and B the line side). The unit compares directly the voltages received by its analogue inputs, that is, the


131


values of the secondary of the voltage measurement transformers. It is supposed that the transformation ratio of these is the same in the busbar and in the line. There is no correction factor for the case in which they are different. The conditions to be closure permission are of two types:



Undervoltage permission. It is given permission if there is no voltage in one or both sides of the breaker, according to the following settings:

 Permission if there is no voltage in A nor in B (YES or NO)  Permission if there is no voltage in A but there is in B (YES or NO)  Permission if there is no voltage in B but there is in A (YES or NO) It is considered that there is no voltage in one side of the breaker when the voltage measured is lower than the value

The analysis of the undervoltage conditions is only carried out if the Synchrocheck function is enabled, that is, it is not an undervoltage protection (type 27) but an auxiliary element to allow the closure in certain conditions, in which the comparison between the busbar and the line voltages would not give permission. As said before, if the Synchrocheck function is disabled, the closure permission is given.  the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

 Difference between VA and VB lower that the programmed value  Difference in phase angles lower than the programmed value  Difference in frequencies lower than the programmed value Each one of these three conditions can be enabled or not. If it is not, it gives permission. programmed for the activation of the closure permission signal. The syncrocheck failure signal is activated immediately in the event of a non-compliance with the conditions and is independent of the timer. way any closure can be locked if that relay is used as locking of the manual command. We stress that this permission is referred only to the Synchrocheck function; so she is only the one that controls the s a relay controlled by closure commands (digital input or command). The function does not take into account the breaker status, that is, it can give closure. As control signals we can find the following ones: voltage difference, frequency and angle and Synchrocheck locked (by input, setting).

5.5.2 Settings 258B

Setting Enable Close operation time (s) Minimum voltage in side A (V) Minimum voltage in side B (V) Undervolt.

Min.

Max.

Step

0 10 10

100 200 200

1 1 1

Notes YES/NO Conditions fulfilling

YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO

Voltage difference condit. enable

YES/NO


132


Voltage difference (V) Frequency difference condit. Enable Frequency difference (Hz) Angle difference condit. Enable Angle difference (º)

2

90

1

0.05

2

0.01

5

50

1

YES/NO YES/NO

Apart from the previous ones, from FW BM version onwards, there is another setting to program in which phase of side A the module and the angle are taken for this Synchronization function. options are A, B, C). synchronism). The frequency measurement is always taken from phase B, regardless the one programmed in the previous setting.

5.6 CLOSE LOCKING WITH PRESENCE OR ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE 15B

Inhibition by voltage presence on the line side. It tries to lock the closing if there is voltage on the line side. So that, the FW version presents the following changes:

 It adds a condition to the synchronism, so that, if the units that look at the parameter differences (module, angle and frequency) are disabled the undervoltage unit criterion is taken as a decision to allow or not the closing.



-No Side sabling the permissions by difference of module, angle and frequency. In that situation the undervoltage criterion prevails over the differences of shape, which does not allow the closing, if there is voltage on side B.

 It adds new signals of presence and absence of voltage on side A and on side B and these signals can be taken to the Recloser locking signal through a logic. The added signals are the following:

 Voltage presence on side A  Voltage presence on side B  Voltage absence on side A  Voltage absence on side B Example: If side A voltage is lower than the absence (used in the synchronism) side A voltage absence signal will be activated; if the presence setting is exceeded, the absence one will be deactivated and the presence one will be activated.

5.7 AUTOMATION FUNCTION FOR DISTRIBUTION CENTRES 16B

5.7.1 Slack springs automation functions 259B



It is composed of:

 "unstretched springs" digital input  "open spring motor" digital output  "spring slack time" setting (0.1 to 100 seconds) 

Operation: When "unstretched spr this time the input is deactivated, the lock is deactivated. If the time is exceed with no opening, "open kept. The alarm and locking do not disappear till the input is deactivated.


133


5.7.2 Voltage presence 260B

It is not an automati absence), the higher phase-to-phase voltage must be within some o preset values, as: 

 Phase to phase rated primary voltage (kV)  Voltage absence threshold (% of the nominal)  Voltage presence threshold (%n of the nominal) 

Operation: When the highest of the phase to phase voltages exceeds the presence threshold, control word bit is set to 1, when it falls below the absence threshold it is set to 0.

5.7.3 Locking 261B

Opening locking. The open order will be not given by command, input or pushbutton, if the breaker is seen as open (but it can be given by protection trip, regardless how it is seen). Closing opening. The open order will be not given by command, input, pushbutton or recloser, if the breaker is seen as there is that locking, there is a Definite Trip.


134

OTHER SETTINGS 

6. OTHER SETTINGS 6.1 PROGRAMMING OF LOGIC OUTPUTS 17B

The user can configure up to 15 logic outputs, called "logic 1" to "logic 15", which can be assigned to relays, as well as to LEDs, locking inputs, signals to be registered on the disturbance recorder, etc. It is also possible to configure generate The programming of the logic outputs can be only done through the Protections console, not by keyboard / display, from the basic available signals, consigned in the Appendix "Available signals" (as many of them correspond to optional functions, not every model will contain all of them). The programming procedure is described in other document: the Protections console manual. The logic signals can be generated according to the following scheme:

As it can be observed in the definition of a logic output intervene the following elements:

 up to 16 signals among the available ones (or their negated ones), forming an OR function  up to 16 signals among the available ones (or their negated ones), forming an AND function  an OR or AND function (programmable) of two previous functions´ results  a programmable time delay ("delay") to activate the output  a programmable time for the duration of the output activation The delay time is the time length since there is a logic 1 at the exit of the logic ports until the corresponding logic output is activated. If during this time the "1"dissapeared, the output could not be activated. It can be programmed between 0 and 599.9 s, with steps of 0.1 s. The pulse time (duration) is the time during which the logic signal remains active. Its programming allows two options:

 "By logic": after the delay, the output is active as long as there is a 1 at the programmed logic output  By time": the time during which the output is active is programmed, so that once expired the output is deactivated, independently from the state of the programmed logic output. Only a new step from 0 to 1 will activate the output again, after the delay.

 The time range goes from 0.1 s to 599.9 s, with steps of 0.1 s. A logic output "i" can be used as available signal for programming input of other logic signal "j" or of itself.


135

OTHER SETTINGS 

A very simple application sample: it is wished that the digital output DO7 follows to the digital input DI6, with a delay of 1 s.

Input DI6 Logic output 1

Input DI6 Duratio n Logic

Dela y

/i

 T delay = 1s.

Logic output 1

Application 1. Timed output

 Duration = "by logic"  Programming of output DO7: Logic 1 Another example of logical applications (fuse blow up function): There are in a table (table 1) a curve that trips in quick time, and another one (table 2) that trips in a longer time. Logic 7 will be programmed: 79I-T. 2nd recloser security. , T delay = nitial situation (table 1) logic 8 will be programmed: (79I- Recl. On standby) OR (79I- Intens. Definitive trip ) OR (79I-. Curr.

6.2 LOGIC SELECTIVITY FUNCTIONS 18B

Sele up of the units 50/50N/50NS/67NA and/or the following digital signal:

 FF=Forward Fault: It picks up the 50 or 50N or 50NS or 67NA and the corresponding directional sees the fault forwards. The unit 50 does not have to be directional.

 FR= Reverse fault: It picks up the 50 or 50N or 50NS or 67NA and the corresponding directional sees the fault backwards. The unit 50 does not have to be directional.

 Directional Retrolocking: FF AND not (FR) AND not (Breaker failure).  Non-directional Retrolocking: (pick up of 50, 50N, 50NS) AND not (Breaker failure).  Prelocking: FR AND not (FF) AND not (Breaker failure).  Pretrip: (FF AND (Trip by 50/50N67NA) AND not(DI locking)) OR (FF AND (Trip by 51/51N))  Retrotrip(FR AND (Trip by 50/50N67NA) AND not(DI locking)) OR (FR AND (Trip by 51/51N))

6.3 MEASUREMENTS CHRONOLOGICAL RECORD 19B

The settings corresponding to measurement chronological record are detailed


136

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 

7. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 7.1 EVENTS REPORTS 120B

The list of events which can be generated by the protection (if it has the corresponding functions, which are optional in many cases) is indicated as follows. Each event comes along with his date and time and his phase and neutral currents. The protection saves in non volatile memory a queue of 400 events, retrievable from the PC.

Non maskable events  Activation table 1  Activation table 2  Activation table 3  Activation table 4  Activation table 5  Activation table 6  Change settings table 0  Change settings table 1  Change settings table 2  Change settings table 3  Change settings table 4  Change settings table 5  Change settings table 6  Recloser out of service  Recloser in service  Relay out of service  Relay in service  Relay off  Relay on  Digital input IN-xx (1 to 35) disabled by intermittence

Maskable events  Communications  Local mode (acts from keyboard/display)  Local mode (acts through front port)  Remote mode (acts through rear port)  Current protection  Timed unit pickup phase A  Timed unit pickup phase B  Timed unit pickup phase C  Instantaneous unit pickup phase A  Instantaneous unit pickup phase B  Instantaneous unit pickup phase C


137

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS   Activation of output of timed unit phase B  Activation of output of timed unit phase C  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase A  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase B  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase C  Timed unit pickup neutral  Instantaneous unit pickup neutral  Activation of output of timed unit neutral  Activation of output of instantaneous unit neutral  Phase unbalance timed unit pickup  Phase unbalance instantaneous pickup  Activation of output of phase unbalance timed unit  Activation of output of phase unbalance instantaneous unit  Broken conductor unit pickup  Activation of output of broken conductor  Breaker failure  Trip circuit failure  Close circuit failure  Exceeded the maximum (set limit) of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator  Overflow (numeric limit) of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator  Undercurrent Protection  Undercurrent Pickup Level 1  Undercurrent Trip Level 1  Undercurrent Pickup Level 2  Undercurrent Trip Level 2  Overvoltage protection:  Timed unit pickup phase A  Timed unit pickup phase B  Timed unit pickup phase C  Instantaneous unit pickup phase A  Instantaneous unit pickup phase B  Instantaneous unit pickup phase C  Activation of output of timed unit phase A (trip)  Activation of output of timed unit phase B  Activation of output of timed unit phase C  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase A  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase B  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase C  Undervoltage protection:  Timed unit pickup phase A  Timed unit pickup phase B  Timed unit pickup phase C  Instantaneous unit pickup phase A


138

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS   Instantaneous unit pickup phase B  Instantaneous unit pickup phase C  Activation of output of timed unit phase A (trip)  Activation of output of timed unit phase B  Activation of output of timed unit phase C  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase A  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase B  Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase C  Inputs  Activation of digital input xx ( 1 to 17)  Deactivation of digital input xx (1 to 17)  Recloser  External locking of the recloser  External unlocking of the recloser  No reference voltage  Reclosing order  Definitive trip  Recloser in idle  Recloser in ongoing cycle  Command  Excessive number of trips  Breaker closing  Breaker opening  Breaker close command (control message or input)  Breaker open command ( control message or input )  Close command failure  Open command failure  Self-checking  Critical Hardware Error 

Converter reference voltage error



Converter error



FLASH memory recording error



Relays activation error



SPI communication error (between micro and DSP)

 Non critical Hardware error 

clock synchronization error

 HW error corrected

7.2 FAULT RECORDS 12B

The protection stores in non volatile memory a queue of the 20 last faults retrievable from the PC with the following information

 Available units


139

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS   Units tripped during fault  Units picked up during fault  Fault starting date and time (first picked up unit)  Tripping date and time (first picked up unit)  Fault ending date and time (when the trip signal disappears)  Current cleared by circuit breaker (maximum of phase currents detected between the moment of the tripping order and the breaker opening)

 Settings group active during the fault  Frequency  Distance to fault  Prefault active and reactive powers  Fault active and reactive powers  Number or reclosing in which the fault has occurred.  Type of fault and type of trip: 3 letters code made by the characters combinations A, B, C, N, D,... depending on tripping by phase, neutral or unbalance-broken conductor and type of function. Example: ACN is a two phase to earth fault between phases A and C and earth. Are listed below fault codes: 

Phases Overcurrent: (Depending on the phase affected) ABC



Neutral Overcurrent: N



Current unbalance: DQ



Broken conductor: FA



Undercurrent: i



Overvoltage: (Depending on the phase affected) abc



Undervoltage: (Depending on the phase affected) abc



Voltage unbalance: dq



Overvoltage 3xV0: n



Frecuency minimum/maximum: f / F



Frecuency derivative: df



Thermal Image: IT



Minimum active power: p



Maximum active power: P



Reverse active power: iP



Reverse reactive power: iQ



Minimum apparent power: s



Maximum apparent power: S



Loss of field: MHO



Protective schemes: RTP

 Pre-fault Phase A current (module and angle).  Pre-fault Phase B current  Pre-fault Phase C current  Pre-fault Neutral current 

The pre-fault currents and voltages are simultaneous, and they are those existing 2 cycles prior to the pick-up.

 Phase A fault current (module and angle)


140

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS   Phase B fault current  Phase C fault current  Neutral fault current The 4 fault currents are simultaneous, and they are the ones existing at the moment of the trip order.

 Phases (A, B and C) pre-fault voltages (module and angle).  Phases (A, B and C) pre-fault voltages (module and angle). The 4 fault voltages are simultaneous to the fault currents.

 KI/KI2/KI2T (depending on the setting) per phase Besides they are kept in non volatile memory, and they are retrievable through keyboard /display, the following data corresponding to the last 10 faults:

 Tripped phases  Maximum phase and neutral currents during fault  Date and starting and ending time of the fault

7.3 MEASUREMENTS 12B

7.3.1 Measurements at the secondary 26B

They are measurements referred to the fundamental component, which are the ones used by the protection functions:

7.3.1.1 By keyboard/display 

Phase A current (module in Amperes and angle in degrees)



Phase B current "



Phase C current "



Neutral current "



Sensitive neutral current



Phase A simple phase voltage (module in Volts and angle in degrees)



Phase B simple phase voltage ( "

" )



Phase C simple phase voltage ( "

" )



Average simple phase voltage ( "

" )



Neutral voltage



Frequency (in Hz)



Current maximeter (in Amperes)



I2/I1 negative sequence component in %

" " "

Note. - The phase current values in display are given in absolute value, that is, without sign. Note about the maximeter. - The maximeter shows the maximum value of the average value during a specific time interval, of the three phase average current. The time interval is that programmed as time window for in the Measurement setting. The detailed operation is the following one: every second the three phase average current is calculated and it is accumulating; when an interval is over, the accumulated value is divided by its number of seconds; thus the average value of this interval is obtained. If this value is higher than the one in the maximeter, it is actualize with the new value, taking note of the date and time when it has been obtained.

7.3.1.2 Through PC(Protections console) They are on the first of the "STATUS" screens


141







Phase B current



Phase C current



Neutral current



Phase A to earth voltage (module in Volts and angle in degrees)



Phase B to earth voltage



Phase C to earth voltage






Voltage and current direct, inverse and zero sequences

All the angles are referred to the simple phase voltage of Phase A.

7.3.2 Measurements at the primary 263B

7.3.2.1 By keyboard/display 

Phase A current (in Amperes)

   

Phase A simple voltage (in kV)

   

Compound voltage VAB (in kV)

   

Neutral voltage



Active total power (MW)



Reactive total power (MVAR)



Apparent total power (MVA)



Active power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)



Reactive power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)



Power factor



Active energy counter (positive)



Active energy counter (negative)



Reactive energy counter (positive)



Reactive energy counter (negative)



Date and time of the counter setting to 0



Frequency (in Hz)






Total Power maximeter



Power by phase maximeter (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)


142




Harmonics distortion factor in IA, IB and IC (in %)



Harmonics distortion factor in VA, VB and VC (in %)

The harmonic distortion factors are given as the ratio between the fundamental and the result of considering the harmonics 1 to 15.

7.3.2.2 Through PC (Protections console) They are on the first of the "MEASUREMENTS" screens 




Phase B current



Phase C current



Neutral current



Neutral sensitive current






Date and time corresponding to the maximeter



Phase A simple voltage (module in kV and angle in degrees)



Phase B simple voltage



Phase C simple voltage



Compound voltage VAB (in kV)

   

Frequency



Active total power (MW)



Reactive total power (MVAR)



Apparent total power (MVA)



Active power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)



Reactive power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)



Average power factor



Power factor by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)



Active energy counter (positive)



Active energy counter (negative)



Reactive energy counter (positive)



Reactive energy counter (negative)



Date and time of the counter setting to 0



Harmonics distortion factor in IA, IB and IC (in %)



Harmonics distortion factor in VA, VB and VC (in %)

The harmonic distortion factors are given as the ratio between the fundamental and the result of considering the harmonics 1 to 15. Note.- The phase current values in this screen are given with sign, which is the same one to that of the active power corresponding to that phase.


143


7.3.3 Vn-Vsinc measurement 264B

Allows the Vsinc transformer to be employed as a neutral voltage measurement when the syncrocheck is not being employed. Thus, flexibility is afforded to those models which did not previously allow a Vn measurement when the syncrocheck function was not in use. In order to employ the Vsinc transformer as a Vn measurement, the following conditions must be met: 

The unit must be equipped with another Vn transformer.



The model must contemplate the Vn surge function.



The syncrocheck function must be disabled.



The Vn measurement must be programmed as originating from the transformer.

In the absence of the above conditions, the Vsinc transformer is employed for syncrocheck. When the above conditions are produced, the unit will function in the following manner: 

The transformer which is usually Vsinc will appear as Vneutro in the status screen.



The Vn (59N) surge functions will function in accordance with this



The Vsinc measurement will be displayed as 0V.

7.4 MEASUREMENTS HISTORICAL REPORT 123B


The protection keeps in non volatile memory a queue of 400 historical measurement records, retrievable from a PC (Protections console). Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents, the maximum and minimum average single voltages and the maximum and minimum active, reactive and apparent power (computed within a programmable time window) detected during an also programmable register period. The currents are secondary Amperes, and the voltages are secondary Volts. The operation detail is the following: every second, the current (three phase average) values, the voltage (three phase average) values, and the power values are added to their respective accumulators; when the time screen is over the accumulated value is divided into the window number of seconds, in order to obtain he average value. When the programmed register interval is over, the maximum and minimum values of the measurements obtained in this interval are registered. The register interval is automatically synchronised with he clock, so if 15 minutes are programmed, 4 registers will be done every tour, that is at 0, 15, 30 and 45 minutes. Calendar mask operation: for each day has to be taken into account. If one day it is at YES it is registered, if it is t NO it is not registered.


Setting Time window for average(min.) Historical register interval (min.) Calendar mask Mask disables Register start time

Min. 1 1

Max. 15 1,440

Step 1 1

Notes

Monday to Sunday YES/NO YES/NO 0

24

1


144


Register end time

0

24

1

7.5 STATISTICAL DATA 124B

The same information can be obtained by keyboard / display or through PC (screen "STATISTICAL DATA"):

 Automatic reclosing counters  First reclosing  Second

"

 Third

"

 Fourth

"

 Total  Breaker openings counter (by tripping or by manual opening).  kI2 sum (square kA interrupted by each breaker pole, squared)  Counter of the unit picks up (only in display). All these counters can be set to 0, and the kI2 sum set to the initial value programmed as setting. (the counter of the picks up is set at 0 with the recloser one.). Besides, through PC we can see counter breaker openings by trip or manual.

7.6 PROTECTION STATUS 125B

7.6.1 By keyboard / display 267B

It can be seen: 

Date and time of the relay.



Status of each of the digital inputs: open (A) or closed (C).

7.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console) 268B

On the "STATUS" screens, apart from the measurements already mentioned, it is possible to see: 

on the screen 1

 Date and time of the relay  Active table 

on the screen 2

 Protection units picked up at the present moment  Protection units tripped at the present moment 

on the screen 3

 Units tripped on the last trip  Command orders  Circuit breaker supervision status  Closing and trip circuit supervision status 

On screen 4


145

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS   Digital input, digital output and LED status. 

In screen 5

 Status of the active (by PLD) and disabled protection functions

7.7 OSCILLOGRAPH DATA RECORDER 126B

It has a capacity of 1,200 cycles, being programmable the number of cycles per perturbation, so, if, for example, 40 cycles/register are registered, there will be space for 30 registers. If 120 cycles/register is registered there will be space for 10 etc. the number of cycles previous to the pick up is also programmable between 1 and 100. On each record there are up to 9 analogical channels registered, 1 analogue frequency channel and up to 32 digital channels and up to 32 digital channels which can be chosen from a list selected from the available signals. Each record can be started by a rising slope of each of the digital signals considered by the protection model. The analogical channels are sent to the console multiplied by the transformation ratio so that they appear on primary values. The number of samples per analogical channel cycle is 32. By means of the analogue frequency channel, the corresponding frequency value is stored for each sample collected in the disturbance recorder, accurate to 2 decimal points.


146

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

8. OTHER FUNCTIONS Time setting and synchronization

8.1 TIME SETTING 127B

It can be done from the keyboard/display (within "Change settings") or from the Protection Console (Screen 1 "STATUS").

8.1.1 Synchronization 269B

There is an input for synchronization demodulated by IRIGhe time assignation to events between connected devices to be synchronized with a 1 ms margin. The IRIG-B time code is a mesh generated once a second. The code used is B 003, in which the mesh is constituted by a pulse train with TTL levels of variable widths. The time it shows corresponds to PPS (Pulse per second) coinciding with the Mesh Reference Mark of the mesh. On integrated control systems (SIPC) the unit is synchronized periodically (every minute) by the UCS. In this case there will be no use in making a time change by keyboard or Protection console, as this will be soon eliminated by the UCS.

8.2 CONTROL MESSAGES 128B

The protection responds to the following control messages

 Measurements, changes and counters request  Digital status request  Clock synchronization  Counter freezing  Statistical data initialization commands  Commands for relays and specified digital signals  Statistical data request The measures transmitted are the ones programmed among the following. The order in which they are sent is also programmable. The programming is done through the Protection console SIPCON/P. Note.- the phase current values with sign, which is the same one to that of the active power corresponding to that phase.

No.Bytes 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Format Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word

Specification Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome

Vn * Vn * Vn * Vn *

1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2

3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2

Vn * 1,2

Data VA module VB module VC module VAVERAGE module VAB module (Compound voltage) VBC module (Compound voltage) VCA module (Compound voltage) VCAVERAGE module (Compound voltage) VN module (neutral)


147

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

No.Bytes 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Format Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word

Specification Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome

2

Word

Procome

286 (source 125/220 Vdc) 62,4 (source 24/48 Vdc)

Vdc measurement

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word

Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome

4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6

Total number of openings 52 Recloser total counter Counter 1st recloser Counter 2nd recloser Counter 3rd recloser Counter 4th recloser Number of openings 52 per trip P (Active Power) phase A P (Active Power) phase B P (Active Power) phase C Q (Reactive Power) phase A Q (Reactive Power) phase B Q (Reactive Power) phase C P (Maximum Active Power) Q (Maximum Reactive Power) P Maximum phase A P Maximum phase B

Vn * 1,2 6 (A) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 70 70 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 6 6 Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2 100 (%) 100 (º)

Data V module Synchrocheck IA module IB module IC module IAVERAGE module IN module ISN module (sensitive) INA module (isolated) Current maximeter P (Active power) Q (Reactive power) S (Apparent power) Frequency Frequency Synchrocheck Phase A power factor Phase B power factor Phase C power factor Average power factor Distortion in IA Distortion in IB Distortion in IC Distortion in VA Distortion in VB Distortion in VC Average distortion in current Average distortion in voltage Zero sequence current Positive sequence current Negative sequence current Zero sequence voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Distance to fault Unit temperature


148

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

No.Bytes 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Format Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word

Specification Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome Procome

Vn * 1,2 * Vn * 1,2 * Vn * 1,2 * Vn * 1,2 * 200 200 200 200 10 4095 4095 4095

Data P Maximum phase C Q Maximum phase A Q Maximum phase B Q Maximum phase C I last fault phase A I last fault phase B I last fault phase C I last fault phase neutral I last fault sensitive neutral kI2 sum pole A kI2 sum pole B kI2 sum pole C

6 6 6 6

The background scale indicated corresponds to a count number of 4095. any Protocol, it can be programmed which signals are going to be sent and with which number. There is a 400-register change queue available. From all these registers, the signal changes to be sent through Procome protocol will be taken out. Each register contains the digital signals that have changed in the same millisecond. That is, if 10 digital signals change their state in the same millisecond, this change would only occupy one register in the queue, while when they are sent through communications, they would turn into 10 independent changes. So, if each register has only changed one signal, the queue would have the last 400 digital changes produced in the unit, but this number is considerably incremented if the change of more than one signal occurs in the same milliseconds, which is very usual. The statistical data initialisation commands make possible setting 0 the reclosing counters, the energy counters, the maximeter and setting the initial value programmed as sum kI2. The command orders in any Protocol can be programmed among the following ones:

Action Open breaker Close breaker Activate any relay from 1 to 14(pulse) Set recloser out of Set recloser in service Table 1 activation Table 2 activation Table 3 activation Table 4 activation Table 5 activation Table 6 activation Set in LOCAL Set in TELECOMMAND Phase instantaneous locking Phase instantaneous unlocking Neutral instantaneous locking Neutral instantaneous unlocking Phase time locking Phase time unlocking Neutral time locking Neutral time unlocking Sens. Neutral inst locking

ISC programable programable programmable programmable programable programable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable

Default (in Procome) 22 24 1 to 14 28 26 60 61 62 63 64 65 not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed


149

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Action Sens. Neutral inst unlocking Sens. Neutral time locking Sens. Neutral time unlocking Phase inst. locking H1 (high level) Phase inst. unlocking H1 (high level) Neutral inst. locking H1 (high level) Neutral instant. unlocking H1 (high level) Phase instant. locking H2 (2nd group) Phase instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) Neutral instant. locking H2 (2nd group) Neutral instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) Phase time locking H2 (2nd group) Phase time unlocking H2 (2nd group) Neutral time locking H2 (2nd group) Neutral time unlocking H2 (2nd group) Sens. Neutral instant. locking H2 (2nd group) Sens. Neutral instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) Isolate neutral locking. Isolate neutral unlocking Directionality locking Directionality unlocking. Time unbalance locking Time unbalance unlocking Instantaneous unbalance locking Instantaneous unbalance unlocking Open Broken locking Open Broken unlocking Breaker failure locking Breaker failure unlocking Phase locking zone 2 Phase unlocking zone 2 Phase locking zone 3 Phase unlocking zone 3 Neutral locking zone 2 Neutral unlocking zone 2 Neutral locking zone 3 Neutral unlocking zone 3 Neutral locking Neutral unlocking Sen. Neutral locking Sen. Neutral unlocking Phase locking Phase unlocking Open counter initialize Recloser initialize Trip counter open init Power max. init Recloser locking. Recloser unlocking. Voltage locking Voltage unlocking Freq. recloser locking Freq. recloser unlocking Min. freq locking Min. freq unlocking Max. freq locking Max. freq unlocking Df/dt locking Df/dt unlocking Pole A KI2 sum init. Pole B KI2 sum init.

ISC programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable

Default (in Procome) not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed


150

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Action Pole C KI2 sum init. Output 1 permanent act Output 2 permanent act Output 3 permanent act Output 4 permanent act Output 5 permanent act Output 6 permanent act Output 7 permanent act Output 8 permanent act Output 9 permanent act Output 10 permanent act Output 11 permanent act Output 12 permanent act Output 13 permanent act Output 14 permanent act Deactivate output 1 Deactivate output 2 Deactivate output 3 Deactivate output 4 Deactivate output 5 Deactivate output 6 Deactivate output 7 Deactivate output 8 Deactivate output 9 Deactivate output 10 Deactivate output 11 Deactivate output 12 Deactivate output 13 Deactivate output 14 Act. output 1 Local Console Act. output 2 Local Console Act. Output 3 Local Console Act. output 4 Local Console Act. output 5 Local Console Act. output 6 Local Console Act. output 7 Local Console Act. output 8 Local Console Act. output 9 Local Console Act. output 10 Local Console Act. output 11 Local Console Act. output 12 Local Console Act. output 13 Local Console Act. output 14 Local Console 52 breaker open Console Local 52 breaker close Console Local Recloser on duty Console Local Recloser FS Console Local Set TELEMANDO Console Local Cold load locking Cold load unlocking Sequence coord. locking Sequence coord. Unlocking Instantaneous locking Instantaneous unlocking Instant. Gr. and Sens. Grn. Locking Instant. Gr. and Sens. Grn. unlocking Protection function locking Protection function unlocking Command order 1 Command order 2 Command order 3

ISC Programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable

Default (in Procome) not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed


151

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Action Command order 4 Command order 5 Command order 6 Command order 7 Enabling of digital inputs disabled by intermittence Counters zero reset Positive ActiveEnergy Counter zero reset Negative ActiveEnergy Counter zero reset Positive ReactiveEnergy Counter zero reset Negative ReactiveEnergy Counter zero reset

ISC

Default (in Procome)

programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable

non-programmable non-programmable non-programmable non-programmable non-programmable non-programmable

Note.- So that the locking/unlocking commands to be effective, they must be enabled by setting (see Unit Configuration Enabling Pushbuttons and Locking by commands).

By counters request it will be respond with the following information: Nº Bytes 4 4 4 4

Format Long Long Long Long

Specification Absolute value Absolute value Absolute value Absolute value

Data Positive active energy counter (W+) Negative active energy counter (W-) Positive reactive energy counter (VAR+) Negative reactive energy counter (VAR-)

The absolute value sent are "impulses", whose correspondence with kWh and kVARh is established in the settings "Measuring factors", in the PC on the same screen of General settings, and by keyboard/display in "Program table 0" - "Correction factor".

8.3 LOCAL/REMOTE COMMAND 129B

The unit can be in local or remote (Tele-control) mode. The transition from the one to the other can be made through the push-button L/R on the front panel (pressed at the same l input, if there is one programmed for that purpose. The operation is alternative, this means that each time the input is pressed or activated (rising slope) the status is changed. e only operative on the Local mode. They have to be The control commands described in the previous section are only operative on the Remote mode, except the last ones, which The opening and closing commands by digital input (if they are programmed) are as much operative on the Local mode as on the Remote (to make possible the operation from contacts activated by a remote station). In short:

Unit in LOCAL status:  It admits commands by Digital Input.  It admits commands from front plate pushbuttons (if enabled by settings)  It admits output activation commands, breaker activation, ES/FS recloser, local Console

 It does not admit the remaining commands  It admits the CHANGE command to REMOTE

Unit in REMOTE status:  It admits commands by Digital Input.


152

OTHER FUNCTIONS   It does not admit commands from front plate pushbuttons  It  It admits the remaining commands  It admits the CHANGE command to LOCAL

Command pushbuttons located in the front of relay

8.4 COMMANDS BY KEYBOARD AND FRONT PUSHBUTTONS 130B

executed from the keyboards and from the pushbuttons of the unit front part. Programming which command is executed with each key/pushbutton is carried out through the Console, in the screen In the first row, there appear all the keys that can be used; with ON and OFF indications, as they work as a two-state, and when changing the state, the programmed command is executed. The pushbuttons execute the programmedcommand when pushing them for more than 2 seconds(the difference with the command

Several commands can be programmed for a single key, and they are sequentially executed (up downwards).

(Command Configuration screen), the unit is set in Local, and the rest of the functional pushbuttons can be executed.

8.5 POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION 13B

It is only available in those models with this option. This function detects the voltage drop of the power supply under the level that guarantees the correct displaying of the digital input states. This function is enabled by setting (configuration settings), but the limits for the detection are fixed according to the selection of the power supply (see model coding): Power supply 125/220 Vdc 24/48 Vdc

Detection level 87 V 17 V

The agony signal is activated when the power supply is below the detection level corresponding to the supply type. In such a situation the protection:

 is set out of service (so it does no execute the protection functions or the logicals. It does neither execute the commands that cause the relay activation)

 generates hardware error and low supply signals  marks as invalid the logic signals and digital inputs.  it does execute the commands such as function locking/unlocking, table changing etc.


153

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

8.6 EXTERNAL SUPPLY SUPERVISION 132B

This function checks that the external power supply voltage is within the set margin. It generates two signals:

 Power supply higher than the maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the set maximum threshold.  Power supply lower than the minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is lower than the set maximum threshold. The settings for this function are the following ones: Setting Enable Minimum threshold (V) Maximum threshold (V)

Minimum

Maximum

Step

20 24

220 280

1 1

Remarks YES/NO

8.7 TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION 13B

This function checks that the unit temperature d is within the set margin. It generates two signals:

 Temperature higher than the maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set maximum threshold.  Temperature lower than the minimum threshold. If the temperature is lower than the set maximum threshold. The settings for this function the following ones: Setting Enable Minimum threshold (º) Maximum threshold (º)

Minimum

Maximum

Step

-40 50

0 100

1 1

Remarks YES/NO

8.8 TEST MODE 134B

In order to carry out this test, the Procome signal and order simulator program will have to be executed and when executing it, and Procome counters can be simulated. Digital signals: when the test mode starts, the signals sent to telecommand and to the simulator are real. Through this program the digital signal values can be changed, while being in Test Mode only these factitious changes will be sent to Telecommand, and not the real changes in these signals. When leaving the test mode, the unit sends all the changes between the last state of the factitious digital signals and real signals of the unit to the Telecommand. Orders: Being the unit in Test Mode, when it receives orders from the Telecommand, it does not execute them, but it sends them to the simulator program, which has to recognise them. Measurements and counters: when entering in Test Mode, the measurements and counters sent to telecommand and to the simulator are the last real ones. This value is frozen and it can be only changed through the simulator program. When leaving the test mode, the unit sends all the real measurements and counters to the Telecommand. When leaving the simulator program, the unit leaves the Test Mode and the unit descriptive text can be seen in the display.


154

OPERATION MODE 

9. OPERATION MODE 9.1 THROUGH KEYBOARD/DISPLAY 135B

9.1.1 Introduction 270B

The purpose of the keyboard/display is the local introduction to the unit of settings and commands, through push-buttons, and the view of settings, measures and faults through display.

9.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit 271B

9.1.2.1 Normal push-buttons They are 15, signalized as

,

INTRO, ESC. (dot) and the numbers from 0 to 9.

9.1.2.2 Push-

"

It is the only push-button accessible with the protection cover on. By successive pushing the following information starts to appear 

Digital inputs status



Phase A current (primary A)



Phase B current



Phase C current



VAB voltage (primary kV)



VBC voltage



VCA voltage



Active power (MW)



Reactive power (MVAR)



Power factor



Information on the last fault

 Phases involved  Fault current in phase A  Fault current in phase B  Fault current in phase C  Fault current in neutral  Fault start date and time  Fault end date and time  Fault acknowledgement (press 2 sec. and release). Turn the tripping LEDs off.


155

OPERATION MODE 

9.1.2.3 Push-button R

was pressed (given that the setting "Recloser enable" corresponding to the active chart is set to "YES"). If the recloser was out of service the R key pressing followed by Intro enables it and disables it if it was already enabled. 

Display



It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.



LEDs



They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the statuses indicated in the section "Programming of LEDs".

9.1.2.4 Display It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.

9.1.2.5 LEDs They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the statuses indicated in the section "Programming of LEDs.

9.1.3 Operating mode 27B

9.1.3.1 General description element of the immediately precedent level. the last position, the first will return again. Generally, when a menu is run, the first line of the display shows the active function, which can be entered by pressing INTRO, and in this way we can reach the next menu level (if there is any), specific for that function. The menu tree to visualize or change settings within each group is hierarchical. If at resting status (title) we press INTRO, we will reach the first element of the following menu: SEE TIME SEE ACTIVE TABLE INPUTS MEASUREMENTS STATISTICAL DATA LAST FAULTS SEE SETTINGS CHANGE SETTINGS

The complete hierarchy of menus and submenus is pictured in the Appendix I.


156

OPERATION MODE 

9.1.3.2 Using the keyboard/display 9.1.3.2.1 See settings and magnitudes menus are circular. state does not change. reached the actual status. In the final menus, which are the ones with no submenus (settings), the group setting name, selected by keyboard, appears on the first line and on the second line its current value.

9.1.3.2.2 Change settings Up to the last level of the menus everything works in the same way as by See settings and magnitudes (same functions for same keys). To access to this function it is necessary to press the key " ". Through this all settings and initializations are made accessible, except the ones contained in the section "Protection definition". The key " " is necessary to get access to these. In the last level of the menus, where the name of the settings we want to change appear, the keyboard operation is different from the one we have explained until now. When entering into each group to change the settings which are included (final menu), the keyboard operation will be as it follows: 1) Numerical settings. The first line of the display shows the name of the selected setting followed by its current value. The line 2 shows the text NEW followed by the current setting range, which can be changed by using the numerical keyboard. To change the setting range we use the numerical keyboard, along with the DOT. The new range has to be literally entered, this means that if we wish to enter the new value of 3.2, the key 3 will have to be pressed, setting, a warning message will be shown on the line 2 indicating INVALID VALUE. A valid value will have to be entered to be able t within the final menu takes us to the menu element which we came from, without making effective the changes we have made until the moment of pressing. The changes are m e menu above (see menus chart). By pressing 2) Non numerical settings. There are settings such as the enabling settings,where it must be chosen between YES or NO, ON and OFF. There are also calendar masks which can be enabled every other day, there are time delayed curves with a certain name, inputs and outputs configurations etc. where is more clear to select them by their name rather than by introducing their numerical value. Whenever possible and clear, on the line 1 the name of the setting will appear along with a text indicating the actual value. On the second line it will gradually appear the possible values to choose for this setting, if we use the keyboard properly. We use of each of them; we do it this way because there are many configurations to choose from and this makes it quicker. validate the value chosen on the line 2. This means, in groups with an only element, the validate option, present in the different groups with more than one element, will not appear. In these cases, there is no need to


157

OPERATION MODE 

change. In the case of input/output/led i to configuring input/outputs/led i+1. The same occurs with the inputs mask and the calendar mask which runs trough the days of the week by each pr

actual status. Initializations and special settings. Within the first submenu of "Change settings" we find the option: "INITIALIZE COUNT, MAXIM, kI2" which requires a particular explanation. By pressing "INTRO" in "INITIALIZE" we come to: g counters and the trip counters are set to 0, and it goes on to the next question; if we do not want to set them to 0 we press " " or "ESC". "MAXIMETER=0?" if pressing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0. "SUM KI2=INIT?" if pressing INTRO the accumulator takes the setting value corresponding to the table indicated by the active table.

"RESET QUEUES?"; if pressing "INTRO" all queues of events, faults, historic and oscillograph data records.

Change of active table. In the first level of "CHANGE SETTINGS", pressing "INTRO" when by "ACTIVATE TABLE" appears "TABLE 1"; with the arrows and and "TABLE 4". When the aimed one is reached, press "INTRO" to activate it.

Display view of the last 10 faults When entering the LAST FAULTS menu there are 10 submenus with the following text: FAULT No N DATA

TIME

Fault 1 is the newest and 10 the oldest. Entering any of them by pushing INTRO the corresponding fault data can be seen. When entering fault 1 the fault can be recognized (switch off leds, etc). But not in the rest of the faults. When pushing ESC you can go back to the previous level.

Display view of the last fault When a trip occurs, the fault report start appears on the display. So if pushing INTRO you can dispose all the data. If the fault is recognized or ESC is pushed you go to the first screen with the relay description.


158

OPERATION MODE 

9.2 THROUGH THE PC 136B

The protection relays PL300 can be monitored by PC. In this way, it is possible to have access to a view of the system measures and settings and their programming. The PC program, Protection console developed by Ingeteam Power Technology SA is named SIPCON/P.


159

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 

10. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 10.1 RECEPTION AND STORAGE 137B

The protections are supplied in special packing material for transport. Upon reception, they should be checked for any signs of external damage caused during transport; if so the transport firm and manufacturer should be contacted. The material received should also be checked to see if it coincides with the order number. If the protection is not going to be used immediately, it should be stored in its original packaging and in a dry and dirt free place. The units transport must be made in its original packaging.

10.2 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 138B

The protection connecting procedure should be carried out in accordance with the enclosed external connection diagram. It is a general diagram; the programming of inputs and outputs should be taken into consideration in each specific case.

Power supply The polarity is indifferent.

Earth connection It is important for the earth connection to be correctly connected, in order for the protection disturbance rejection devices it incorporates to operate properly. The connection should be as short as possible (less than 25 cm.) using multiwired cable with a 4 mm2 cross-section.

RS232 cable connections to be used between the PC and the PL300 unit  Case 1: a 25 pin PC output connector PL300 side

PC side

male 9 pin socket

female 25 pin socket

RxD

2

2

TxD

TxD

3

3

RxD

GND

5

7

GND

DSR

6

20 DTR

RTS

7

8

CD

CTS

8

5

CTS

CD

1

4

RTS

6

DSR

DTR

4


160

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 

 Case 2: a 9 pin PC output connector PL300 side

PC side

male 9 pin socket

female 9 pin socket

RxD

2

3

TxD

TxD

3

2

RxD

GND

5

5

GND

DSR

6

4

DTR

RTS

7

1

CD

CTS

8

8

CTS

CD

1

7

RTS

6

DSR

DTR

4

10.3 UNIT ADDRESSING 139B

10.4 COMMISSIONING 140B

The PL300 protections are received with the default settings stipulated in the factory. Before commissioning they must be set, by means of the keyboard/display and/or PC, with the correct values for the application, following the setting procedures. The protection has been checked at the factory in order to guarantee its accuracy in all of the setting points of the different parameters. However, it is convenient to test some points during reception and commissioning, in order to ensure it is totally in proper operating condition. Once the line is connected the real measurements the relay is carrying out can be displayed, thus enabling you to check for proper connection and operation.


161

KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY

APPENDIX I. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY In the following pages we enclose a table which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and settings which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the keyboard, in order to easily find the settings to be changed. The structure is generic for the whole family of PL300, it means, it does not correspond to a certain model. In each model the settings and measurements corresponding to its available functions will only appear. DATE/TIME (see)

Units date and time are displayed.

SEE ACTIVE TABLE

Present active table

INPUTS

INPUTS STATUS

Status of inputs 1 to 3

(4 to 9)


(10 to 15)


(16, 17)

Status of inputs 16 and 17

MEASUREMENTS

See page 4

STATISTICAL DATA

See page 5

LAST FAULT

See page 5

SETPOINTS (see)

See page 7

SETPOINTS (change)

See page 27

MEASUREMENTS

SECONDARY MEAS.

CURRENTS

PHASE A CUR. (A)

Phase A current.

PHASE B CUR.(A)

Phase B current

PHASE C CUR.(A)

Phase C current

GND CUR. (A)

Ground current

SENS. NEU. CUR.(A)

Sensitive ground current

ISOL. GND CUR.(A)

Ground isolated current

SHIFT VOLT-CURR

Shift between V0 and I0 in the isolated ground

REVERSE COMP. (A)

Ground polarization current

VA VOLTAGE (V)

Phase A voltage

VB VOLTAGE (V)

Phase B voltage

VC VOLTAGE (V)

Phase C voltage

VN VOLTAGE (V)

Ground voltage

SYNCHRO. V

B Phase voltage for syncrocheck (Transf.T9)

REVERSE COMP (%)

% of the reverse component (I2/I1)

FREQ. (HZ)

Frequency measurement.

SYNCHRO.FRQ.(HZ)

B Phase frequency for syncrocheck (Transf.T9)

V1 (V) --- V2(V)

Voltages in both sides of the breaker

F1 (HZ) --- F2 (HZ)

Frequencies in both sides of the breaker

ANGLE DIFFERENCE

Angle difference in both sides of the breaker

MAXIMETER

CURRENT (A)

Maximum average current in an interval t

CURRENTS

PHASE A CUR.(A)

Phase A current.

PHASE B CUR.(A)

Phase B current.

PHASE C CUR.(A)

Phase C current.

GND CUR.(A)

Ground current.

SENS. NEU CUR.(A)

Sensitive ground current

ISOL.GND CUR(A)

Isolated ground current

VA VOLTAGE (KV)

Phase A voltage

VB VOLTAGE(KV)

Phase B voltage

VC VOLTAGE (KV)

Phase C voltage

AVERAGE VOLTAGE (KV)

Average voltage of three phases

V.COMP. VAB (KV) V.COMP. VBC (KV)

Compound voltage between phases A and B Compound Compound voltage between phases _B and C

V.COMP. VCA (KV)

Compound voltage between phases _C and A

V.COMP AVERAGE (KV)

Average compound voltage of three phases

GRND VOLT. (KV)

Ground voltage

VOLTAGES

FREQUENCY

SYNCROCHECK

PRIMARY MEAS.

VOLTAGES

FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY (HZ)


162


MEASUREMENTS

PRIMARY MEAS.

POWER

ENERGY

ACTIVE PWER (MW)

Active power

REACTIV P.(MVAR)

Reactive power

APPARENT POW. (MVA)

Apparent power

POWER FACTOR

Power factor (Average Cosine)

ACT POWER A (MW)

Phase A active power

ACT POWER B (MW)

Phase B active power

ACT POWER C (MW)

Phase C active power

REACT P A (MVAR)

Phase A reactive power

REACT P B (MVAR)

Phase B reactive power

REACT P C.(MVAR)

Phase C reactive power

ACT ENER+ (Imp)

Positive active energy

ACT ENER-(Imp)

Negative active energy

REACT ENER + (Imp)

Positive reactive energy

REACT ENER-(Imp) DISTORTION

CURR DISTORT.

VOLTAGE DISTORT.

MAXIMETERS

TEMPERATURE (ºC)

STATISTICAL DATA

IA current distortion

DISTORTION IB (%)

IB current distortion

DISTORTION IC (%)

IC current distortion

DISTORTION VA (%)

VA voltage distortion

DISTORTION VB (%)

VB voltage distortion

DISTORTION VC (%)

VC voltage distortion

CURRENT (A)

Maximum of the interval average current

ACTI POWER (MW)

Maximum of the three-phase active power

REACT POW(MVAR)

Maximum of the three-phase active power

ACT POW A (MW)

Maximum of phase A active power

ACT POW B (MW)

Maximum of phase B active power

ACT POW C (MW)

Maximum of phase C active power

REACT POW A (MVAR)

Maximum of phase A reactive power

REACT POW B.(MVAR)

Maximum of phase B reactive power

REACT POW C.(MVAR)

Maximum of phase C reactive power

TEMP. (ºC)

Unit temperature

TOTAL RECLOSURES

Total number of reclosures.

FIRST RECLOSURES

Number of first reclosures.

SECOND RECLOS.

Number of second reclosures.

THIRD RECLOS.

Number of third reclosures.

FOURTH RECLOS.

Number of fourth reclosures.

TOTAL OPENINGS

Total number of trips given by the protection.

SIGMA K12 PHASE A

KI2 sum for maintenance, phase A

SIGMA K12 PHASE B

KI2 sum for maintenance, phase B

SIGMA K12 PHASE C

KI2 sum for maintenance, phase C

START COUNTER

Counter of the unit picks up

TEMPERATU Acknow LAST FAULTS

Negative reactive energy DISTORTION IA (%)

FAULT N.

Set the thermal image at 0 LAST FAU.PH.

Phase/s involved in the last fault.

FAULT CUR. PH. A

Phase A current when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT CUR. PH. B

Phase B current when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT CUR. PH. C.

Phase C current when the fault occurred (S).).

FAULT CURR.GND.

Ground current when the fault occurred (S).

FAU. CURR. SENS. N.

Sensitive ground current when the fault occurred (S).

FAU. CURR. ISO.N

Isolated ground current when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT V/I SHIFT

Shift between V0 and I0 in the isolated ground, in the fault

FAULT VOLT. PH. A

Phase A voltage when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT VOLT. PH. B

Phase B voltage when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT VOLT PH. C

Phase C voltage when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT VOLT. GND.

Ground voltage when the fault occurred (S).

FAULT DISTANCE

(When there is fault locator)

START DATE/TIME.

Fault start date and time.

END DATE/TIME

Fault end date and time.


163


LED Reset

SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

CURRENT PROT.

Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.

PHASE TOC

ENABLE

Phase timing

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL ACCELERATION ENABLE BLOCKING CONDIT. GND TOC

ENABLE

Ground timing

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING. COND SENSITIVE GND. TOC

ENABLE

Sensitive ground timing

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING. COND PHASE IOC

ENABLE

Phases instantaneous (low level)

PICK UP FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENABLE SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL FIXED TIME SPECIAL FUNC. TIME LOCKING. COND GND IOC

ENABLE

Ground instantaneous (low level)

PICKUP FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENABLE SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL FIXED TIME SPECIAL FUNC. TIME LOCKING. COND SENSITIVE GND. IOC

ENABLE

Sensitive ground instantaneous

PICKUP FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENABLE SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL FIXED TIME SPECIAL FUNC. TIME LOCKING. COND IOC HIGH 1

PHASE IOC HIGH 1

ENABLE PICKUP FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND.

GND IOC HIGH 1

ENABLE PICKUP FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND.

PHASES TOC,HIGH2

ENABLE TOC

2nd group of settings/timed phases

PICK UP


164


CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

CURRENT PROT.

UNDERC. 2 LEVELS

ENABLE PICK UP LEVEL 1 FIXED T. LEVEL 1 PICK UP LEVEL 2 FIXED T. LEVEL 2 BLOCKING CONDIT.

PHASES TOC,HIGH2

TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING. COND

GROUND TOC, HIGH2

ENABLE TOC

2nd group of settings/timed ground

PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING. COND

SENS NEU DIR./N

GROUND TYPE

Trafo/Calculated

SENSITIVE GND

SENS. N. DIR.TYPE P.MINIMUM ANGLE I.MINIMUM

GROUND

GND. DIR.TYPE P.MINIMUM GND. ANG. I.MINIMUM

ANGLE GND

DIREC. CRIT. NEU. AMPLIT.

SENS N.DIR PROT.

CURR. UNBAL. TOC

VN MINIMUM THESHOLD

VN THRESHOLD

SENS. N. DIR TYPE

See sen. n. directional type.

MINIMUM POWER

See sens n direct. min power.(wat)

CHARACT. ANGLE

See sens n direct charact. angle

MINIMUM CURRENT

See sens n direct. min cur(cos/sen)

ENABLE

Current unbalance instantaneous

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND. CURR. UNBAL. IOC

ENABLE

Current unbalance instantaneous

PICKUP TIME INDEX LOCKING CONDIT BROKEN CONDUCTOR

ENABLE

Broken conductor

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND. ISOLATED GROUND

ENABLE ISOL GRND

Isolated ground

TORQUE CONTROL LOW CURRENT HIGH CURRENT LOW VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE TIME 1st TRIP SWITCH TO INST. LOCKING COND. PHASES IOC,ZONE2

ENABLE INSTANTAN

Teleprotection. Zone 2. Phases

PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME PHASES IOC,ZONE3

ENABLE INSTANTAN



165


PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME GROUND IOC,ZONE2

ENABLE INSTANTAN

Teleprotection. Zone 2. Ground

PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME GROUND IOC,ZONE3

ENABLE INSTANTAN


PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME CANCEL. TOC

CANCEL PHASE TIMING

Cancel timing

CANCEL GND TIMING CANCEL UNBALANCE TIMING GND.TOC.LIMITAT.

LIMIT CURRENT

See ground limit current

TOC BLOCK. PHS.TOC.LIMITAT. 2ND HARMON.RESTRAINT

TOC BLOCK.

2ND HARMON..PH. 2ND HARMON.GND THRESHOLD I2f / If (%) PHASE MIN. CUR. GND. MIN. CUR. ISOLATED GROUND

PROTE.FNC.BLQ.MC

ENABLE ISOL GRND

Isolated ground

MODULE ENABLE

Manual closing prot. funct locking

MODULE CONST

(it can be only used in EH3211)

ANGLE ENABLE ANGLE (DGR) FIELD LOSS

FIELD GENERALS

ENABLE .MIN VOT. PICKUP DIRECT. ANGLE LOCKING CONDITION

MHO 1 ZONE

OFFSET (OHM) DIAMETER (OHM) UNDERVOLT. SURVEIL. ALARM TIMING TRIP TIMING

MHO 2 ZONE


VOLTAGE PROT.

OVERVOLTAGE TOV

ENABLE

Time overvoltage

PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME LOCKING COND. OVERVOLTAGE IOV

ENABLE INSTANTAN

Instantaneous overvoltage

PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME LOCKING COND. UNDERVOLTAGE TUV

ENABLE TIME PROT

Time undervoltage

PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME LOCKING COND. UNDERVOLTAGE IUV

ENABLE

Instantaneous undervoltage

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING. COND


166


GND VOLTAGE

ENABLE

Ground overvoltage

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP FIXED TIME LOCKING COND. VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

ENABLE

Voltage unbalance

TIMED PICKUP TIMED.VOLT.UNBAL. SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

VOLTAGE PROT.

VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

LOCKING COND.

PHASE VOLT. REVERS.

ENABLE

Reverse of phases voltages

TEMP.NEGAT.SEQU. LOCKING. COND POWER PROTECTION

POWER NOMINAL INST. MINIMUM. POWER

5A/1A ENABLE

Minimum power

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. POW. HI-SET

ENABLE

Maximum power, high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. POW. LO-SET

ENABLE

Maximum power, low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REV. POW. HI-SET

ENABLE

Active power reverse high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REV. POW. LO-SET

ENABLE

Active power reverse low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REAC.REV.POW.HI

ENABLE

Reactive power rev. high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REAC.REV.POW.LOW

ENABLE

Reactive power rev. low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. UNDER APPARENT

ENABLE

Minimum apparent power

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. OVER APPARENT HI

ENABLE

Maximum apparent power high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. OVER APPARENT LO

ENABLE

Minimum apparent power low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING. COND FREQUENCY PROT.

HIGH/LOW FREQUEN

STEP FREQUENCE 1

ENABLE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY (Hz) TRIP TIME


167


FREQUENCY TYPE STEP FREQUENCE 2

ENABLE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY (Hz) TRIP TIME FREQUENCY TYPE

STEP FREQUENCE 3


STEP FREQUENCE 4

ENABLE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY (Hz)

SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

FREQUENCY PROT.

HIGH/LOW FREQUEN

STEP FREQUENCE 4

TRIP TIME FREQUENCY TYPE

STEP FREQUENCE 5


STEP FREQUENCE 5


LOCKING COND. MIN.VOLTAGE SPV.

MIN.VOLTAGE SPV.

Minimum voltage supervision

PICKUP CYCLES No. P.CYCL. DF/DT No. FREQUENCY GRAD.

ENABL.GRAD.(d81) SPV.MIN.CURRENT SPV.FREQ. STEP 1 FREQ.GRAD.STEP 1 FIXED TIM.STEP 1 TPO. FIJO ESC. 1 SPV.FREQ. STEP 2 FREQ.GRAD.STEP 2 FIXED TIM.STEP 2 SPV.FREQ. STEP 3 FREQ. DIFF STEP 3 FIXED TIM. STEP 3 SPV.FREQ. STEP 4 FREQ. DIFF STEP 4 FIXED TIM. STEP 4 LOCKING CONDITION

SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

SYNCROCHECK

ENAB. SYNCROCHECK UNDERVOLT CONDIT

NO A and NO in B

Undervoltage conditions

NO A and YES in B YES A and NO in B ENAB.VOLTAGE DIF ENAB.ANGLE DIF ENAB.FREQUEN DIF PICKUP VOLT DIF PICKUP ANGLE DIF PICKUP FREQU DIF MINIM. VOLTAGE A MINIM. VOLTAGE B CLOSE COND. TIME LOCKING COND. THERMAL IMAGE

THERM.IMAG.PARAM

ENABLE HEATING CONSTANT REFRIG. CONSTANT ALARM THRESHOLD REPOSITION THRESHOLD LOCKING COND.

PICKUP CURRENT


168


SEE SEETINGS

SEE TABLE 1

RECLOSER

RECLOSER. IS/OOS

RECL. IN SERVICE

Recloser in service/out of service.

RECLOSER TIME

T. RECL. 1,PHASE

1st closure time for phase to phase faults.

T. RECL 1, GROUND

1st closure time for phase to earth faults.

T. RECL 2,PHASE

2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.

T. RECL 2,GROUND

2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.

T. RECL 3,PHASE

3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.

T. RECL 3,GROUND

3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.

T. RECL 4,PHASE

4th closure time for phase to phase faults.

T. RECL 4,GROUND

4th closure time for phase to earth faults.

Vref WAITING TIME

Voltage reference waiting time.

T.SEC. FAULTS

Reclaim time for faults.

T.SEC.FAULTS GND

Reclaim time for GND.

T.SEC. MAN CLOSING

Security time after manual closing.

CYCLE CONTROL

N OF CLOSURES

No. of closures allowed.

TRIP PERMISSION

DURING STANDBY

Trips allowed during the standby

AFTER CLOSURE 1

Trips allowed after first reclosure.

AFTER CLOSURE 2

Trips allowed after second reclosure.

AFTER CLOSURE 3

Trips allowed after third reclosure.

AFTER CLOSURE 4

Trips allowed after fourth reclosure.

AFTER MAN. CLOS.

Trips allowed after manual closure.

AFTER PHASE TIMED

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase toc.

AFTER NEUTR. TIMED

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to ground toc.

AFTER SEN. NEU. TIM

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to sensitive neutral toc.

AFTER PHASE INST.

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase ioc

AFTER PHASE INST.

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase ioc

AFTER GND. INST.

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to ground ioc.

AFTER ISOL. GND

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to isolated ground

AFTER BROKEN COND

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to broken conductor

AFTER EXT. ACT.

Allowed reclosures after external operation

AFTER PHAS H1 INST

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase high 1 instantaneous

AFTER PHAS H2 INST

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase high 2 instantaneous

AFTER PHAS H2 TIM

Allowed reclosures after tripping. due to phase high 2 timing.

AFTER GND H1 INST

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 1 ground instantaneous.

AFTER GND H2 INST

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2ground instantaneous.

AFTER GND H2 TIM

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2ground timing

AFTER SEN GND H2 INST

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2 sensitive neutral instantaneous.

AFTER SEN GND H2 TIM

Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2 sensitive neutral timing.

ENABLE

Sequence coordination

VARIOUS TIMES

RECLOSING PERMISS.

RECLOS.SEQ.COORD.COOR RECL.BLOCK.COND.

FREQUENCY RECLOS

ENABLE RECLOSER

Reclose after under frequency pickup

MIN. FREQ. COND. RECLOSE TIME SECURITY TIME LOCKING COND.

BREAKER MONITOR.

HISTORICAL

OPERATION LOGIC

EXC.NUM. OF TRIPS.

Excessive number of trips.

EXC.NUM.TRIPS WIND

Time for counting excessive number of trips

KI2 SUM ALARM

KI2 sum alarm for maintenance.

KI2 SUM INIT.

Initial KI2 sum(settings).

TRIP CIRC. MONIT. EN.

Trip circuit monitoring enable.

CLOSE CIRC. MONIT. EN

Close circuit monitoring enable.

CALACULATION TYPE

See calculation type of ki2 sum

WAITING TIME

See waiting time after trip

AVERAGE WINDOW

Time window for sample average calculation

RECORD INTERVAL

Historical record interval.

CALENDAR MASK

Calendar mask for the days of the week

START TIME

Daily record start time.

END TIME

Daily record end time.

TRIP LOCKING

Trip locking.

OPEN FAILURE TIMING

Open failure timing.


169


SEE SEETINGS

SETPOINTS (see)

SEE TABLE 1

OPERATION LOGIC

SEE TABLE 2

SAME AS TABLE 1

SEE TABLE 3

SAME AS TABLE 1

SEE TABLE 4

SAME AS TABLE 1

SEE TABLE 5

SAME AS TABLE 1

SEE TABLE 6

SAME AS TABLE 1

SEE TABLE 0

CONFIGURAT I/O.

CLOSE FAILURE TIMING

CONFIG. INPUTS

Close failure timing.

INPUTS1-INPUTS17

Configuration of the 17 inputs.

NO/NC SELECTION INPUTS ACTIV. TIME

Filter of inputs

LOGICAL SIGNALS

Program logical signals as inputs

LOG. SIGNALS NO/NC FLICKER SETTING

C.ACTIV.FLICKER C.REMOVE FLICKER T.CHECK.FLICKER

GENERALS

OUTPUTS

OUTPUT 1-OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT ACTIV. TIME

OUTPUTS ACTIV. TIME

LEDs

LED 1 to LED 8

RELAY IN SERVICE

VOLT. DETECTION PRESENCE

Configuration of the 8 programmable leds.(Function and type) Relay in service.

BREAKER NUM. TRANSF. RATIO

Configuration of the 14 outputs. (Function and type of output)

Breaker number. PHASE TRANSF. RATIO

Phase current transformation ratio

GND. TRANSF. RATIO

Ground current transformation ratio.

SENS NEU TR. RATIO

Sensitive ground transformation ratio

VOLT. TRANSF. RATIO

Voltage transf. Ratio

Rated Ph-Ph V

Voltage presence (only CR type)

NO-DET.THRES DETEC.THRESH SLACK SPRINGS

STRETCH TIME

RATED VOLTAGE VOLTAGE INPUT

COMMUNIC. CONFIG.

Spring slacks (only CR type ) Simple rated voltage

VOLTAGE TYPE

Simple / Compound

VOLT.MEASUR.

Phases in which are measured

IRIG-B FORMAT

B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)

SIDE A VOLT SYNC

Side A phase for synchronism

COM2 COMMUN. SELECT PORT COM1

Procome, DNP, MODBUS,101 LCU ADDRESS

Protections address.

BAUD RATE

Baud rate (bauds).

PARITY

Parity (even) yes or no.

STOP ITS

Number of stop bits.

CONTROL SIGNALS

None/RTS

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

(If Procome)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate (bauds).

PARITY


STOP BITS


CONTROL SIGNALS

None / RTS

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address for DNP communications

(If DNP)

MASTER ADDRESS

Master address for DNP communications

BAUD RATE

Baud rate for DNP communications

TYPE OF PARITY

Parity for DNP communications

STOP ITS

Stop bits for DNP communications

FIXED RTS

YES/NO

RTS AND CTS CTRL

RTS and CTS control for DNP communications

CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)

CTS waiting time for DNP communications

CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)

CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications

STABIL TIME . (csec)

Stabilization time for DNP communications

ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)

Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP

SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)

Synchronization time for DNP communications

LINK ACK.

Link acknowledge for DNP communications

AP. MESS BYTE N.

N. bytes of application messages for DNP

T.CHANGES

Changes sending time for DNP communications

T.FROZEN

Counter freezing time for DNP


170


SETPOINTS (see)

SETPOINTS (SEE)

SEE TABLE 0

SEE TABLE 0

COMMUNIC. CONFIG.

COMMUNIC. SETTINGS

STATUS SEND

Status sending for DNP communications

MEAS. BITS NUM.

Measurements format for DNP communications

COUNT. BITS NUM.

Counter format for DNP communications

NON REQUEST. MESS.

Non requested message sending for DNP

PREV.CONFLICT

Conflict prev. for DNP communications

PORT COM2

FIXED COL. TIME (csec)

Fixed conflict time for DNP communications

(If DNP)

VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)

Variable conflict time for DNP

T.RESEND

Non requested messages resend time for DNP

N.MAX.NO REQUEST.

Max. non requested messages number for DNP

SPECIAL

Special for DNP communications

MEASURES FORMAT

Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address

(If MODBUS)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate

PARITY YES/NO

Parity

RTS ACT. WAIT. TIME

Waiting time for RTS activation

CARRIER WAIT. TIME

Carrier waiting time

RTS DEACT. WAIT. T.

RTS deactivation waiting time

MEASUREM. FORMAT PORT COM2

GENERALS

(If 101)

Counts / value in the secondary / value in the primary LINK ADDRESS APPLIC. ADDRESS SWING BAUD RATE CHANNEL TYPE RTS AND CTS PARITY STOP BITS CTS ACT. WAIT. TIME CARRIER WAIT. TIME RTS ACTIV TIME RTS DEACTIV TIME ANSWER WAITING TIME TME BETWEEN TX RETRANS. NUMBER

ASDU FIELDS

APPLIC. ADDRE. LENGTH CAA LENGTH COT LENGTH IOA LENGTH

FORMATS

TIME FORMAT MEASUREMENT TIMING COUNTER TIMING

ADDRESSES

SP ADDRESS EV ADDRESS DP ADDRESS AVERAGEADDRESS TAP ADDRESS CON ADDRESS BIT ADDRESS OC ADDRESS OC0 ADDRESS OC1 ADDRESS OC2 ADDRESS TORQUE ADDRESS FULL ADDRESS HALF-FULL ADDRESS GPS ADDRESS SYNCHR. ADDRESS

OTHER PARAMETERS

% FULL % EMPTY


171


WORD EVENTS COOMAND MODE COMMAND INFORM. FREEZE AVER. TORQUE ADDRESS META. PROFILE GPS SETPOINTS (SEE)

SEE TABLE 0

COMMUNIC. SETTINGS

PORT COM2

OTHER PARAMETERS

(If 101)

TRANSMIS. FACTOR ASDU SIZE BIT SQ

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address

(If 103)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate

PARITY

Parity

STOP BITS

Number of stop bits

RTS ACT. WAIT. TIME


CARRIER WAIT. TIME


RTS DEACT. WAIT. T.


SENDING FORMAT

Compatible with VDEW/Extended

(If 103)

TCP/IP COM. SELEC PROTECTIONS

VOLTAGE CTRL. (51V)

NO / PROCOME HORIZONTAL COMMUNIC. CTRL. PARAM. (51V)

ENABLE

Control parameters for 51V

VOLTAGE CONTROL LOCKING CONDITION PHASE TIMED(51V)

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME

VOLTAGE CTRL (50V)

CTRL. PARAM. (50V)

ENABLE

Control parameters for 50V

VOLTAGE CONTROL LOCKING COND. PHASE INST. (50V)

PICK UP INSTANTAN INST. TIMING

FUSE FAILURE

ENABLE

Fuse failure

FUSE F.TRIP.TIME LOCKING COND. COLD LOAD PICKUP

PHASE TIMED

ENABLE

Cold Load Pickup

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING CONDITION GND TIMED

ENABLE PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING CONDITION

PHASE INSTANT.

ENABLE PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING CONDITION


172


SETPOINTS (SEE)

SEE TABLE 0

PROTECTIONS

COLD LOAD PICKUP

GND INSTANT.

ENABLE

Cold Load Pickup

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING CONDITION SEN. NEUTR. TIME

ENABLE PICK UP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME LOCKING COND.

SEN. GND INST

ENABLE PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND.

COLD LOAD PICKUP

ENABLE COLD LOAD DET. TIME COLD LOAD .ACT. TIM.

HIGH CURR. LOCKOUT

PHAS. HIGH CURRENT

ENABLE

High current locking

PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TRIP NUMBER LOCKING COND. NEU. HIGH CURRENT

ENABLE PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TRIP NUMBER LOCKING COND.

REGULATOR BLOCK.

ENAB.REGULA.BLCK

Regulator locking

REGULA.THRESHOLD LOCKING COND. DEFINE PROTECT

LANGUAGE TYPE

Spanish / English

FREQUENCY

50/60 Hz

PHASE ORDER

A-B-C / C-B-A

GND PARAMETER BUTTONS/LEDS

V0 calculated /V0 by transf. (measur.) ENABLE BUTTONS

FUNCT/ COMMAND/ NO

Enable command pusbuttons

EN.BLOC.CTRL

YES/NO (lock/unlock)

Enable locking commands by communicat.

BLOCK R KEY

YES/NO (lock/unlock))

BLOCK LEDS

YES/NO (lock/unlock)

POW.SUPPLY SUPERVI. TEMPERAT SUPERV.

YES/NO ENABLE

Agony level

YES/NO

MIN.ALARM. THRESH. MAX.ALARM. THRESH. EXTERNAL SUPPLY SUP.

ENABLE

YES/NO

MIN. ALARM. THRESH. MAX. ALARM. THRESH.


173


SETPOINTS (change)

CHANGE DATE/TIME

Insert KEY

ACTIVATE TABLE

ACTIVATE TABLE 1

Make table 1 active.

ACTIVATE TABLE 2


ACTIVATE TABLE 3


ACTIVATE TABLE 4


ACTIVATE TABLE 5


ACTIVATE TABLE 6 PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

Make table 6 active. CURRENT PROT.

PROG. PHASE TIMED

ENABLE PICKUP. CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL ACCEL. ENABLE LOCKING COND.

PROG.GND TIM.

ENABLE. PICKUP. CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND

PROG. SENS. NEU. TIM

ENABLE. PICKUP. CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND

PROG. PHASE INST.

INST. ENAB. PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENA. SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL DEFINITE TIME SPECIAL TIME FUNCTION LOCKING COND

PROG. GND INST.

ENABLE. INST. PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENA. SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL DEFINITE TIME SPECIAL TIME FUNCTION LOCKING COND

PROG.SENS GND IOC

ENABLE. INST. PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL ENA. SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL DEFINITE TIME SPECIAL TIME FUNCTION LOCKING COND

HIGH 1 INST.

HIGH 1 PHASE INST.

ENABLE HIGH 1 PICKUP HIGH 1 FIXED TIME HIGH1 TORQUE CONTROL HIGH 1 PHASE LOCKING

HIGH 1 GND INST.

ENABLE HIGH 1


174


PICKUP HIGH 1 FIXED TIME HIGH1 SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

CURRENT PROT.

UNDERC. 2 LEVELS

ENABLE PICK UP L1 FIXED T. L1 PICK UP L2 FIXED T. L2 BLOCKING CONDIT.

HIGH 1 INST.

HIGH 1 GND INST.

PHASES TOC, HIGH2

ENABLE TIME PROT

TORQUE CONTROL HIGH 1 GND LOCKING

PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND. GROUND TOC, HIGH2

ENABLE TIME PROT PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND. GROUND TYPE

SENS.G.TOC,HIGH2

Trafo/Calculated

ENABLE TIME PROT PICK UP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX FIXED TIME TEMP.TIEMPO FIJO TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND.

INST. PHASES HIGH2

INST. ENAB. PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND.

GROUND IOC,HIGH2

ENABLE INSTANTAN PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND.

SENS.G.IOC,HIGH2

ENABLE INSTANTAN GROUND TYPE

Trafo/Calculated

PICK UP INST. FIXED TIME TORQUE CONTROL LOCKING COND. BREAKER FAILURE

ENABLE ENAB BREAKE.FAIL GND RESTORE.FAIL FAILURE TIMING LOCKING COND


175


SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

CURRENT PROT.

PHASE DIRECTIONAL

PHASE DIREC CRIT.

QUADRATURE/SECUENCES

PHASE ANGLE POLARIZ. V PHASE AMPLIT. DIRECT. LOCKING LOCKING COND. NEU./.SENS. N DIR.

SENSITIVE GND

SENS. GND DIR TYPE MINIMA P. ANG. MINIMUM I.

GND

GND DIR TYPE MINIMA P. GND. ANG. MINIMUM I.

ANGULAR GND

DIREC. CRIT. .NEU. AMPLIT

MINIMUM VN THRESHOLD C. UNBALANCE TOC

VN THRESHOLD

ENABLE PICKUP CURVE SHAPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING COND.

C. UNBALANCE IOC

ENABLE IOC PICKUP FIXED TIME LOCKING COND.

BROKEN CONDUCTOR

ENABLE PICKUP FIXED TIME LOCKING COND.

PROG.ISOLAT. GND

ENABLE ISOL GRND

Isolated ground

TORQUE CONTROL LOW CURRENT HIGH CURRENT LOW VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE TIME 1st TRIP SWITCH TO INST. LOCKING COND. PHASES IOC,ZONE2

ENABLE INSTAN


PICKUP INSTAN FIXED TIME PHASES IOC,ZONE3

ENABLE INSTAN


PICKUP INSTAN FIXED TIME GROUND IOC,ZONE2

ENABLE INSTAN


PICKUP INSTAN FIXED TIME GROUND IOC,ZONE3

ENABLE INSTAN


PICKUP INSTAN FIXED TIME CANCEL TIMING

CANCEL PHASE TIMING

Cancel timing

CANCEL GND TIMING CANCEL SEN GND TIMING CANCEL PHASE TIMING H2 CANCEL GND TIMING H2 CANCEL SENS. NEU TIMING H2 CANCEL UNBALA. TIMING GND.TOC LIMITAT.

LIMIT CURR. TOC BLOCK.


177


PHS.TOC LIMITAT. 2nd HARMON. RESTR.

TOC BLOCK.

ENAB 2nd HAR. PHASE ENAB 2nd HAR. NEUTR. THRESHOLD I2f / If (%)

SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

2nd HARMON. RESTR.

PHASE MIN. CURRENT GND MIN. CURRENT

PROTE.FNC.BLQ.MC

MODULE ENABLE

Manual closing prot. funct locking

MODULE CONST

(it can be only used in EH3211)

ANGLE ENABLE ANGLE (DGR) FIELD LOSS

FIELD GENERALS

ENABLE .MIN VOT. PICKUP DIRECT. ANGLE LOCKING CONDITION

MHO 1 ZONE


MHO 2 ZONE


VOLT. PROTECTION

TIMED OVERVOLTAGE

ENABLE

Time overvoltage

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING CONDITION INST. OVERVOLTAGE

ENABLE

Instantaneous overvoltage

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING CONDITION TIME UNDERVOLTAGE

ENABLE

Time undervoltage

PICKUP. CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING CONDITION INST. UNDERVOLTAGE

ENABLE

Inst. undervoltage

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND. GND VOLTAGE

ENABLE

Ground overvoltage

TIMED PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX


178


DEFINITE TIME INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

VOLT. PROTECTION

GND VOLTAGE

LOKING COND.

VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

ENABLE

Voltage unbalance

PICKUP. DEFINITE TIME LOCKING COND. VOLT. PH. REVERSAL

ENABLE

Voltage phase reversal

ADDITIONAL TIME POWER PROT.

POWER NOMINAL INT MINIMUM. POWER

5A/1A ENABLE

Minimum power

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. POW. HI-SET

ENABLE

Maximum power, high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. POW. LO-SET

ENABLE

Maximum power, low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REV. POW. HI-SET

ENABLE

Reverse active power, high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REV. POW. LO-SET

ENABLE

Reverse active power, low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REAC.REV.POW.HI

ENABLE

Reverse reactive power, high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. REAC.REV.POW.LO

ENABLE

Reverse reactive power, low level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MIN. APPARENT

ENABLE

Apparent minimum power

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. APPARENT HI

ENABLE

Apparent maximum power, high level

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. MAX. APPARENT LO

ENABLE

MAX. APPARENT LO

PICKUP TIME LOCKING COND. SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

FREQUENCY PROT.

HIGH/LOW FREQUEN

STEP FREQUENCE 1


STEP FREQUENCE 2



179


TRIP TIME FREQUENCY TYPE STEP FREQUENCE 3


SETPOINTS (change)

SEE TABLE 1

PROTECTION

FREQUENCY PROT.

HIGH/LOW FREQUEN

STEP FREQUENCE 3


STEP FREQUENCE 4


STEP FREQUENCE 5


LOCKING COND. MIN.VOLTAGE SPV.

MIN.VOLTAGE SPV.

Minimum voltage supervision

PICKUP CYCLES No P.CYCL. DF/DT No FREQUENCY GRAD

ENABL.GRAD.

Derived from frequency

MIN.CURRENT F. SPV. 1 (HZ) STEP 1 (HZ) FIXED TIME STEP. 1 SPV FREQ. 2 (HZ) STEP 2 (HZ) FIXED TIME STEP. 2 SPV FREQ... 3 (HZ) STEP 3 (HZ) FIXED TIME STEP. 3 SPV FREQ...4 (HZ) STEP 4 (HZ) FIXED TIME STEP. 4 LOCKING COND. PROG. TABLE 1

PROG. PROTECTION

SINCROCHECK

SYNCROCHECK UNDERV.COND.

Enable syncrocheck NO A and NO in B NO A and YES in B YES A and NO in B

VOLTAGE DIF. ANGLE DIF. FREQUEN.DIF PICK VOLT.DF PICK ANGL.DF PICK FREQ.DF MIN.VOLT. A MIN.VOLT. B CLOSE COND.T LOCKING COND. THERMAL IMAGE

THERM.IMAG.PARAM

ENABLE

Thermal image

HEAT. CONST. COOL. CONST ALARM THRESH REPOSITION THRESH LOCKING COND. PICKUP CURR.


180


SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 1

PROG.RECLOSER.

RECLOSER. IS/OOS

RECLOSER. IN SERVIC

Recloser in service.

PROG. RECLOS. TIME

T.CLOSURE 1,PHASE

1st closure time for phase to phase faults.

T.CLOSURE 1 ,EARTH

1st closure time for phase to earth faults.

T.CLOSURE 2,PHASE

2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.

T.CLOSURE 2,EARTH

2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.

T.CLOSURE 3,PHASE

3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.

T.CLOSURE 3,EARTH

3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.

T.CLOSURE 4,PHASE

4th closure time for phase to phase faults.

T.CLOSURE 4 EARTH

4th closure time for phase to earth fault.

Vref WAITING TIME

Reference voltage reclaim time.

PH. FAULT RECL.

Reclaim time for phase to phase faults.

EARTH FAULT RECL.

Reclaim time for phase to earth faults.

MAN CLOS. RECL.

Reclaim time after manual closing.

CYCLE CONTROL

CLOSURE NUMBER

Number of closures.

PROG.ALLOW. TRIP.

AT REST

Trips allowed at rest

AFTER CLOSURE 1

Trips allowed after the first closure.

AFTER CLOSURE 2

Trips allowed after the second closure.

AFTER CLOSURE 3

Trips allowed after the third closure.

AFTER CLOSURE 4

Trips allowed after the fourth closure.

MANUAL CLOSURE T.

Trips allowed after the manual closure.

CLOSURE. 1 permission

Enables the first reclosure after the trips.


Enables the second reclosure after the trips.


Enables the third reclosure after the trips.


Enables the fourth reclosure after the trips.

PROG.VARIOUS T.

PROG.CLOSURE PERM

SEQUENCE COORD.

ENABLE

RECLOSER LOCKING FREQUENCY RECLOS

ENABLE RECLOSER MIN.F.COND MIN.FREQ. RECLOS.TIME RECLAIM. TIME LOCKING COND. BREAKER MONITOR

HISTORICAL PROG.

OPERAT. LOGIC PROG.

P. TABL 2/3/4/5/6

EXC.TRIP NUM

Excessive number of trips

V.EXC.TRIP N

Time for calculation of excessive number of trips

ALARM KI2

Initial sum KI2 (setting)

INITIAL KI2

Alarm sum KI2 for maintenance

ENAB.TRIP MON

Enable monitoring of trip circuit

ENAB.CLOS MON

Enable monitoring of close circuit

CALCULATION TYPE

See k12 sum calculation time

WAITING TIME

See waiting time alter trip

V.AVERAGE

Window of timings for calculating of aver. samples

I.RECORD

Interval of historical records

CALENDAR MASK

Calendar mask for days of week

START TIME

Start time of diary record

END TIME

End time of diary record

TRIP LOCKING.

Trip locking

OPEN FAIL. TIME

Open fail time

CLOSE FAIL. TIME.

Close fail time

SAME AS TABLE 1


181


SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 0

PROG. CONFIGUR I/O

PROG. INPUTS

INPUT1-INPUT17

Configuration of the 17 inputs.

SELECT N0/NC INPUTS ACTIV. TIME LOGICAL SIGNALS

Logical allocation to inputs

LOGICAL S. NO/NC FLICKER SETTING

C.ACTIV.FLICKER C.REMOVE FLICKER T.CHECK.FLIKER

PROG. OUTPUTS

OUTPUT1-OUTPUT14

Configuration of the 14 outputs.

ASSIGN SIGNALS OUTPUT TYPE OUTPUTS ACTIV. T. PROG. LEDs

LED 1 - LED 8

Configuration of the 8 programmable leds.

ASSIGN SIGNALS LED TYPE GENERAL PROG

PROG.RELAY IN SERV.

Relay in service.

PROG.BREAKER NUM. PROG.TRANSFORMERS

Breaker number. PHASE TRANSF.

Phase current transf. ratio.

GND TRANSF.

Ground current transf. Ratio

SENS . GND. TRANSF.

VOLT. DETECTION

VOLTAGE TRANSF.

Voltage transformation ratio

Rated Ph-Ph V

Voltage presence (only CR family)

NO-DETEC.THRESH. DETECT. THRESH. SLACK SPRINGS

STRETCH TIME

NOMINAL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE INPUT

COMMUNIC. CONFIG

Springs slacks Simple nominal voltage

VOLTAGE TYPE

Simples/Compounds

VOLT MEASUREMENT

Phases in which it is measured

IRIG-B FORMAT

B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)

PRG SIDE A V SYN


SELECT COM2 COMMUN. PORT COM1

Procome, DNP, MODBUS, 101 LCU ADDRESS

Unit address.

BAUD RATE

Baud rate (bauds).

PARITY


STOP BITS


CONTROL SIGNALS

None / RTS

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

Unit address.

(if Procome)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate (bauds).

PARITY


STOP BITS


CONTROL SIGNALS

None / RTS

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address for DNP communications

(if DNP)

MASTER ADDRESS

Master address for DNP communications

BAUD RATE

Baud rate for DNP communications

PARITY

Parity for DNP communications

STOP BITS

Stop bits for DNP communications

FIXED RTS

YES/NO

RTS AND CTS CONTROL

RTS and CTS control for DNP communications

CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)

CTS waiting time for DNP communications

CARR. WAIT. TIM. (csec)

CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications

STABIL TIME. (csec)

Stabilization time for DNP communications

ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)

Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP

SYNCHRON. TIME. (min)

Synchronization time for DNP communications

LINK ACK.

Link acknowledge for DNP communications

AP MESS BYTE N.

N. bytes of application messages for DNP

T.CHANGES

Changes sending time for DNP communications

T.FROZEN

Counter freezing time for DNP

STATUS SEND

Status sending for DNP communications

MEAS. BITS NUM.

Measurements format for DNP communications


182


SETPOINTS (change)

SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 0

PROG. TABLE 0

PROG. CONFIGUR I/O

PROG. CONFIGUR I/O

COUNT. BITS NUM.

Counter format for DNP communications

NON REQUESTED MESS.

Non requested message sending for DNP

PREV.CONFLICT

Conflict prev. for DNP communications

FIXED CON. TIME (csec)

Fixed conflict time for DNP communications

VBLE. CON. TIME (csec)

Variable conflict time for DNP

T.RESEND

Non requested messages resend time for DNP

N.MAX.NO REQUESTED

Max. non requested messages number for DNP

PORT COM2

SPECIAL

Special for DNP communications

(if DNP)

MEASUREM. FORMAT

Counts/ value in the secondary/ value in the primary

PORT COM2

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address

(if. MODBUS)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate

PARITY YES/NO

Parity

RTS ACT. WAIT. TIME


CARRIER WAIT. TIME


RTS DEACT.WAIT. T.


MEASUREM. FORMAT PUERTO COM2

GENERALS

(If. 101)

Format for MODBUS LINK ADDRESS APPLIC. ADDRESS SWING BAUD RATE CHANNEL TYPE RTS AND CTS PARITY STOP BITS CTS ACT. WAIT. TIME CARRIER WAIT. TIME RTS ACTIV TIME RTS DEACTIV TIME ANSWER WAITING TIME TME BETWEEN TX RETRANS. NUMBER

ASDU FIELDS

APPLIC. ADD. LENGTH CAA LENGTH COT LENGTH IOA LENGTH

FORMATS

TIME FORMAT MEASUREMENT TIMING COUNTER TIMING

ADDRESSES

SP ADDRESS EV ADDRESS DP ADDRESS AVERAGEADDRESS TAP ADDRESS CON ADDRESS BIT ADDRESS OC ADDRESS OC0 ADDRESS OC1 ADDRESS OC2 ADDRESS TORQUE ADDRESS FULL ADDRESS HALF-FULL ADDRESS GPS ADDRESS SYNCHR. ADDRESS

OTHER PARAMETERS

% FULL % EMPTY


183


WORD EVENTS COOMAND MODE COMMAND INFORM. FREEZE AVER. TORQ ADDRESS META. PROFILE GPS TRANSMIS. FACTOR ASDU SIZE BIT SQ

SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 0

PROG. CONFIGUR I/O

PORT COM2(If 103)

LCU ADDRESS

LCU address

PORT COM2(If 103)

BAUD RATE

Baud rate

PARITY

Parity

STOP BITS

Number of stop bits

RTS ACT. WAIT. TIME


CARRIER WAIT. TIME


RTS DEACT. WAIT. T.


SENDING FORMAT

Compatible with VDEW/Extended

CTRL. PARAM (51V)

NO / PROCOME / HORIZONTAL COMMUNIC. Control parameters 51V

TCP/IP COM. SELEC PROTECTIONS

CTRL. PROG. (51V)

ENABLE CONTROL VOLTAGE LOCKING COND.

PHASE TIMED(51V)

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME

CTRL. PROG. (50V)

CTRL. PARAM. (50V)

ENABLE

Control parameters 50V

CONTROL VOLTAGE LOCKING COND. PHASE INST. (50V)

PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME

FUSE FAILURE

ENABLE

Fuse failure

TRIP TIME LOCKING COND. COLD LOAD PICKUP

PHASE TIMED

ENABLE

Cold Load Pickup

PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING COND. GND TIMED

ENABLE PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING COND.

PHASE INST.

ENABLE PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME PHASE INST. LOCKING

GND INST.

ENABLE PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND.

SEN. N. TIMED

ENABLE PICKUP CURVE TYPE TIME INDEX DEFINITE TIME LOCKING COND.

SEN. N. INSTANT.

ENABLE


184


PICKUP ADDITIONAL TIME LOCKING COND. COLD LOAD PICKUP

ENABLE COLD LOAD DET. TIME COLD LOAD ACT TIME

HIGH CURR. LOCKOUT

PH, HIGH CUR. LOCK.

ENABLE

High current lockout

PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TRIP NUMBER LOCKING COND.

SETPOINTS (change)

PROG. TABLE 0

PROTECTIONS

HIGH CURR. LOCKOUT

NEU.HIGH CUR,. LOCK.

ENABLE

NEU.HIGH CUR,. LOCK.

PICKUP DEFINITE TIME TRIP NUMBER LOCKING COND.

REGULATOR BLOCK.

ENAB.50 CSC

Regulator blocking

THRESHOLD 50 CSC LOCKING COND.

DEFINE PROTECT.

LANGUAGE

Insert key

FREQUENCY VOLTAGE INPUT

Spanish/English 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE TYPE

Simple/Compound

PHASE ORDER GND PARAMETER

A-B-C / C-B-A GND. V TRANSFOR.

CALIBRATION BUTTONS/LEDS

V0 calculate /V0 per transformer (measurement) For exclusive use of INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SA

ENABLE BUTTONS EN.BLOC.CTRL BLOCK R KEY BLOCK LEDS

POW.SUPPLY SUPERVI. TEMPERAT SUPERV.

YES/NO ENABLE

YES/NO

MIN.ALARM. THRESH. MAX.ALARM. THRESH. EXTERNAL. SUPPLY SUP.

ENABLE

YES/NO

MIN. ALARM. THRESH. MAX. ALARM. THRESH.

INITIALIZE

CORRECT. FACTOR

TEST MODE

For exclusive use of INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SA

COUNT. CLOSURE = 0 ?

Set closure and trip counters to zero.

MAXIMETER = 0 ?

Set maximeter to zero.

KI2 SUM= INIT. ?

Initialize KI2 sum to its setting value.

ENERGIES=0 ?

Set to zero energy counters

RESET QUEUES?

Reset queues of events, faults oscillograph...

ACT. ENERGY

Scale for active energy counter.

REACT. ENERGY

Scale for reactive energy counter.

POWER SCALE

Scale for power measurement.


185

CURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS

APPENDIX II. CURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS II.1. CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES 21B

Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:

 Normal Inverse characteristic  Very Inverse characteristic.  Extremely Inverse characteristic.  User curve. These curves comply with the general formula

T

k

M I I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M I I0

1

2

1

being:

 T : Trip time (sec)  TDROPOUT : Drop time (sec)   I: Measured current  Io: Pickup current setting  K, , constants which depend on the type of curve:

Constants Inverse normal K 0.14 0.02 tr 9.7

Short inverse 0.05 0.04 0.5

Long inverse 120 1 120

Very inverse 13.50 1.00 43.2

Extrem. inverse 80.00 2.00 58.2

MIE special 2.60 1.00 21.2

The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are other 4.


186


Inverse curve

T

k

M I I0

K = 0,14,

tr

TDROPOUT : M I I0

1

= 0,02

2

1

tr = 9.7

Theoretical values given by the formula:

M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.05

0.485

0.517

0.647

1.109

7.170

3.669

1.916

1.331

0.860

0.501

0.378

0.315

0.214

0.149

0.113

0.091

0.06

0.582

0.621

0.776

1.330

8.604

4.402

2.299

1.597

1.032

0.602

0.454

0.378

0.257

0.178

0.136

0.110

0.07

0.679

0.724

0.905

1.552

10.038

5.136

2.683

1.863

1.204

0.702

0.530

0.441

0.300

0.208

0.159

0.128

0.08

0.776

0.828

1.035

1.774

11.472

5.870

3.066

2.129

1.376

0.802

0.606

0.504

0.342

0.238

0.181

0.146

0.09

0.873

0.931

1.164

1.995

12.906

6.604

3.449

2.395

1.547

0.903

0.681

0.567

0.385

0.267

0.204

0.165

0.10

0.970

1.035

1.293

2.217

14.340

7.337

3.832

2.661

1.719

1.003

0.757

0.630

0.428

0.297

0.227

0.183

0.11

1.067

1.138

1.423

2.439

15.774

8.071

4.216

2.927

1.891

1.103

0.833

0.693

0.471

0.327

0.249

0.201

0.12

1.164

1.242

1.552

2.661

17.208

8.805

4.599

3.193

2.063

1.203

0.908

0.756

0.514

0.356

0.272

0.219

0.13

1.261

1.345

1.681

2.882

18.642

9.539

4.982

3.459

2.235

1.304

0.984

0.819

0.556

0.386

0.295

0.238

0.14

1.358

1.449

1.811

3.104

20.076

10.272

5.365

3.725

2.407

1.404

1.060

0.882

0.599

0.416

0.317

0.256

0.15

1.455

1.552

1.940

3.326

21.510

11.006

5.749

3.992

2.579

1.504

1.135

0.945

0.642

0.446

0.340

0.274

0.16

1.552

1.655

2.069

3.547

22.944

11.740

6.132

4.258

2.751

1.605

1.211

1.008

0.685

0.475

0.363

0.293

0.17

1.649

1.759

2.199

3.769

24.378

12.474

6.515

4.524

2.923

1.705

1.287

1.071

0.728

0.505

0.385

0.311

0.18

1.746

1.862

2.328

3.991

25.812

13.207

6.898

4.790

3.095

1.805

1.363

1.134

0.770

0.535

0.408

0.329

0.19

1.843

1.966

2.457

4.213

27.246

13.941

7.282

5.056

3.267

1.906

1.438

1.197

0.813

0.564

0.431

0.347

0.20

1.940

2.069

2.587

4.434

28.680

14.675

7.665

5.322

3.439

2.006

1.514

1.260

0.856

0.594

0.453

0.366

0.25

2.425

2.587

3.233

5.543

35.850

18.344

9.581

6.653

4.299

2.507

1.892

1.575

1.070

0.743

0.567

0.457

0.30

2.910

3.104

3.880

6.651

43.021

22.012

11.497

7.983

5.158

3.009

2.271

1.891

1.284

0.891

0.680

0.549

0.35

3.395

3.621

4.527

7.760

50.191

25.681

13.413

9.314

6.018

3.510

2.649

2.206

1.498

1.040

0.794

0.640

0.40

3.880

4.139

5.173

8.869

57.361

29.350

15.329

10.644

6.878

4.012

3.028

2.521

1.712

1.188

0.907

0.731

0.45

4.365

4.656

5.820

9.977

64.531

33.018

17.246

11.975

7.737

4.513

3.406

2.836

1.926

1.337

1.020

0.823

0.50

4.850

5.173

6.467

11.086

71.701

36.687

19.162

13.305

8.597

5.015

3.785

3.151

2.140

1.485

1.134

0.914

0.55

5.335

5.691

7.113

12.194

78.871

40.356

21.078

14.636

9.457

5.516

4.163

3.466

2.354

1.634

1.247

1.006

0.60

5.820

6.208

7.760

13.303

86.041

44.025

22.994

15.966

10.317

6.017

4.542

3.781

2.568

1.782

1.360

1.097

0.65

6.305

6.725

8.407

14.411

93.211

47.693

24.910

17.297

11.176

6.519

4.920

4.096

2.782

1.931

1.474

1.188

0.70

6.790

7.243

9.053

15.520

100.381

51.362

26.827

18.627

12.036

7.020

5.299

4.411

2.996

2.079

1.587

1.280

0.75

7.275

7.760

9.700

16.629

107.551

55.031

28.743

19.958

12.896

7.522

5.677

4.726

3.210

2.228

1.701

1.371

0.80

7.760

8.277

10.347

17.737

114.721

58.700

30.659

21.288

13.755

8.023

6.056

5.042

3.424

2.376

1.814

1.463

0.85

8.245

8.795

10.993

18.846

121.891

62.368

32.575

22.619

14.615

8.525

6.434

5.357

3.638

2.525

1.927

1.554

0.90

8.730

9.312

11.640

19.954

129.062

66.037

34.491

23.949

15.475

9.026

6.813

5.672

3.852

2.674

2.041

1.646

0.95

9.215

9.829

12.287

21.063

136.232

69.706

36.408

25.280

16.335

9.528

7.191

5.987

4.066

2.822

2.154

1.737

1.00

9.700

10.347

12.933

22.171

143.402

73.374

38.324

26.611

17.194

10.029

7.570

6.302

4.280

2.971

2.267

1.828

1.05

10.185

10.864

13.580

23.280

150.572

77.043

40.240

27.941

18.054

10.530

7.948

6.617

4.494

3.119

2.381

1.920


187


Inverse characteristic


188


Long duration curve (IEC)

T

k

M I

I I0

1

I0

K = 120,

tr

TDROPOUT : M

=1

2

1

tr = 120

Theoretical values given by the formula: M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.05

6.000

6.400

8.000

13.714

120.000

60.000

30.000

20.000

12.000

6.000

4.000

3.000

1.500

0.667

0.316

0.154

0.06

7.200

7.680

9.600

16.457

144.000

72.000

36.000

24.000

14.400

7.200

4.800

3.600

1.800

0.800

0.379

0.185

0.07

8.400

8.960

11.200

19.200

168.000

84.000

42.000

28.000

16.800

8.400

5.600

4.200

2.100

0.933

0.442

0.215

0.08

9.600

10.240

12.800

21.943

192.000

96.000

48.000

32.000

19.200

9.600

6.400

4.800

2.400

1.067

0.505

0.246

0.09

10.800

11.520

14.400

24.686

216.000

108.000

54.000

36.000

21.600

10.800

7.200

5.400

2.700

1.200

0.568

0.277

0.10

12.000

12.800

16.000

27.429

240.000

120.000

60.000

40.000

24.000

12.000

8.000

6.000

3.000

1.333

0.632

0.308

0.11

13.200

14.080

17.600

30.171

264.000

132.000

66.000

44.000

26.400

13.200

8.800

6.600

3.300

1.467

0.695

0.338

0.12

14.400

15.360

19.200

32.914

288.000

144.000

72.000

48.000

28.800

14.400

9.600

7.200

3.600

1.600

0.758

0.369

0.13

15.600

16.640

20.800

35.657

312.000

156.000

78.000

52.000

31.200

15.600

10.400

7.800

3.900

1.733

0.821

0.400

0.14

16.800

17.920

22.400

38.400

336.000

168.000

84.000

56.000

33.600

16.800

11.200

8.400

4.200

1.867

0.884

0.431

0.15

18.000

19.200

24.000

41.143

360.000

180.000

90.000

60.000

36.000

18.000

12.000

9.000

4.500

2.000

0.947

0.462

0.16

19.200

20.480

25.600

43.886

384.000

192.000

96.000

64.000

38.400

19.200

12.800

9.600

4.800

2.133

1.011

0.492

0.17

20.400

21.760

27.200

46.629

408.000

204.000

102.000

68.000

40.800

20.400

13.600

10.200

5.100

2.267

1.074

0.523

0.18

21.600

23.040

28.800

49.371

432.000

216.000

108.000

72.000

43.200

21.600

14.400

10.800

5.400

2.400

1.137

0.554

0.19

22.800

24.320

30.400

52.114

456.000

228.000

114.000

76.000

45.600

22.800

15.200

11.400

5.700

2.533

1.200

0.585

0.20

24.000

25.600

32.000

54.857

480.001

240.000

120.000

80.000

48.000

24.000

16.000

12.000

6.000

2.667

1.263

0.615

0.25

30.000

32.000

40.000

68.571

600.001

300.000

150.000

100.000

60.000

30.000

20.000

15.000

7.500

3.333

1.579

0.769

0.30

36.000

38.400

48.000

82.286

720.001

360.000

180.000

120.000

72.000

36.000

24.000

18.000

9.000

4.000

1.895

0.923

0.35

42.000

44.800

56.000

96.000

840.001

420.000

210.000

140.000

84.000

42.000

28.000

21.000

10.500

4.667

2.211

1.077

0.40

48.000

51.200

64.000

109.714

960.001

480.000

240.000

160.000

96.000

48.000

32.000

24.000

12.000

5.333

2.526

1.231

0.45

54.000

57.600

72.000

123.429

1080.001

540.000

270.000

180.000

108.000

54.000

36.000

27.000

13.500

6.000

2.842

1.385

0.50

60.000

64.000

80.000

137.143

1200.001

600.000

300.000

200.000

120.000

60.000

40.000

30.000

15.000

6.667

3.158

1.538

0.55

66.000

70.400

88.000

150.857

1320.001

660.000

330.000

220.000

132.000

66.000

44.000

33.000

16.500

7.333

3.474

1.692

0.60

72.000

76.800

96.000

164.571

1440.002

720.000

360.000

240.000

144.000

72.000

48.000

36.000

18.000

8.000

3.789

1.846

0.65

78.000

83.200

104.000

178.286

1560.002

780.000

390.000

260.000

156.000

78.000

52.000

39.000

19.500

8.667

4.105

2.000

0.70

84.000

89.600

112.000

192.000

1680.002

840.000

420.000

280.000

168.000

84.000

56.000

42.000

21.000

9.333

4.421

2.154

0.75

90.000

96.000

120.000

205.714

1800.002

900.000

450.000

300.000

180.000

90.000

60.000

45.000

22.500

10.000

4.737

2.308

0.80

96.000

102.400

128.000

219.429

1920.002

960.000

480.000

320.000

192.000

96.000

64.000

48.000

24.000

10.667

5.053

2.462

0.85

102.000

108.800

136.000

233.143

2040.002

1020.000

510.000

340.000

204.000

102.000

68.000

51.000

25.500

11.333

5.368

2.615

0.90

108.000

115.200

144.000

246.857

2160.002

1080.000

540.000

360.000

216.000

108.000

72.000

54.000

27.000

12.000

5.684

2.769

0.95

114.000

121.600

152.000

260.571

2280.003

1140.000

570.000

380.000

228.000

114.000

76.000

57.000

28.500

12.667

6.000

2.923

1.00

120.000

128.000

160.000

274.286

2400.003

1200.000

600.000

400.000

240.000

120.000

80.000

60.000

30.000

13.333

6.316

3.077

1.05

126.000

134.400

168.000

288.000

2520.003

1260.000

630.000

420.000

252.000

126.000

84.000

63.000

31.500

14.000

6.632

3.231


189


Long duration inverse


190


Short duration curve IEC

T

k

M I

K = 0.05,

I I0

1

I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

= 0.04

2

1

tr = 0.5


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.05

0.025

0.027

0.033

0.057

1.280

0.655

0.342

0.237

0.153

0.089

0.067

0.056

0.038

0.026

0.020

0.016

0.06

0.030

0.032

0.040

0.069

1.536

0.785

0.410

0.284

0.183

0.107

0.080

0.067

0.045

0.031

0.024

0.019

0.07

0.035

0.037

0.047

0.080

1.792

0.916

0.478

0.332

0.214

0.124

0.094

0.078

0.053

0.036

0.027

0.022

0.08

0.040

0.043

0.053

0.091

2.048

1.047

0.546

0.379

0.245

0.142

0.107

0.089

0.060

0.041

0.031

0.025

0.09

0.045

0.048

0.060

0.103

2.304

1.178

0.615

0.427

0.275

0.160

0.121

0.100

0.068

0.047

0.035

0.028

0.10

0.050

0.053

0.067

0.114

2.559

1.309

0.683

0.474

0.306

0.178

0.134

0.111

0.075

0.052

0.039

0.031

0.11

0.055

0.059

0.073

0.126

2.815

1.440

0.751

0.521

0.336

0.196

0.147

0.122

0.083

0.057

0.043

0.035

0.12

0.060

0.064

0.080

0.137

3.071

1.571

0.820

0.569

0.367

0.213

0.161

0.134

0.090

0.062

0.047

0.038

0.13

0.065

0.069

0.087

0.149

3.327

1.702

0.888

0.616

0.398

0.231

0.174

0.145

0.098

0.067

0.051

0.041

0.14

0.070

0.075

0.093

0.160

3.583

1.833

0.956

0.664

0.428

0.249

0.188

0.156

0.105

0.073

0.055

0.044

0.15

0.075

0.080

0.100

0.171

3.839

1.964

1.025

0.711

0.459

0.267

0.201

0.167

0.113

0.078

0.059

0.047

0.16

0.080

0.085

0.107

0.183

4.095

2.094

1.093

0.758

0.489

0.285

0.214

0.178

0.120

0.083

0.063

0.050

0.17

0.085

0.091

0.113

0.194

4.351

2.225

1.161

0.806

0.520

0.302

0.228

0.189

0.128

0.088

0.067

0.053

0.18

0.090

0.096

0.120

0.206

4.607

2.356

1.230

0.853

0.550

0.320

0.241

0.200

0.135

0.093

0.071

0.057

0.19

0.095

0.101

0.127

0.217

4.863

2.487

1.298

0.900

0.581

0.338

0.254

0.211

0.143

0.098

0.075

0.060

0.20

0.100

0.107

0.133

0.229

5.119

2.618

1.366

0.948

0.612

0.356

0.268

0.223

0.150

0.104

0.079

0.063

0.25

0.125

0.133

0.167

0.286

6.399

3.273

1.708

1.185

0.764

0.445

0.335

0.278

0.188

0.130

0.098

0.079

0.30

0.150

0.160

0.200

0.343

7.678

3.927

2.049

1.422

0.917

0.534

0.402

0.334

0.226

0.155

0.118

0.094

0.35

0.175

0.187

0.233

0.400

8.958

4.582

2.391

1.659

1.070

0.622

0.469

0.390

0.263

0.181

0.137

0.110

0.40

0.200

0.213

0.267

0.457

10.238

5.236

2.732

1.896

1.223

0.711

0.536

0.445

0.301

0.207

0.157

0.126

0.45

0.225

0.240

0.300

0.514

11.518

5.891

3.074

2.133

1.376

0.800

0.603

0.501

0.338

0.233

0.177

0.142

0.50

0.250

0.267

0.333

0.571

12.797

6.545

3.416

2.370

1.529

0.889

0.670

0.556

0.376

0.259

0.196

0.157

0.55

0.275

0.293

0.367

0.629

14.077

7.200

3.757

2.607

1.682

0.978

0.737

0.612

0.414

0.285

0.216

0.173

0.60

0.300

0.320

0.400

0.686

15.357

7.854

4.099

2.844

1.835

1.067

0.804

0.668

0.451

0.311

0.236

0.189

0.65

0.325

0.347

0.433

0.743

16.637

8.509

4.440

3.081

1.988

1.156

0.871

0.723

0.489

0.337

0.255

0.204

0.70

0.350

0.373

0.467

0.800

17.916

9.163

4.782

3.318

2.141

1.245

0.938

0.779

0.526

0.363

0.275

0.220

0.75

0.375

0.400

0.500

0.857

19.196

9.818

5.123

3.555

2.293

1.334

1.005

0.835

0.564

0.389

0.295

0.236

0.80

0.400

0.427

0.533

0.914

20.476

10.472

5.465

3.792

2.446

1.423

1.071

0.890

0.602

0.415

0.314

0.252

0.85

0.425

0.453

0.567

0.971

21.756

11.127

5.806

4.029

2.599

1.512

1.138

0.946

0.639

0.441

0.334

0.267

0.90

0.450

0.480

0.600

1.029

23.035

11.781

6.148

4.265

2.752

1.601

1.205

1.002

0.677

0.466

0.353

0.283

0.95

0.475

0.507

0.633

1.086

24.315

12.436

6.489

4.502

2.905

1.690

1.272

1.057

0.714

0.492

0.373

0.299

1.00

0.500

0.533

0.667

1.143

25.595

13.090

6.831

4.739

3.058

1.778

1.339

1.113

0.752

0.518

0.393

0.314

1.05

0.525

0.560

0.700

1.200

26.875

13.745

7.173

4.976

3.211

1.867

1.406

1.169

0.790

0.544

0.412

0.330


191


Short duration inverse


192


Very inverse curve

T

k

M I

I I0

1

I0

K = 13,5,

tr

TDROPOUT : M

=1

2

1

tr = 43.2


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.05

2.160

2.304

2.880

4.937

13.500

6.750

3.375

2.250

1.350

0.675

0.450

0.338

0.169

0.075

0.036

0.017

0.06

2.592

2.765

3.456

5.925

16.200

8.100

4.050

2.700

1.620

0.810

0.540

0.405

0.203

0.090

0.043

0.021

0.07

3.024

3.226

4.032

6.912

18.900

9.450

4.725

3.150

1.890

0.945

0.630

0.472

0.236

0.105

0.050

0.024

0.08

3.456

3.686

4.608

7.899

21.600

10.800

5.400

3.600

2.160

1.080

0.720

0.540

0.270

0.120

0.057

0.028

0.09

3.888

4.147

5.184

8.887

24.300

12.150

6.075

4.050

2.430

1.215

0.810

0.607

0.304

0.135

0.064

0.031

0.10

4.320

4.608

5.760

9.874

27.000

13.500

6.750

4.500

2.700

1.350

0.900

0.675

0.337

0.150

0.071

0.035

0.11

4.752

5.069

6.336

10.862

29.700

14.850

7.425

4.950

2.970

1.485

0.990

0.742

0.371

0.165

0.078

0.038

0.12

5.184

5.530

6.912

11.849

32.400

16.200

8.100

5.400

3.240

1.620

1.080

0.810

0.405

0.180

0.085

0.042

0.13

5.616

5.990

7.488

12.837

35.100

17.550

8.775

5.850

3.510

1.755

1.170

0.877

0.439

0.195

0.092

0.045

0.14

6.048

6.451

8.064

13.824

37.800

18.900

9.450

6.300

3.780

1.890

1.260

0.945

0.472

0.210

0.099

0.048

0.15

6.480

6.912

8.640

14.811

40.500

20.250

10.125

6.750

4.050

2.025

1.350

1.013

0.506

0.225

0.107

0.052

0.16

6.912

7.373

9.216

15.799

43.200

21.600

10.800

7.200

4.320

2.160

1.440

1.080

0.540

0.240

0.114

0.055

0.17

7.344

7.834

9.792

16.786

45.900

22.950

11.475

7.650

4.590

2.295

1.530

1.148

0.574

0.255

0.121

0.059

0.18

7.776

8.294

10.368

17.774

48.600

24.300

12.150

8.100

4.860

2.430

1.620

1.215

0.608

0.270

0.128

0.062

0.19

8.208

8.755

10.944

18.761

51.300

25.650

12.825

8.550

5.130

2.565

1.710

1.283

0.641

0.285

0.135

0.066

0.20

8.640

9.216

11.520

19.749

54.000

27.000

13.500

9.000

5.400

2.700

1.800

1.350

0.675

0.300

0.142

0.069

0.25

10.800

11.520

14.400

24.686

67.500

33.750

16.875

11.250

6.750

3.375

2.250

1.688

0.844

0.375

0.178

0.087

0.30

12.960

13.824

17.280

29.623

81.000

40.500

20.250

13.500

8.100

4.050

2.700

2.025

1.013

0.450

0.213

0.104

0.35

15.120

16.128

20.160

34.560

94.500

47.250

23.625

15.750

9.450

4.725

3.150

2.363

1.181

0.525

0.249

0.121

0.40

17.280

18.432

23.040

39.497

108.000

54.000

27.000

18.000

10.800

5.400

3.600

2.700

1.350

0.600

0.284

0.138

0.45

19.440

20.736

25.920

44.434

121.500

60.750

30.375

20.250

12.150

6.075

4.050

3.038

1.519

0.675

0.320

0.156

0.50

21.600

23.040

28.800

49.371

135.000

67.500

33.750

22.500

13.500

6.750

4.500

3.375

1.688

0.750

0.355

0.173

0.55

23.760

25.344

31.680

54.309

148.500

74.250

37.125

24.750

14.850

7.425

4.950

3.713

1.856

0.825

0.391

0.190

0.60

25.920

27.648

34.560

59.246

162.000

81.000

40.500

27.000

16.200

8.100

5.400

4.050

2.025

0.900

0.426

0.208

0.65

28.080

29.952

37.440

64.183

175.500

87.750

43.875

29.250

17.550

8.775

5.850

4.388

2.194

0.975

0.462

0.225

0.70

30.240

32.256

40.320

69.120

189.000

94.500

47.250

31.500

18.900

9.450

6.300

4.725

2.363

1.050

0.497

0.242

0.75

32.400

34.560

43.200

74.057

202.500

101.25

50.625

33.750

20.250

10.125

6.750

5.063

2.531

1.125

0.533

0.260

0.80

34.560

36.864

46.080

78.994

216.000

108.00

54.000

36.000

21.600

10.800

7.200

5.400

2.700

1.200

0.568

0.277

0.85

36.720

39.168

48.960

83.931

229.500

114.75

57.375

38.250

22.950

11.475

7.650

5.738

2.869

1.275

0.604

0.294

0.90

38.880

41.472

51.840

88.869

243.000

121.50

60.750

40.500

24.300

12.150

8.100

6.075

3.038

1.350

0.639

0.312

0.95

41.040

43.776

54.720

93.806

256.500

128.25

64.125

42.750

25.650

12.825

8.550

6.413

3.206

1.425

0.675

0.329

1.00

43.200

46.080

57.600

98.743

270.000

135.00

67.500

45.000

27.000

13.500

9.000

6.750

3.375

1.500

0.711

0.346

1.05

45.360

48.384

60.480

103.68

283.500

141.75

70.875

47.250

28.350

14.175

9.450

7.088

3.544

1.575

0.746

0.363


193


Very inverse characteristic


194


Extremely inverse curve

T

k

M I

I I0

1

I0 K = 80,

tr

TDROPOUT : M

=2

2

1

tr =58.2


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.05

2.910

3.104

3.880

6.651

39.024

19.048

9.091

5.797

3.200

1.333

0.762

0.500

0.167

0.040

0.010

0.003

0.06

3.492

3.725

4.656

7.982

46.829

22.857

10.909

6.957

3.840

1.600

0.914

0.600

0.200

0.048

0.012

0.003

0.07

4.074

4.346

5.432

9.312

54.634

26.667

12.727

8.116

4.480

1.867

1.067

0.700

0.233

0.057

0.014

0.004

0.08

4.656

4.966

6.208

10.642

62.439

30.476

14.545

9.275

5.120

2.133

1.219

0.800

0.267

0.065

0.016

0.004

0.09

5.238

5.587

6.984

11.973

70.244

34.286

16.364

10.435

5.760

2.400

1.371

0.900

0.300

0.073

0.018

0.005

0.10

5.820

6.208

7.760

13.303

78.049

38.095

18.182

11.594

6.400

2.667

1.524

1.000

0.333

0.081

0.020

0.005

0.11

6.402

6.829

8.536

14.633

85.854

41.905

20.000

12.754

7.040

2.933

1.676

1.100

0.367

0.089

0.022

0.006

0.12

6.984

7.450

9.312

15.963

93.659

45.714

21.818

13.913

7.680

3.200

1.829

1.200

0.400

0.097

0.024

0.006

0.13

7.566

8.070

10.088

17.294

101.464

49.524

23.636

15.072

8.320

3.467

1.981

1.300

0.433

0.105

0.026

0.007

0.14

8.148

8.691

10.864

18.624

109.268

53.333

25.455

16.232

8.960

3.733

2.133

1.400

0.467

0.113

0.028

0.007

0.15

8.730

9.312

11.640

19.954

117.073

57.143

27.273

17.391

9.600

4.000

2.286

1.500

0.500

0.121

0.030

0.008

0.16

9.312

9.933

12.416

21.285

124.878

60.952

29.091

18.551

10.240

4.267

2.438

1.600

0.533

0.129

0.032

0.008

0.17

9.894

10.554

13.192

22.615

132.683

64.762

30.909

19.710

10.880

4.533

2.590

1.700

0.567

0.137

0.034

0.009

0.18

10.476

11.174

13.968

23.945

140.488

68.571

32.727

20.870

11.520

4.800

2.743

1.800

0.600

0.145

0.036

0.009

0.19

11.058

11.795

14.744

25.275

148.293

72.381

34.545

22.029

12.160

5.067

2.895

1.900

0.633

0.154

0.038

0.010

0.20

11.640

12.416

15.520

26.606

156.098

76.190

36.364

23.188

12.800

5.333

3.048

2.000

0.667

0.162

0.040

0.010

0.25

14.550

15.520

19.400

33.257

195.122

95.238

45.455

28.986

16.000

6.667

3.810

2.500

0.833

0.202

0.050

0.013

0.30

17.460

18.624

23.280

39.909

234.147

114.286

54.545

34.783

19.200

8.000

4.571

3.000

1.000

0.242

0.060

0.015

0.35

20.370

21.728

27.160

46.560

273.171

133.333

63.636

40.580

22.400

9.333

5.333

3.500

1.167

0.283

0.070

0.018

0.40

23.280

24.832

31.040

53.211

312.195

152.381

72.727

46.377

25.600

10.667

6.095

4.000

1.333

0.323

0.080

0.020

0.45

26.190

27.936

34.920

59.863

351.220

171.429

81.818

52.174

28.800

12.000

6.857

4.500

1.500

0.364

0.090

0.023

0.50

29.100

31.040

38.800

66.514

390.244

190.476

90.909

57.971

32.000

13.333

7.619

5.000

1.667

0.404

0.100

0.025

0.55

32.010

34.144

42.680

73.166

429.269

209.524

100.000

63.768

35.200

14.667

8.381

5.500

1.833

0.444

0.110

0.028

0.60

34.920

37.248

46.560

79.817

468.293

228.571

109.091

69.565

38.400

16.000

9.143

6.000

2.000

0.485

0.120

0.030

0.65

37.830

40.352

50.440

86.469

507.318

247.619

118.182

75.362

41.600

17.333

9.905

6.500

2.167

0.525

0.130

0.033

0.70

40.740

43.456

54.320

93.120

546.342

266.667

127.273

81.159

44.800

18.667

10.667

7.000

2.333

0.566

0.140

0.035

0.75

43.650

46.560

58.200

99.771

585.367

285.714

136.364

86.957

48.000

20.000

11.429

7.500

2.500

0.606

0.150

0.038

0.80

46.560

49.664

62.080

106.423

624.391

304.762

145.455

92.754

51.200

21.333

12.190

8.000

2.667

0.646

0.160

0.040

0.85

49.470

52.768

65.960

113.074

663.415

323.810

154.545

98.551

54.400

22.667

12.952

8.500

2.833

0.687

0.170

0.043

0.90

52.380

55.872

69.840

119.726

702.440

342.857

163.636

104.348

57.600

24.000

13.714

9.000

3.000

0.727

0.180

0.045

0.95

55.290

58.976

73.720

126.377

741.464

361.905

172.727

110.145

60.800

25.333

14.476

9.500

3.167

0.768

0.190

0.048

1.00

58.200

62.080

77.600

133.029

780.489

380.952

181.818

115.942

64.000

26.667

15.238

10.000

3.333

0.808

0.201

0.050

1.05

61.110

65.184

81.480

139.680

819.513

400.000

190.909

121.739

67.200

28.000

16.000

10.500

3.500

0.848

0.211

0.053


195


Extremely inverse characteristic


196


Special very inverse curve

T

k

M I

I I0

1

I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

K = 2,6

2

1

=1


M \ I/Io

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.40

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

10.00

12.00

15.00

20.00

30.00

40.00

0.05

2.600

1.300

0.650

0.433

0.325

0.260

0.130

0.087

0.065

0.043

0.032

0.022

0.014

0.012

0.009

0.007

0.004

0.003

0.06

3.120

1.560

0.780

0.520

0.390

0.312

0.156

0.104

0.078

0.052

0.039

0.026

0.017

0.014

0.011

0.008

0.005

0.004

0.07

3.640

1.820

0.910

0.607

0.455

0.364

0.182

0.121

0.091

0.061

0.045

0.030

0.020

0.017

0.013

0.010

0.006

0.005

0.08

4.160

2.080

1.040

0.693

0.520

0.416

0.208

0.139

0.104

0.069

0.052

0.035

0.023

0.019

0.015

0.011

0.007

0.005

0.09

4.680

2.340

1.170

0.780

0.585

0.468

0.234

0.156

0.117

0.078

0.058

0.039

0.026

0.021

0.017

0.012

0.008

0.006

0.10

5.200

2.600

1.300

0.867

0.650

0.520

0.260

0.173

0.130

0.087

0.065

0.043

0.029

0.024

0.019

0.014

0.009

0.007

0.11

5.720

2.860

1.430

0.953

0.715

0.572

0.286

0.191

0.143

0.095

0.071

0.048

0.032

0.026

0.020

0.015

0.010

0.007

0.12

6.240

3.120

1.560

1.040

0.780

0.624

0.312

0.208

0.156

0.104

0.078

0.052

0.035

0.028

0.022

0.016

0.011

0.008

0.13

6.760

3.380

1.690

1.127

0.845

0.676

0.338

0.225

0.169

0.113

0.084

0.056

0.038

0.031

0.024

0.018

0.012

0.009

0.14

7.280

3.640

1.820

1.213

0.910

0.728

0.364

0.243

0.182

0.121

0.091

0.061

0.040

0.033

0.026

0.019

0.013

0.009

0.15

7.800

3.900

1.950

1.300

0.975

0.780

0.390

0.260

0.195

0.130

0.098

0.065

0.043

0.035

0.028

0.021

0.013

0.010

0.16

8.320

4.160

2.080

1.387

1.040

0.832

0.416

0.277

0.208

0.139

0.104

0.069

0.046

0.038

0.030

0.022

0.014

0.011

0.17

8.840

4.420

2.210

1.473

1.105

0.884

0.442

0.295

0.221

0.147

0.111

0.074

0.049

0.040

0.032

0.023

0.015

0.011

0.18

9.360

4.680

2.340

1.560

1.170

0.936

0.468

0.312

0.234

0.156

0.117

0.078

0.052

0.043

0.033

0.025

0.016

0.012

0.19

9.880

4.940

2.470

1.647

1.235

0.988

0.494

0.329

0.247

0.165

0.124

0.082

0.055

0.045

0.035

0.026

0.017

0.013

0.20

10.400

5.200

2.600

1.733

1.300

1.040

0.520

0.347

0.260

0.173

0.130

0.087

0.058

0.047

0.037

0.027

0.018

0.013

0.25

13.000

6.500

3.250

2.167

1.625

1.300

0.650

0.433

0.325

0.217

0.163

0.108

0.072

0.059

0.046

0.034

0.022

0.017

0.30

15.600

7.800

3.900

2.600

1.950

1.560

0.780

0.520

0.390

0.260

0.195

0.130

0.087

0.071

0.056

0.041

0.027

0.020

0.35

18.200

9.100

4.550

3.033

2.275

1.820

0.910

0.607

0.455

0.303

0.228

0.152

0.101

0.083

0.065

0.048

0.031

0.023

0.40

20.800

10.400

5.200

3.467

2.600

2.080

1.040

0.693

0.520

0.347

0.260

0.173

0.116

0.095

0.074

0.055

0.036

0.027

0.45

23.400

11.700

5.850

3.900

2.925

2.340

1.170

0.780

0.585

0.390

0.293

0.195

0.130

0.106

0.084

0.062

0.040

0.030

0.50

26.000

13.000

6.500

4.333

3.250

2.600

1.300

0.867

0.650

0.433

0.325

0.217

0.144

0.118

0.093

0.068

0.045

0.033

0.55

28.600

14.300

7.150

4.767

3.575

2.860

1.430

0.953

0.715

0.477

0.358

0.238

0.159

0.130

0.102

0.075

0.049

0.037

0.60

31.200

15.600

7.800

5.200

3.900

3.120

1.560

1.040

0.780

0.520

0.390

0.260

0.173

0.142

0.111

0.082

0.054

0.040

0.65

33.800

16.900

8.450

5.633

4.225

3.380

1.690

1.127

0.845

0.563

0.423

0.282

0.188

0.154

0.121

0.089

0.058

0.043

0.70

36.400

18.200

9.100

6.067

4.550

3.640

1.820

1.213

0.910

0.607

0.455

0.303

0.202

0.165

0.130

0.096

0.063

0.047

0.75

39.000

19.500

9.750

6.500

4.875

3.900

1.950

1.300

0.975

0.650

0.488

0.325

0.217

0.177

0.139

0.103

0.067

0.050

0.80

41.600

20.800

10.400

6.933

5.200

4.160

2.080

1.387

1.040

0.693

0.520

0.347

0.231

0.189

0.149

0.109

0.072

0.053

0.85

44.200

22.100

11.050

7.367

5.525

4.420

2.210

1.473

1.105

0.737

0.553

0.368

0.246

0.201

0.158

0.116

0.076

0.057

0.90

46.800

23.400

11.700

7.800

5.850

4.680

2.340

1.560

1.170

0.780

0.585

0.390

0.260

0.213

0.167

0.123

0.081

0.060

0.95

49.400

24.700

12.350

8.233

6.175

4.940

2.470

1.647

1.235

0.823

0.618

0.412

0.274

0.225

0.176

0.130

0.085

0.063

1.00

52.000

26.000

13.000

8.667

6.500

5.200

2.600

1.733

1.300

0.867

0.650

0.433

0.289

0.236

0.186

0.137

0.090

0.067

1.05

54.600

27.300

13.650

9.100

6.825

5.460

2.730

1.820

1.365

0.910

0.683

0.455

0.303

0.248

0.195

0.144

0.094

0.070


197


Special very inverse curve


198


II.2. ANSI CURVES 2B

Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:

 Normal Inverse characteristic  Very Inverse characteristic  Extremely Inverse characteristic  Moderately Inverse characteristic These curves respond to the general formula: T

M

A

B I I0

D C

E 2

I I0

C

I I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

3

I I0

C

2

1

being:

 T : Trip time (sec)  TDROPOUT : drop time (sec)  M : multiplier ("time index"). Valid range from 0.5 to 30.0 in 0.1 steps  I: Measured current  Io: Pickup current setting  A,B,C,D,E tr, constants that depend upon the type of curve:

Constants A B C D E tr

Inverse charact. 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 -4.1899 9.1272 0.99

Very inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 -0.2840 4.0505 4.678

Extrem. inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222 6.008

Moderat. inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 -0.0800 0.1271 1.2

Below, the corresponding curve for the indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 are represented for every characteristic type. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are other 9 curves.


199


Inverse normal curve

T

M

A

B I I0

D I

C

I0

E 2

C

I I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

3

I I0

C

A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272

2

1

tr = 0.99


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.5

0.495

0.528

0.660

1.131

8.614

7.067

4.944

3.613

2.142

0.883

0.523

0.377

0.203

0.113

0.066

0.041

1.0

0.990

1.056

1.320

2.263

17.229

14.134

9.888

7.226

4.284

1.766

1.047

0.754

0.407

0.226

0.133

0.082

2.0

1.980

2.112

2.640

4.526

34.457

28.268

19.775

14.452

8.568

3.531

2.094

1.508

0.814

0.452

0.265

0.164

3.0

2.970

3.168

3.960

6.789

51.686

42.402

29.663

21.678

12.853

5.297

3.140

2.262

1.220

0.678

0.398

0.246

4.0

3.960

4.224

5.280

9.051

68.915

56.536

39.550

28.904

17.137

7.062

4.187

3.016

1.627

0.904

0.530

0.327

5.0

4.950

5.280

6.600

11.314

86.144

70.670

49.438

36.131

21.421

8.828

5.234

3.770

2.034

1.130

0.663

0.409

6.0

5.940

6.336

7.920

13.577

103.372

84.804

59.325

43.357

25.705

10.594

6.281

4.524

2.441

1.356

0.796

0.491

7.0

6.930

7.392

9.240

15.840

120.601

98.938

69.213

50.583

29.989

12.359

7.328

5.277

2.848

1.582

0.928

0.573

8.0

7.920

8.448

10.560

18.103

137.830

113.072

79.100

57.809

34.274

14.125

8.374

6.031

3.254

1.808

1.061

0.655

9.0

8.910

9.504

11.880

20.366

155.059

127.206

88.988

65.035

38.558

15.890

9.421

6.785

3.661

2.034

1.193

0.737

10.0

9.900

10.560

13.200

22.629

172.287

141.340

98.875

72.261

42.842

17.656

10.468

7.539

4.068

2.260

1.326

0.818

11.0

10.890

11.616

14.520

24.891

189.516

155.474

108.763

79.487

47.126

19.422

11.515

8.293

4.475

2.486

1.458

0.900

12.0

11.880

12.672

15.840

27.154

206.745

169.608

118.650

86.713

51.410

21.187

12.562

9.047

4.881

2.712

1.591

0.982

13.0

12.870

13.728

17.160

29.417

223.974

183.742

128.538

93.939

55.694

22.953

13.608

9.801

5.288

2.938

1.724

1.064

14.0

13.860

14.784

18.480

31.680

241.202

197.876

138.425

101.165

59.979

24.719

14.655

10.555

5.695

3.164

1.856

1.146

15.0

14.850

15.840

19.800

33.943

258.431

212.010

148.313

108.392

64.263

26.484

15.702

11.309

6.102

3.390

1.989

1.228

16.0

15.840

16.896

21.120

36.206

275.660

226.144

158.200

115.618

68.547

28.250

16.749

12.063

6.509

3.616

2.121

1.310

17.0

16.830

17.952

22.440

38.469

292.889

240.278

168.088

122.844

72.831

30.015

17.796

12.817

6.915

3.842

2.254

1.391

18.0

17.820

19.008

23.760

40.731

310.117

254.412

177.975

130.070

77.115

31.781

18.842

13.571

7.322

4.068

2.387

1.473

19.0

18.810

20.064

25.080

42.994

327.346

268.546

187.863

137.296

81.400

33.547

19.889

14.324

7.729

4.294

2.519

1.555

20.0

19.800

21.120

26.400

45.257

344.575

282.680

197.750

144.522

85.684

35.312

20.936

15.078

8.136

4.520

2.652

1.637

21.0

20.790

22.176

27.720

47.520

361.803

296.814

207.638

151.748

89.968

37.078

21.983

15.832

8.543

4.746

2.784

1.719

22.0

21.780

23.232

29.040

49.783

379.032

310.948

217.525

158.974

94.252

38.843

23.030

16.586

8.949

4.972

2.917

1.801

23.0

22.770

24.288

30.360

52.046

396.261

325.082

227.413

166.200

98.536

40.609

24.076

17.340

9.356

5.198

3.050

1.883

24.0

23.760

25.344

31.680

54.309

413.490

339.216

237.300

173.426

102.821

42.375

25.123

18.094

9.763

5.424

3.182

1.964

25.0

24.750

26.400

33.000

56.571

430.718

353.350

247.188

180.653

107.105

44.140

26.170

18.848

10.170

5.650

3.315

2.046

26.0

25.740

27.456

34.320

58.834

447.947

367.484

257.075

187.879

111.389

45.906

27.217

19.602

10.576

5.876

3.447

2.128

27.0

26.730

28.512

35.640

61.097

465.176

381.618

266.963

195.105

115.673

47.671

28.264

20.356

10.983

6.102

3.580

2.210

28.0

27.720

29.568

36.960

63.360

482.405

395.752

276.850

202.331

119.957

49.437

29.310

21.110

11.390

6.328

3.713

2.292

29.0

28.710

30.624

38.280

65.623

499.633

409.886

286.738

209.557

124.242

51.203

30.357

21.864

11.797

6.554

3.845

2.374

30.0

29.700

31.680

39.600

67.886

516.862

424.020

296.625

216.783

128.526

52.968

31.404

22.618

12.204

6.780

3.978

2.455


200


Inverse characteristic


201


Very inverse curve

T

M

A

B I

D I

C

I0

I0

E 2

I

C

I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

3

I I0

C

A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505

2

1

tr = 4.678


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.5

2.339

2.495

3.119

5.346

5.970

4.924

3.487

2.582

1.567

0.663

0.386

0.268

0.130

0.073

0.051

0.041

1.0

4.678

4.990

6.237

10.693

11.940

9.848

6.975

5.164

3.134

1.325

0.772

0.537

0.260

0.146

0.102

0.082

2.0

9.356

9.980

12.475

21.385

23.881

19.696

13.949

10.327

6.268

2.650

1.545

1.074

0.520

0.291

0.204

0.163

3.0

14.034

14.970

18.712

32.078

35.821

29.544

20.924

15.491

9.402

3.976

2.317

1.611

0.780

0.437

0.306

0.245

4.0

18.712

19.959

24.949

42.770

47.762

39.393

27.898

20.655

12.537

5.301

3.090

2.148

1.040

0.583

0.408

0.326

5.0

23.390

24.949

31.187

53.463

59.702

49.241

34.873

25.819

15.671

6.626

3.862

2.685

1.299

0.728

0.510

0.408

6.0

28.068

29.939

37.424

64.155

71.642

59.089

41.848

30.982

18.805

7.951

4.635

3.221

1.559

0.874

0.612

0.489

7.0

32.746

34.929

43.661

74.848

83.583

68.937

48.822

36.146

21.939

9.276

5.407

3.758

1.819

1.020

0.714

0.571

8.0

37.424

39.919

49.899

85.541

95.523

78.785

55.797

41.310

25.073

10.602

6.179

4.295

2.079

1.165

0.815

0.652

9.0

42.102

44.909

56.136

96.233

107.464

88.633

62.771

46.474

28.207

11.927

6.952

4.832

2.339

1.311

0.917

0.734

10.0

46.780

49.899

62.373

106.926

119.404

98.481

69.746

51.637

31.341

13.252

7.724

5.369

2.599

1.457

1.019

0.815

11.0

51.458

54.889

68.611

117.618

131.344

108.330

76.721

56.801

34.475

14.577

8.497

5.906

2.859

1.602

1.121

0.897

12.0

56.136

59.878

74.848

128.311

143.285

118.178

83.695

61.965

37.610

15.902

9.269

6.443

3.119

1.748

1.223

0.978

13.0

60.814

64.868

81.085

139.003

155.225

128.026

90.670

67.128

40.744

17.228

10.041

6.980

3.379

1.893

1.325

1.060

14.0

65.492

69.858

87.323

149.696

167.165

137.874

97.645

72.292

43.878

18.553

10.814

7.517

3.638

2.039

1.427

1.141

15.0

70.170

74.848

93.560

160.389

179.106

147.722

104.619

77.456

47.012

19.878

11.586

8.054

3.898

2.185

1.529

1.223

16.0

74.848

79.838

99.797

171.081

191.046

157.570

111.594

82.620

50.146

21.203

12.359

8.591

4.158

2.330

1.631

1.304

17.0

79.526

84.828

106.035

181.774

202.987

167.419

118.568

87.783

53.280

22.528

13.131

9.127

4.418

2.476

1.733

1.386

18.0

84.204

89.818

112.272

192.466

214.927

177.267

125.543

92.947

56.414

23.853

13.904

9.664

4.678

2.622

1.835

1.468

19.0

88.882

94.807

118.509

203.159

226.867

187.115

132.518

98.111

59.549

25.179

14.676

10.201

4.938

2.767

1.937

1.549

20.0

93.560

99.797

124.747

213.851

238.808

196.963

139.492

103.275

62.683

26.504

15.448

10.738

5.198

2.913

2.039

1.631

21.0

98.238

104.787

130.984

224.544

250.748

206.811

146.467

108.438

65.817

27.829

16.221

11.275

5.458

3.059

2.141

1.712

22.0

102.916

109.777

137.221

235.237

262.689

216.659

153.441

113.602

68.951

29.154

16.993

11.812

5.718

3.204

2.243

1.794

23.0

107.594

114.767

143.459

245.929

274.629

226.507

160.416

118.766

72.085

30.479

17.766

12.349

5.977

3.350

2.344

1.875

24.0

112.272

119.757

149.696

256.622

286.569

236.356

167.391

123.930

75.219

31.805

18.538

12.886

6.237

3.496

2.446

1.957

25.0

116.950

124.747

155.933

267.314

298.510

246.204

174.365

129.093

78.353

33.130

19.310

13.423

6.497

3.641

2.548

2.038

26.0

121.628

129.737

162.171

278.007

310.450

256.052

181.340

134.257

81.487

34.455

20.083

13.960

6.757

3.787

2.650

2.120

27.0

126.306

134.726

168.408

288.699

322.391

265.900

188.314

139.421

84.622

35.780

20.855

14.497

7.017

3.933

2.752

2.201

28.0

130.984

139.716

174.645

299.392

334.331

275.748

195.289

144.584

87.756

37.105

21.628

15.034

7.277

4.078

2.854

2.283

29.0

135.662

144.706

180.883

310.085

346.271

285.596

202.264

149.748

90.890

38.431

22.400

15.570

7.537

4.224

2.956

2.364

30.0

140.340

149.696

187.120

320.777

358.212

295.444

209.238

154.912

94.024

39.756

23.173

16.107

7.797

4.370

3.058

2.446


202


Very inverse characteristic


203


Extremely inverse curve

T

M

B

A

I I0

D C

I I0

E 2

I

C

I0

tr

TDROPOUT : M

3

I I0

C

A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222

2

1

tr = 6.008


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.5

3.004

3.204

4.005

6.866

7.373

6.063

4.307

3.220

2.000

0.872

0.499

0.330

0.124

0.049

0.030

0.024

1.0

6.008

6.409

8.011

13.733

14.746

12.125

8.615

6.439

4.001

1.744

0.997

0.659

0.247

0.098

0.060

0.048

2.0

12.016

12.817

16.021

27.465

29.492

24.250

17.230

12.879

8.002

3.489

1.994

1.319

0.495

0.196

0.119

0.095

3.0

18.024

19.226

24.032

41.198

44.239

36.376

25.844

19.318

12.003

5.233

2.992

1.978

0.742

0.295

0.179

0.143

4.0

24.032

25.634

32.043

54.930

58.985

48.501

34.459

25.758

16.004

6.977

3.989

2.638

0.990

0.393

0.239

0.191

5.0

30.040

32.043

40.053

68.663

73.731

60.626

43.074

32.197

20.004

8.722

4.986

3.297

1.237

0.491

0.298

0.238

6.0

36.048

38.451

48.064

82.395

88.477

72.751

51.689

38.636

24.005

10.466

5.983

3.956

1.484

0.589

0.358

0.286

7.0

42.056

44.860

56.075

96.128

103.224

84.876

60.303

45.076

28.006

12.210

6.981

4.616

1.732

0.688

0.418

0.334

8.0

48.064

51.268

64.085

109.861

117.970

97.002

68.918

51.515

32.007

13.955

7.978

5.275

1.979

0.786

0.477

0.381

9.0

54.072

57.677

72.096

123.593

132.716

109.127

77.533

57.954

36.008

15.699

8.975

5.934

2.227

0.884

0.537

0.429

10.0

60.080

64.085

80.107

137.326

147.462

121.252

86.148

64.394

40.009

17.443

9.972

6.594

2.474

0.982

0.597

0.476

11.0

66.088

70.494

88.117

151.058

162.208

133.377

94.763

70.833

44.010

19.188

10.969

7.253

2.722

1.081

0.656

0.524

12.0

72.096

76.902

96.128

164.791

176.955

145.502

103.377

77.273

48.011

20.932

11.967

7.913

2.969

1.179

0.716

0.572

13.0

78.104

83.311

104.139

178.523

191.701

157.628

111.992

83.712

52.012

22.676

12.964

8.572

3.216

1.277

0.776

0.619

14.0

84.112

89.719

112.149

192.256

206.447

169.753

120.607

90.151

56.013

24.421

13.961

9.231

3.464

1.375

0.835

0.667

15.0

90.120

96.128

120.160

205.989

221.193

181.878

129.222

96.591

60.013

26.165

14.958

9.891

3.711

1.474

0.895

0.715

16.0

96.128

102.537

128.171

219.721

235.940

194.003

137.837

103.030

64.014

27.909

15.956

10.550

3.959

1.572

0.955

0.762

17.0

102.136

108.945

136.181

233.454

250.686

206.128

146.451

109.470

68.015

29.654

16.953

11.210

4.206

1.670

1.014

0.810

18.0

108.144

115.354

144.192

247.186

265.432

218.254

155.066

115.909

72.016

31.398

17.950

11.869

4.453

1.768

1.074

0.858

19.0

114.152

121.762

152.203

260.919

280.178

230.379

163.681

122.348

76.017

33.142

18.947

12.528

4.701

1.866

1.134

0.905

20.0

120.160

128.171

160.213

274.651

294.924

242.504

172.296

128.788

80.018

34.887

19.944

13.188

4.948

1.965

1.194

0.953

21.0

126.168

134.579

168.224

288.384

309.671

254.629

180.910

135.227

84.019

36.631

20.942

13.847

5.196

2.063

1.253

1.001

22.0

132.176

140.988

176.235

302.117

324.417

266.754

189.525

141.666

88.020

38.375

21.939

14.506

5.443

2.161

1.313

1.048

23.0

138.184

147.396

184.245

315.849

339.163

278.879

198.140

148.106

92.021

40.120

22.936

15.166

5.691

2.259

1.373

1.096

24.0

144.192

153.805

192.256

329.582

353.909

291.005

206.755

154.545

96.022

41.864

23.933

15.825

5.938

2.358

1.432

1.144

25.0

150.200

160.213

200.267

343.314

368.655

303.130

215.370

160.985

100.022

43.608

24.931

16.485

6.185

2.456

1.492

1.191

26.0

156.208

166.622

208.277

357.047

383.402

315.255

223.984

167.424

104.023

45.353

25.928

17.144

6.433

2.554

1.552

1.239

27.0

162.216

173.030

216.288

370.779

398.148

327.380

232.599

173.863

108.024

47.097

26.925

17.803

6.680

2.652

1.611

1.286

28.0

168.224

179.439

224.299

384.512

412.894

339.505

241.214

180.303

112.025

48.841

27.922

18.463

6.928

2.751

1.671

1.334

29.0

174.232

185.847

232.309

398.245

427.640

351.631

249.829

186.742

116.026

50.586

28.920

19.122

7.175

2.849

1.731

1.382

30.0

180.240

192.256

240.320

411.977

442.387

363.756

258.444

193.182

120.027

52.330

29.917

19.782

7.422

2.947

1.790

1.429


204


Extremely inverse characteristic


205


Moderately inverse curve

T

M

A

B I I0

D C

I I0

E 2

C

I I0

3

I I0

C

A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271

tr

TDROPOUT : M

2

1

tr = 1.2


M \ I/Io

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

40.00

0.5

0.600

0.640

0.800

1.371

4.872

3.128

1.679

1.114

0.675

0.379

0.286

0.239

0.166

0.123

0.104

0.095

1.0

1.200

1.280

1.600

2.743

9.744

6.256

3.357

2.229

1.351

0.757

0.571

0.478

0.332

0.247

0.209

0.191

2.0

2.400

2.560

3.200

5.486

19.489

12.511

6.714

4.457

2.702

1.515

1.142

0.955

0.665

0.493

0.417

0.382

3.0

3.600

3.840

4.800

8.229

29.233

18.767

10.072

6.686

4.053

2.272

1.713

1.433

0.997

0.740

0.626

0.572

4.0

4.800

5.120

6.400

10.971

38.977

25.023

13.429

8.914

5.404

3.030

2.285

1.910

1.329

0.986

0.835

0.763

5.0

6.000

6.400

8.000

13.714

48.722

31.278

16.786

11.143

6.755

3.787

2.856

2.388

1.662

1.233

1.043

0.954

6.0

7.200

7.680

9.600

16.457

58.466

37.534

20.143

13.371

8.106

4.544

3.427

2.866

1.994

1.479

1.252

1.145

7.0

8.400

8.960

11.200

19.200

68.210

43.790

23.500

15.600

9.457

5.302

3.998

3.343

2.327

1.726

1.461

1.335

8.0

9.600

10.240

12.800

21.943

77.954

50.045

26.857

17.828

10.807

6.059

4.569

3.821

2.659

1.972

1.669

1.526

9.0

10.800

11.520

14.400

24.686

87.699

56.301

30.215

20.057

12.158

6.817

5.140

4.298

2.991

2.219

1.878

1.717

10.0

12.000

12.800

16.000

27.429

97.443

62.557

33.572

22.285

13.509

7.574

5.712

4.776

3.324

2.465

2.087

1.908

11.0

13.200

14.080

17.600

30.171

107.187

68.813

36.929

24.514

14.860

8.332

6.283

5.253

3.656

2.712

2.295

2.099

12.0

14.400

15.360

19.200

32.914

116.932

75.068

40.286

26.742

16.211

9.089

6.854

5.731

3.988

2.958

2.504

2.289

13.0

15.600

16.640

20.800

35.657

126.676

81.324

43.643

28.971

17.562

9.846

7.425

6.209

4.321

3.205

2.713

2.480

14.0

16.800

17.920

22.400

38.400

136.420

87.580

47.001

31.199

18.913

10.604

7.996

6.686

4.653

3.451

2.921

2.671

15.0

18.000

19.200

24.000

41.143

146.165

93.835

50.358

33.428

20.264

11.361

8.567

7.164

4.986

3.698

3.130

2.862

16.0

19.200

20.480

25.600

43.886

155.909

100.091

53.715

35.656

21.615

12.119

9.139

7.641

5.318

3.945

3.339

3.052

17.0

20.400

21.760

27.200

46.629

165.653

106.347

57.072

37.885

22.966

12.876

9.710

8.119

5.650

4.191

3.547

3.243

18.0

21.600

23.040

28.800

49.371

175.398

112.602

60.429

40.113

24.317

13.633

10.281

8.597

5.983

4.438

3.756

3.434

19.0

22.800

24.320

30.400

52.114

185.142

118.858

63.787

42.342

25.668

14.391

10.852

9.074

6.315

4.684

3.965

3.625

20.0

24.000

25.600

32.000

54.857

194.886

125.114

67.144

44.570

27.019

15.148

11.423

9.552

6.647

4.931

4.173

3.815

21.0

25.200

26.880

33.600

57.600

204.630

131.369

70.501

46.799

28.370

15.906

11.994

10.029

6.980

5.177

4.382

4.006

22.0

26.400

28.160

35.200

60.343

214.375

137.625

73.858

49.027

29.720

16.663

12.565

10.507

7.312

5.424

4.591

4.197

23.0

27.600

29.440

36.800

63.086

224.119

143.881

77.215

51.256

31.071

17.421

13.137

10.985

7.645

5.670

4.799

4.388

24.0

28.800

30.720

38.400

65.829

233.863

150.136

80.572

53.484

32.422

18.178

13.708

11.462

7.977

5.917

5.008

4.579

25.0

30.000

32.000

40.000

68.571

243.608

156.392

83.930

55.713

33.773

18.935

14.279

11.940

8.309

6.163

5.217

4.769

26.0

31.200

33.280

41.600

71.314

253.352

162.648

87.287

57.941

35.124

19.693

14.850

12.417

8.642

6.410

5.425

4.960

27.0

32.400

34.560

43.200

74.057

263.096

168.903

90.644

60.170

36.475

20.450

15.421

12.895

8.974

6.656

5.634

5.151

28.0

33.600

35.840

44.800

76.800

272.841

175.159

94.001

62.398

37.826

21.208

15.992

13.373

9.306

6.903

5.843

5.342

29.0

34.800

37.120

46.400

79.543

282.585

181.415

97.358

64.627

39.177

21.965

16.564

13.850

9.639

7.149

6.051

5.532

30.0

36.000

38.400

48.000

82.286

292.329

187.671

100.716

66.855

40.528

22.722

17.135

14.328

9.971

7.396

6.260

5.723


206


Moderately inverse characteristic


207


II.3. USER CURVE 23B

The corresponding time for every I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times correspond to index 1 curve, but as in Curves IEC, the user can program a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the Overcurrent protection setting. It is not necessary to program all the points of thetemplate The console will assign the time of the first programmed point to all I/Ia that are lower than itself. It will also assign the time of the last point programmed to all the I/Ia higher than itself. That is, the diagram will start and finish with horizontal straight lines. The halfway points between two programmed points will be calculated by the Console as a lineal interpolation between them. Programming is not allowed for a I/Ia value in a time higher to the corresponding one to I/Ia, that is, increasing lines are not allowed. Programmingthe template:


208


An example is shown below :

I/Ia

2

4

8

12

15

T (s)

200

100

70

50

5


209

LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS

APPENDIX III. LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS The following list includes all the available signals in the complete PL300 family. For each model of the family only the signals corresponding to its available functions will be applied. In the case of Procome Protocol it can be programmed which of the signals are sent to control, as well as the number they are sent with. The number indicated is that the signals had in the versions it was fixed.

Signal Nº 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

Signal Phase instantaneous pickup (50) Ground instantaneous pickup (50N) Sensitive ground instantaneous pickup (50SN) Phase instantaneous pickup High 1 (50H1) Ground instantaneous pickup High 1 (50NH1) Phase instantaneous pickup High 2 (50H2) Ground instantaneous pickup High 2 (50NH2) Sensitive ground instantaneous pickup High 2 (50NSH2) Phase timed pickup (51) Ground timed pickup (51N) Sensitive ground timed pickup (51SN) Phase timed pickup High 2 (51H2) Ground timed pickup High 2 (51NH2) Sensitive ground timed pickup High 2 (51SNH2) Isolated ground pickup (67IN) Thermal image alarm (49) Phase instantaneous trip (50) Ground instantaneous trip (50N) Sensitive ground instantaneous trip (50SN) Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1) Ground instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1) Phase instantaneous trip High 2 (50H2) Ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NH2) Sensitive ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NSH2) Phase timed trip (51) Ground timed trip (51N) Sensitive ground timed trip (51SN) Phase timed trip High 2 (51H2) Ground timed trip High 2 (51NH2) Sensitive ground timed trip High 2 (51SNH2) Isolated ground trip (67IN) Thermal image trip (49) Unbalance timed trip (46T) Unbalance instantaneous trip (46) Broken conductor trip (46BC) Breaker failure trip (50BF) Unbalance timed pickup (46T) Unbalance instantaneous pickup (46) Broken conductor pickup (46BC) Breaker failure pickup (50BF) Activation 50V (50V) Activation 51V (51V) Cold Load Pickup (CLP) Overcurrent pickup (50x/51x/46x) Overcurrent trip (50x/51x/46x) Phase A overcurrent trip (50A/51A) Phase B overcurrent trip (50B/51B)


210


Signal Nº 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106

Signal Phase C overcurrent trip (50C/51C) Phase overvoltage timed trip (59) Phase undervoltage timed trip (27) Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59) Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (27) Ground overvoltage timed trip (64T) Ground overvoltage instantaneous trip (64) Voltage unbalance trip (47T) Phase reversal trip (47) Phase overvoltage timed pickup (59) Phase undervoltage timed pickup (27) Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59) Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (27) Ground overvoltage timed pickup (64T) Ground overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64) Voltage unbalance pickup (47T) Phase reversal pickup (47) Relay in service Recloser in service Ongoing cycle Definitive trip Excessive number of trips Recloser locking Retrolocking (50x) kI2 exceeded (average 3 poles) kI2 exceeded pole A kI2 exceeded pole B kI2 exceeded pole C Open springs automatism Closure permission by syncrocheck (25) Instantaneous cancellation output (of the recloser) Voltage pickup (27/59/64/47) Voltage trip (27/59/64/47) Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input 8 Digital output 1 Digital output 2 Digital output 3 Digital output 4 Digital output 5 Digital output 6 Digital output 7 Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1) Digital input 9 Digital input 10 Digital input 11 Digital input 12 Digital input 13 Digital input 14 Digital input 15 Digital input 16 Digital input 17 Digital output 8 Digital output 9


211


Signal Nº 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166

Signal Digital output 10 Digital output 11 Digital output 12 Digital output 13 Digital output 14 Logic output 1 logic output 2 Logic output 3 Logic output 4 Logic output 5 Logic output 6 Logic output 7 Logic output 8 Logic output 9 Logic output 10 Phase HIGH CURRENT pickup (50HC) Ground HIGH CURRENT pickup (50NHC) Phase HIGH CURRENT trip (50HC) Ground HIGH CURRENT trip (50NHC) Reclosure Automatism: Voltage presence Breaker open failure Breaker close failure Breaker close command Breaker open command General pickup General trip Breaker closed (52status) Oscillograph recorder pickup Fuse failure pickup Fuse failure activation LOCAL status Trip circuit 1 failure Trip circuit 2 failure Close circuit 1 failure Close circuit 2 failure HW status Minimum power trip Maximum power trip High Maximum power trip Low Power reversal trip High Power reversal trip Low Reactive power reversal trip High Reactive power reversal trip Low Power trip Minimum power pickup Maximum power trip pickup High Maximum power trip pickup Low Power reversal pickup High Power reversal pickup Low Reactive power reversal pickup High Reactive power reversal pickup Low Power pickup Frequency trip level 1 Frequency trip level 2 Frequency trip level 3 Frequency trip level 4 Frequency trip level 5 df/dt trip level 1 df/dt trip level 2


212


Signal Nº 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226

Signal df/dt trip level 3 df/dt trip level 4 Frequency pickup level 1 Frequency pickup level 2 Frequency pickup level 3 Frequency pickup level 4 Frequency pickup level 5 Frequency trip Trip by df/dt Phase instantaneous trip Zone 2 (50Z2) Phase instantaneous trip Zone 3 (50Z3) Ground instantaneous trip Zone 2 (50NZ2) Ground instantaneous trip Zone 3 (50NZ3) Phase instantaneous pickup Zone 2 (50Z2) Phase instantaneous pickup Zone 3 (50Z3) Ground instantaneous pickup Zone 2 (50NZ2) Ground instantaneous pickup Zone 3 (50NZ3) Breaker failure pickup phase A Breaker failure pickup phase B Breaker failure pickup phase C Breaker failure pickup ground Breaker failure trip phase A Breaker failure trip phase B Breaker failure trip phase C Breaker failure trip ground Minimum apparent power pickup Maximum apparent power pickup High Maximum apparent power pickup Low Minimum apparent power trip Maximum apparent power trip High Maximum apparent power trip Low 50BF-Retrip. (Breaker failure function) 50BF-Retrip phase A 50BF-Retrip phase B 50BF-Retrip phase C 50BF-Dead zone pickup 50BF-Dead zone trip 50BF-BF in load pickup 50BF-BF in load 2 trip 50BF-BF in Load 1 trip 50BF-Load 1 trip phase A 50BF-Load 1 trip phase B 50BF-Load 1 trip phase C 52-Breaker close failure A 52-Breaker close failure B 52-Breaker close failure C 50BF-Internal arc pickup (I) 50BF-Internal arc trip (I) 50BF-Arc pickup phase A (I) 50BF-Arc pickup phase B (I) 50BF-Arc pickup phase C (I) 50BF-Arc trip phase A (I) 50BF-Arc trip phase B (I) 50BF-Arc trip phase C (I) 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole A 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole B 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole C 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole A 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole B 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole C


213


Signal Nº 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 to 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315

Signal 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole A 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole B 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole C 50BF-Flashover 1 trip 52 50BF-Flashover 2 trip 52 85 Teleprotection protection 85 Unconditional trip 85 RTP Reception 85 Teleprotection Emission: ETP 85 Teleprotection stop Regulator locking 85 Guard signal reception: RSG Counter set to 0 Forward phase A Reverse phase A Forward phase B Reverse phase B Forward phase C Reverse phase C Forward Ground Reverse Ground Forward Sens. ground Reverse Sens. ground 79f-Freq. Recl. locked 79f-Freq. Recl. In service 79f-Freq. reclosure 79f-Freq. Ongoing cycle 79f-Freq. Definitive trip 79f-Instantaneous cancellation Free 50BF-trip BF low load 50BF- retrip BF low load 50BF- pick up BF low load Discordance pick up Discordance trip Definite opening Pole A failure Pole B failure Pole C failure Overcurrent pickup without sensitive neutral Overcurrent trip without sensitive neutral General pickup without sensitive neutral General trip without sensitive neutral Table 1 active Table 2 active Table 3 active Table 4 active Recloser status Status of the phase instantaneous function (low level) Status of the phase instantaneous function H1 (high level) Status of the phase instantaneous function H2 (2nd group) Status of the phase time function Status of the phase time function H2 (2nd group) Status of the ground time function (low level) Status of the ground instantaneous function H1 (high level) Status of the ground instantaneous function H2 (2nd group) Status of the ground time function Status of the ground time function H2 (2nd group) Status of the sensitive neutral instantaneous function Status of the sensitive neutral instantaneous function H2 (2nd group)


214


Signal Nº 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 to 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 to 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388

Signal Status of the sensitive neutral time function Status of the sensitive neutral time function H2 (2nd group) Status of the time unbalance function Status of the instantaneous unbalance function Status of the breaker conductor function Status of the breaker failure function Status of the isolated ground function Status of the cold load function Exceeded 20 I nominal in phase A Presence of voltage side A Presence of voltage side B On-going cycle 1 On-going cycle 2 On-going cycle 3 On-going cycle 4 Manual close security T.1st reclosure security T. 2nd reclosure security T. 3rd reclosure security T. 4th reclosure security T. Signal 1 Relay 1 (Horizontal Communic. between relays) Signal 2 Relay 1 Signal 3 Relay 1 Signal 4 Relay 1 Signal 5 Relay 1 Signal 6 Relay 1 Signal 7 Relay 1 Signal 8 Relay 1 Communication failure Relay 1 Communication failure Relay 2 Test mode Manual closing function locking Protection function locking Command order 8 Reserved FF FR Directional retrolocking Non-directional retrolocking Retrolocking Pretrip Retrotrip Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 RTS Control Table 5 active Table 6 active Low supply Free Supply higher than the upper threshold Supply lower than the low threshold Temperature higher than the upper threshold Temperature lower than the low threshold 2nd harmonic restraint phase A 2nd harmonic restraint phase B 2nd harmonic restraint phase C 2nd harmonic restraint phase ground


215


Signal Nº 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 to 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 to 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 to 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 to 536 537 538

Signal MHO 1 trip MHO 2 trip MHO 1 alarm MHO 2 alarm MHO 1 undervoltage MHO 2 undervoltage Free Pending events IRIG-B failure Exceeded 2 I nominal Exceeded 5 I nominal Exceeded 12 I nominal Pushbutton I Pushbutton O Pushbutton L/R Pushbutton Pushbutton 0 Pushbutton 1 Pushbutton 2 Pushbutton 3 Pushbutton 4 Pushbutton 5 Pushbutton 6 Pushbutton 7 Pushbutton 8 Pushbutton 9 Close locking through DI Free 25-voltage difference 25-current difference 25-angle difference 25-Syncrocheck locked 79I-Recloser in idle Free Close locking by command or digital input Status-Sequence coordination Ground status Sensitive neutral status Phase instantaneous status Neutral, sensitive neutral status Free Exceeded 2*In in phase B Exceeded 5*In in phase B Exceeded 12*In in phase B Exceeded 20*In in phase B Exceeded 2*In in phase C Exceeded 5*In in phase C Exceeded 12*In in phase C Exceeded 20*In in phase C Signal 1 Relay 2 (Horizontal Communic. among relays) Signal 2 Relay 2 Signal 3 Relay 2 Signal 4 Relay 2 Signal 5 Relay 2 Signal 6 Relay 2 Signal 7 Relay 2 Signal 8 Relay 2 Reserved Command order 1 Command order 2


216


Signal Nº 539 540 541 542 543 544 to 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 to 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607

Signal Command order 3 Command order 4 Command order 5 Command order 6 Command order 7 Free Directional phase Trip Directional neutral Trip Directional Sen.n Trip Directional nais Trip Directional N/NS/Nais Trip Directional Trip Directional Unbalance Trip Status of the Thermal Imagen Status of the Syncrocheck Free 27-UnderV Pick.Phase A 27-UnderV Pick.Phase B 27-UnderV Pick.Phase C 27-UnderV Trip Phase A 27-UnderV Trip Phase B 27-UnderV Trip Phase C 59-OverV Pick.Phase A 59-OverV Pick.Phase B 59-OverV Pick.Phase C 59-OverV Trip Phase A 59-OverV Trip Phase B 59-OverV Trip Phase C 37-Low Current Pickup L1 37-Low Current Trip level 1 37-Low Current Pickup L2 37-Low Current Trip level 2


217

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU

APPENDIX IV. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU This function allows communicating with a remote control station, using the communication protocol DNP3 at the level of control messages. The unit behaves as a remote position RTU. The format by character is:

 1 start bit.  8 data bits.  1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.  1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bit. The baud rate can be selected among 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.

IV.1. SETTINGS 24B

Associated text LCU. ADDRESS MASTER ADDRESS BAUD RATE PARITY T. STOP BITS FIXED RTS RTS AND CTS

CTS WAIT T.

POR. WAIT T.

STABIL T.

POSTRANS T.

ACK WAIT T.

SYNCHRON. T

ACK LINK

APLIC. BYTES No

Meaning Word type parameter. It allows identifying the number of remote station. Range 0 - 65532. Default value 1. Word type parameter. It allows identifying the master station address. Range 0 - 65532. Default value 0. This word type parameter allows to set the baud rate : 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 - 38400) bauds. Default value 9600 It allows configuring the parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or none parity. The advised default value is none parity, as indicated in DNP3 protocol. It allows selecting the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits The advised default value is 1 stop bit, as indicated in DNP3 protocol. When its value is YES the RTS signal is kept permanently active. Default value NO. It allows to select if the control if pins RTS and CTS is performed: NO, RTS+CTS, RTS Default value NO It indicates the time in milliseconds, which is being waited for the CTS activation, after the RTS activation. Range 0 - 3000. Default value 200. It indicates the time, in milliseconds, which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with the objective to stabilise the carrier. Range 0 - 3000. Default value 40. Waiting time to transmit after reception, in milliseconds. Range 0 - 3000. Default value 40. Time elapsed from the moment the last character is sent until the RTS is deactivated (in milliseconds). Range 0 - 3000. Default value 40. Waiting timeout to confirm the csc link. Range 0 - 1000. Default value 500. Required time in minutes to ask the master for synchronization Range 0 - 10. Default value 0. Indicates if confirm is required al link level. SI = confirm is required. NO = confirm. is not required Default value NO. Maximum number of bytes in an application segment. Range 1024 - 3072. Default value 1024.


218


Associated text

CHANGES TIME

FROZEN T.

STATUS SENDING

MEAS. BIT No.

COUNTER BIT No.

NOT REQ. MESS. PR.COLLISION

COL FIXED T.

COL.VBLE T.

RESENDING T.

NOT REQ. MAX. NUM.

SPECIAL

Meaning Transfer time of the default changes. It can take the following values: BOTH = sent with absolute and relative values. WITHOUT TIME = sent without time. ABSOLUTE = sent with absolute time. RELATIVE = sent with relative time. Default value ABSOLUTE. It indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. It performs only in the case that a 0 variation is requested. WITH TIME = sent with time. WITHOUT TIME = sent without time. Default value WITH TIME. It indicates if in the answer message to a class 0 data request, the objects of digital signals, measurements and counters with or without status are sent. Value 0->it does not send status for any signal. bit 0-> to one it is sent all with status. bit 1->it sends digital signals with status. bit 2->it sends measurements with status. bit 3->it sends counters with status. bit 4->it sends frozen counters with status. There are two ways to send everything with status: to write a 1 or a 14 Default value 0 It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the request, and as non requested changes. 16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits. 32 BITS = they are sent in 32 bits. Default value 16 BITS. It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the request, and as non requested changes. 16 BITS = it is sent in 16 bits. 32 BITS = it is sent in 32 bits. Default value 32 BITS. At value YES it allows the transfer of non requested messages with class data 1, 2 or 3. Default value NO. At value YES a treatment is performed to prevent collisions. At value NO the DCD is not checked. Default value NO. Waiting time set in hundredths of second which the unit waits since it is allowed to transfer through the DCD. Range 0 - 1000. Range 0 - 1000. Default value 10. Variable waiting time. Depending on the selected value it can be obtained the maximum value which can be reached by the hundredths of seconds. This value will be a random value between 0 and such maximum. Possible values: 1-3-5-7-15-31-63-127-255 Note: it must be highlighted that the time delay is reset once the DCD is lost. Default value 7. It is the time in seconds in which the unit waits to try again the transfer of non requested data, when it does not receive the link confirmation and the application to an old transfer and its reattempt after the answer waiting time. Range 0 630 seconds Default value 20. Maximum number of repetitions of a non requested message. At infinite zero value. Range 0 - 65535. Default value 0. It allows activating some particular aspects of the operation. BIT 0->0x0001 Transfer of actual counters with OBJ=21. BIT 1->0x0002 Reserve. BIT 2->0x0004 Transfer of non requested message up to the included IIN every 10 seconds BIT 3->0x0008 Reserve. BIT 4->0x0010 Reserve. BIT 5->0x0020 Reserve. BIT 6->0x0040 It does not transfer the restart message when starting. BIT 7->0x0080 Trip close. Default value 0.


219


Associated text MEASUREMENT FORMAT

DNP REPORT FAULT

Meaning It indicates the measurements transfer format. COUNTS (4096 is the background scale) SECONDARY (absolute value in the secondary) PRIMARY(absolute value in the primary) Indicates whether you want to enable sending DNP report faults. YES =. Enable sending fault report. NO = Disable sending fault report. Default value NO.

IV.2. OPERATION INDICATIONS 25B

IV.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating 273B

At RTU starting, in the case that the transfer of spontaneous non requested messages is enabled, it will be sent a spontaneous and empty message which activates the bit corresponding to the IIN RESTART requiring application confirmation. It will stop transferring when receiving the application confirmation with the correct application sequence number. For the repetition times associated to this message, they will be applied as for the rest of the spontaneous messages, except in the number of reattempts before cancelling the message, this means that the setting NOT REQ. MAX is not considered in this message.

IV.2.2 Synchronization 274B

The bit corresponding to Need Time in the IIN is activated periodically according to the value of the setting SYNCHRON. T.

IV.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes 275B

It is maintained a circular queue of 1024 changes which stores the changes in the signals in order to transfer them to the control centre. Changes of digital signals by communications can be filtered by configuring 0 class; this can be done for individual signals or for all. No changes are detected at the starting of the unit and until it does not start communicating. The setting ERASE DATA ? does not act over the DNP3 protocol.

IV.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages 276B

For the transfer of spontaneous messages, if there are any messages stored in the different classes of changes, the priority of classes will be followed, this means that the queue class 1 is emptied first, then the class 2 and last the class 3. If the parameter NOT REQ. MESSAGES at value 1 is not found, no spontaneous message is sent. A treatment of collisions will be performed depending on the parameter COLLISION PREV. The signal DCD is used along with the parameters COL. FIXED T and COL.VBLE. T. In the case that no answer is obtained to the messages of non requested changes, a reattempt will be performed once expired the time defined by the parameter ACK. WAIT T. Then periodical transfers will be performed according to the parameter RESEND T. Each time a message is repeated, all the new changes will be included in it, so that the message is created again at each repetition.

IV.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation 27B

Only one reading or writing order can be selected or executed each time.


220


The selection of orders and writings will be kept during 15sc. There is a queue of digital signals changes. If frozen counters are requested and these have not been frozen previously, they are answered at value 0 and with time set to 0. In the event of receiving a request for any system static object and this does not exist, it will be answered up to the IIN and indicating an unknown object.


221


IV.3. DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT 26B

DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Vendor Name: INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION S.A. Device Name: SIPC Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests Level 3 For Responses Level 3 Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024<>3072( configurable) Received 292 Received 1024 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Fixed at 1 Configurable, range __ to __ Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable PARAMETER DATA_ACK = 1 Requires Application Layer Confirmation: When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Fragment None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable Application Confirm None Fixed at __10 sg____ Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Response None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable Others Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Latch On Never Always Sometimes Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Queue Never Always Sometimes Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation) Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable (attach explanation) Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable

Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time explanation) Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change

Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD


222


DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value _____________ Point-by-point list attached

Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) Default Object _________ Default Variation ______ Point-by-point list attached Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

Yes

No

IV.4. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE 27B

OBJECT Obj 1 1 1

Var 0 1 2

Description Binary Input All Variations Binary Input Binary Input with Status

2

0

Binary Input Change - All Variations

2 2 2 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22

1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4

Binary Input Change without Time Binary Input Change with Time Binary Input Change with Relative Time Binary Output - All Variations Binary Output Binary Output Status Control Block - All Variations Control Relay Output Block Pattern Control Block Pattern Mask Binary Counter - All Variations 32-Bit Binary Counter 16-Bit Binary Counter 32-Bit Delta Counter 16-Bit Delta Counter 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag Frozen Counters - All Variations 32-Bit Frozen Counter 16-Bit Frozen Counter 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag Counter Change Event All Variations 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time

REQUEST (slave must parse) Func Codes (dec) 1,22 1 1 1 20*,21* 1 1 1 1

Qual Codes (hex) 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 06,07,08 06 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 00,01,06

1

RESPONSE (master must parse) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex) 129 129

00,01 00,01

129, 130 129, 130 129, 130

28 28 28

00,01,06

129

00,01

3, 4, 5, 6

17, 28

129

Echo of request

1, 7, 8,9, 10,22 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1, 22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 00,01,06 06,07,08 06,07,08 06,07,08 06, 07, 08 06, 07, 08

129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129

00,01 00,01 00,01 00,01 00, 01 00, 01 00,01 00,01

129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129

00,01 00,01 00,01 00,01 00, 01 00, 01 00,01 00,01 00,01 00,01 00,01 00,01

129, 130 129, 130 129 129

28 28 28 28


223


OBJECT Obj 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

Var 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time Frozen Counter Events All Variations 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time Analog Input - All Variations 32-Bit Analog Input 16-Bit Analog Input 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 16-Bit Analog Input without flag Frozen Analog Input - All Variations 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag

32

0

Analog Change Event - All Variations

32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 40 40 40 41 41 50

1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 1 2 0

32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time ** 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time Frozen Analog Event - All Variations 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time Analog Output Status - All Variations 32-Bit Analog Output Status 16-Bit Analog Output Status 32-Bit Analog Output Block 16-Bit Analog Output Block Time and Date - All Variations

50

1

Time and Date

50 51 51 51 52 52 52 60 60

2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1

Time and Date with Interval Time and Date CTO - All Variations Time and Date CTO Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO Time Delay - All Variations Time Delay Coarse Time Delay Fine Not Defined Class 0 Data

60

2

Class 1 Data

60

3

Class 2 Data

60

4

Class 3 Data

REQUEST (slave must parse) Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex)

RESPONSE (master must parse) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)

1 1 1 1 1

06, 07, 08 06, 07, 08 06, 07, 08 06, 07, 08 06, 07, 08

129 129 129 129 129

28 28 28 28

1, 22 1 1 1 1

00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08 00,01,06, 07,08

129 129 129 129

00, 01 00,01 00, 01 00, 01

1 20*,21* 1 1

06,07,08 06 06,07,08 06,07,08

129, 130 129, 130 129

28 28 28

1 1 1

00, 01, 06 00, 01, 06 00, 01, 06

129 129

00,01 00,01

3, 4, 5, 6

17, 28

129

Echo of request

2 1

07 quantity = 1 07 quantity = 1

129

07 quantity = 1

129 129

07, quantity=1 07, quantity=1

129

07, quantity=1

1 1 20, 21,22 1 20, 21, 22 1 20, 21, 22

06 06,07,08 06 06,07,08 06 06,07,08 06


224


OBJECT Obj 70

Var Description 1 File Identifier

80

1

81 82 83 83 90 100 100 100 101 101 101

1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3

Internal Indications

Storage Object Device Profile Private Registration Object Private Registration Object Descriptor Application Identifier Short Floating Point Long Floating Point Extended Floating Point Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal No Object No Object * IBM compatibility. ** Only used for sending fault report.

REQUEST (slave must parse) Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex)

RESPONSE (master must parse) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)

1 2

129

00, 01 00index=7

00

13, 14 23

IV.5. SIGNAL LIST 28B

IV.5.1 Digital signals 278B

The signals transmitted and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among the available ones. The programming is carried out through the SIPCON/P Protection Console. In the list below, the digital signals used (changes and states) are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the factory. Each model will only be applied those corresponding to the functions it has.

ID-DNP Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable

Default ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Signal Phase instantaneous pick up (50) Ground instantaneous pick up (50N) Sensitive ground instantaneous pick up (50NS) Phase instantaneous pick up High 1 (50H1) Ground instantaneous pick up High 1 (50NH1) Phase instantaneous pick up High 2 (50H2) Ground instantaneous pick up High 2 (50NH2) Sensitive ground instantaneous pick up High 2 (50NSH2) Phase time pick up (51) Ground time pick up (51N) Sensitive ground time pick up (51NS) Phase time pick up High 2 (51H2) Ground time pick up High 2 (51NH2) Sensitive ground time pick up High 2 (51NSH2) Isolated ground pick up (67NA) Thermal image warning(49) Phase instantaneous trip (50) Ground instantaneous trip (50N) Sensitive ground instantaneous trip (50NS) Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1) Ground instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1) Phase instantaneous trip High 2 (50H2) Ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NH2) Sensitive ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NSH2)


225


ID-DNP Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable

Default ID 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83

Signal Phase time trip (50) Ground time trip (50N) Sensitive ground time trip (50NS) Phase time trip High 2 (51H2) Ground time trip High 2 (51NH2) Sensitive ground time High 2 (51NSH2) Isolated ground trip (67NA) Thermal image trip (49) Unbalance time trip (46T) Unbalance instantaneous trip (46I) Broken conductor trip (46BC) Breaker failure trip (50BF) Unbalance time pick up (46T) Unbalance instantaneous pick up (46I) Broken conductor pickup (46 BC) Breaker failure pickup (50BF) Activation 50V (50V) Activation 51V (51V) Cold load pick up (CL) Overcurrent pick up (50x/51x/46x) Overcurrent trip(50x/51x/46x) Overcurrent trip Phase A (50A/51A) Overcurrent trip Phase B (50B/51B) Overcurrent trip Phase C (50C/51C) Phase overvoltage time trip (59) Phase undervoltage time trip (59) Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59) Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (59 Ground overvoltage time trip (64T) Ground overvoltage instantaneous trip (64) Voltage unbalance trip (47T) Phase reverse trip (47) Phase overvoltage time pickup (59) Phase undervoltage time pickup (59) Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59) Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (59) Ground overvoltage time pickup (64T) Ground overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64) Voltage unbalance pick up(47T) Phase reverse pick up (47) Relay in service Recloser in service On-going cycle Definite trip Excessive number of trips Recloser locking Retrolocking (50x) Exceeded kI2 (average 3 poles) Exceeded kI2 pole A Exceeded kI2 pole B Exceeded kI2 pole C Automation open springs Close permission by syncrocheck (25) Output by instantaneous cancellation (of the recloser) Voltage pick up (27/59/64/47) Voltage trip (27/59/64/47) Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4


226



Default ID 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

Signal Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input 8 Digital output 1 Digital output 2 Digital output 3 Digital output 4 Digital output 5 Digital output 6 Digital output 7 Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1) Digital input 9 Digital input 10 Digital input 11 Digital input 12 Digital input 13 Digital input 14 Digital input 15 Digital input 16 Digital input 17 Digital output 8 Digital output 9 Digital output 10 Digital output 11 Digital output 12 Digital output 13 Digital output 14 Logic output 1 Logic output 2 Logic output 3 Logic output 4 Logic output 5 Logic output 6 Logic output 7 Logic output 8 Logic output 9 Logic output 10 High Current phases pick up (50HC) High Current Ground pick up (50NHC) High Current phases trip (50HC) High Current Ground trip (50NHC) Recloser Automation: Voltage presence Breaker open failure Breaker close failure Breaker close command Breaker open command General pick up General trip Close breaker (state 52) Oscillograph pickup Fuse failure pick up Fuse failure activation LOCAL state Trip circuit 1 failure Trip circuit 2 failure Close circuit 1 failure Close circuit 2 failure HW state


227



Default ID 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203

Signal Minimum power trip Maximum power trip High Maximum power trip Low Power reverse trip High Power reverse trip Low Reactive power reverse trip High Reactive power reverse trip Low Power trip Minimum power pick up Maximum power pick up High Maximum power pick up Low Power reverse pick up High Power reverse pick up Low Reactive power reverse pick up High Reactive power reverse pick up Low Power pick up Frequency trip level 1 Frequency trip level 2 Frequency trip level 3 Frequency trip level 4 Frequency trip level 5 Trip df/dt level 1 Trip df/dt level 2 Trip df/dt level 3 Trip df/dt level 4 Frequency pick up level 1 Frequency pick up level 2 Frequency pick up level 3 Frequency pick up level 4 Frequency pick up level 5 Frequency trip df/dt trip Instantaneous trip phases zone 2 (50Z2) Instantaneous trip phases zone 3 (50Z3) Instantaneous trip ground zone 2 (50NZ2) Instantaneous trip ground zone 3 (50NZ3) Instantaneous pick up phases zone 2 (50Z2) Instantaneous pick up phases zone 3 (50Z3) Instantaneous pick up ground zone 2 (50NZ2) Instantaneous pick up ground zone 3 (50NZ3) Breaker failure pick up BF phase A Breaker failure pick up BF phase B Breaker failure pick up BF phase C Breaker failure pick up BF ground Breaker failure trip BF phase A Breaker failure trip BF phase B Breaker failure trip BF phase C Breaker failure trip BF ground Apparent minimum power pick up Apparent maximum power pick up High Apparent maximum power pick up Low Apparent minimum power trip Apparent maximum power trip High Apparent maximum power trip Low 50BF-Retrip. (Breaker failure function) 50BF-Retrip Phase A 50BF- Retrip Phase B 50BF- Retrip Phase C 50BF-Dead zone pick up 50BF-Dead zone trip


228


ID-DNP Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable

Default ID 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243

Signal 50BF- BF pick up on load 50BF- BF pick up on load 2 50BF- BF trip on load 1 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase A 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase B 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase C 52-Breaker closure failure A 52- Breaker closure failure B 52- Breaker closure failure C 50BF-Flashover pickup (I) 50BF-Flashover trip (I) 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase A (I) 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase B (I) 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase C (I) 50BF-Flashover trip Phase A (I) 50BF- Flashover trip Phase B (I) 50BF- Flashover trip Phase C (I) 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole A 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole B 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole C 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole A 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole B 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole C 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole A 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole B 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole C 50BF- Flashover trip 1 52 50BF- Flashover trip 2 52 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Forward phase A Reverse phase A Forward phase B Reverse phase B

Programmable

244

Forward phase C

Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable

245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263

Reverse phase C Forward Ground Reverse Ground Forward Sens Ground Reverse Sens Ground 79f-Reclos. Freq. Locked 79f-Reclos.Freq. in service 79f-Frequency recloser 79f-Ongoing cycle frequency 79f-Definitetrip Freq. 79f-Instantaneous cancellation Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free


229



Default ID 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323

Signal Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Overcurrent pickup without Sen. ground Overcurrent trip without Sen. ground General pickup without Sen. ground General trip without Sen. ground Table 1 active Table 2 active Table 3 active Table 4 active Recloser Status Phase instantaneous status Phase instantaneous status H1 Phase instantaneous status H2 Phase time status Phase time status H2 Ground instantaneous status Ground instantaneous status H1 Ground instantaneous status H2 Ground time status Ground time status H2 Sensitive ground instantaneous status Sensitive ground instantaneous H2 Sensitive ground time status Sensitive ground time H2 Time unbalance status Instantaneous unbalance status Broken conductor status Breaker failure status Isolated ground status Cold load status


230



Default ID 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381

Signal Over 20*In Phase A Presence of voltage on side A Presence of voltage on side B On-going cycle 1 On-going cycle 2 On-going cycle 3 On-going cycle 4 Manual close security T. 1st recloser security T. 2nd recloser security T. 3rd recloser security T. 4th recloser security T. Signal 1 Relay 1 (Horizontal Communic. among relays) Signal 2 Relay 1 Signal 3 Relay 1 Signal 4 Relay 1 Signal 5 Relay 1 Signal 6 Relay 1 Signal 7 Relay 1 Signal 8 Relay 1 Communication failure. Relay 1 Communication failure. Relay 2 TEST MODE Manual closing function locking Free Free Free Free Free Free FF FR Directional retrolocking Non-directional retrolocking Pre-locking Pre-trip Retrotrip Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 RTS Control Table 5 active Table 6 active Low supply Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Supply higher than the upper threshold


231



Default ID 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 to 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504

Signal Supply lower than the low threshold Temperature higher than the upper threshold Temperature lower than the low threshold 2nd harmonic restraint phase A 2nd harmonic restraint phase B 2nd harmonic restraint phase C 2nd harmonic restraint ground MHO 1 trip MHO 2 trip MHO 1 alarm MHO 2 alarm MHO 1 undervoltage MHO 2 undervoltage Free Free Free Exceeded 2*In in phase A Exceeded 5*In in phase A Exceeded 12*In in phase A Pushbutton I Pushbutton O Pushbutton L/R Pushbutton · Pushbutton 0 Pushbutton 1 Pushbutton 2 Pushbutton 3 Pushbutton 4 Pushbutton 5 Pushbutton 6 Pushbutton 7 Pushbutton 8 Pushbutton 9 Close locking through DI Free 25-Voltage difference 25-Frequency difference 25-Angle difference 25-Syncrocheck locked 79I-Recloser in idle Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Closing locking due to command or digital input Status-Sequence coordination Status ground Status sensitive ground Status phase instantaneous Status ground instantaneous and sensitive ground Free Free


232



Default ID 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564

Signal Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Exceeded 2*In in phase B Exceeded 5*In in phase B Exceeded 2*In in phase B Exceeded 20*In in phase B Exceeded In in phase C Exceeded 5*In in phase C Exceeded 12*In in phase C Exceeded 20*In in phase C Signal 1 Relay 2 (Horizontal Communic. among relays) Signal 2 Relay 2 Signal 3 Relay 2 Signal 4 Relay 2 Signal 5 Relay 2 Signal 6 Relay 2 Signal 7 Relay 2 Signal 8 Relay 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Command order 1 Command order 2 Command order 3 Command order 4 Command order 5 Command order 6 Command order 7 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free


233


ID-DNP Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable

Default ID 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607

Signal Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Directional phase Trip Directional neutral Trip Directional Sen.n Trip Directional nais Trip Directional N/NS/Nais Trip Directional Trip Directional Unbalance Trip Thermal image status Sincrocheck status Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free 27-UnderV Pick.Phase A 27-UnderV Pick.Phase B 27-UnderV Pick.Phase C 27-UnderV Trip Phase A 27-UnderV Trip Phase B 27-UnderV Trip Phase C 59-OverV Pick.Phase A 59-OverV Pick.Phase B 59-OverV Pick.Phase C 59-OverV Trip Phase A 59-OverV Trip Phase B 59-OverV Trip Phase C 37-Low Current Pickup L1 37-Low Current Trip level 1 37-Low Current Pickup L2 37-Low Current Trip level 2

IV.5.2 Analogue measurements 279B

The signals transmitted and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among the available ones. The programming is carried out through the SIPCON/P Protection Console. In the list below, the digital signals used (changes and states) are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the factory. Each model will only be applied those corresponding to the functions it has. Vn is the programmed nominal current. DNP ID Program. Program. Program. Program.

Default 0 1 2 3

Format Counts Counts Counts Counts

Scale range 6 (A) Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2

Data Not allocated Current maximeter Syncrocheck module V Module VA


234


DNP ID Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program.

Default 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Format Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts

Scale range Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2

Program.

44

Counts

286 for source of 125/220 Vdc 62.4 for source of 24/48 Vdc

Vdc measurement

Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program Program. Program. Program. Program.

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts

4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6

Total number of opening 52 Total counter of reclosers 1st recloser counter 2nd recloser counter 3rd recloser counter 4th recloser counter Number of opening 52 by trip P (Active Power) phase A P (Active Power) phase B P (Active Power) phase C

3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2 3 *Vn * 1,2

6 6 6 6 6 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 70 70 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 Vn * 1,2 6 6 6 6 Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2 Vn * 1,2 100 (%) 100 (º)

Data Module VB Module VC Module VAVERAGE Module VAB (compound voltage) Module VBC (compound voltage) Module VCA (compound voltage) Module VCAVERAGE (compound voltage) Module IN Module IA Module IB Module IC Module IAVERAGE P (Active power) Q (Reactive power) S (apparent power) Frequency Syncrocheck Frequency Power factor phase A Power factor phase B Power factor phase C Average power factor Distortion in IC Distortion in IB Distortion in IA Distortion in VC Distortion in VB Distortion in VA Average distortion in current Average distortion in voltage Sensitive ground current Ground voltage Isolated ground current I Single pole sequence I Direct sequence I Reverse sequence I Single pole sequence V Direct sequence V Reverse sequence V Fault distance Unit temperature


235


DNP ID Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program.

Default 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74

Format Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts

Scale range Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 Vn * 1,2 * 6 200 200 200 200 10 4095 4095 4095 Vn * 1,2 * 20

Data Q (Reactive Power) phase A Q (Reactive Power) phase B Q (Reactive Power) phase C P (Maximum active power) Q (Maximum reactive power) P Maximum phase A P Maximum phase B P Maximum phase C Q Maximum phase A Q Maximum phase B Q Maximum phase C I last fault phase A I last fault phase B I last fault phase C I last fault ground I last fault sensitive neutral kI2 sum pole A kI2 sum pole B kI2 sum pole C Impedance module

The scale range indicated corresponds to the count number of 4095

IV.5.3 Counters 280B

DNP_ID 0 1 2 3

Format Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute

value value value value

Data Positive active energy counter (W+) Negative active energy counter (W-) Positive reactive energy counter (VAR+) Negative reactive energy counter (VAR-)

IV.5.4 Commands 281B

The commands to be sent and their order can be programmed among the following DNP_ID Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program.

default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 22

Data Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Activate relay Open breaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14


236


DNP_ID Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program. Program.

default 24 26 28 30 60 61 62 63 64 65 87

Data Close breaker Set recloser in service Set recloser out of service Set in LOCAL mode Activate table 1 Activate table 2 Activate table 3 Activate table 4 Activate table 5 Activate table 6 Switch off LEDs

IV.6. DNP FAULT REPORT The following table shows the information that is collected for each fault occurred. For each fault are sent all the measures included in the table. These data are only sent when the setting "DNP Report faults" is set to "YES". All fields of the table are sent as measures to a Class 2 data read. It responds with the obj 32, var 3. The class of these measures is not modifiable. Each measure is dated with the date of the fault. Measurement number 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142

Measurement Fault number Fault phase A Current Fault phase B Current Fault phase C Current Fault Neutral Current Fault phase A voltage (Module VA) Fault phase B voltage (Module VB) Fault phase C voltage (Module VC) Fault Neutral voltage (Ground voltage) Relay operating time Breaker operating time Flag of the operated phase Fault Distance Event (trip or start) Operation

IV.6.1 Fault number Faults are numbered from 0. When the fault queue is reset, the fault number is set to 0.

IV.6.2 Fault current and fault voltage measures These measures can be transfered in 3 different formats: counts, secondary (calculated) and primary. The format is selected with the setting "Measurements format" screen "DNP3 general". IV.5.2Analogue measurements 279B

When secondary format or primary format are choosen, the range and number of decimal places as are fixed with DNP measurement range is set to 0 the measure will be invalid.


237


IV.6.3 Relay operating time This measure gives the time of fault duration in milliseconds. This time covers from start of the fault until it ends.

IV.6.4 Breaker operating time This measure gives the time it takes to actuate the breaker. It is expressed in milliseconds. This time ranges from the time the trip is given to the time the relay checks that the breaker has been opened. If at the trip time, the breaker is open, the time given is 0. If the fault is extinguished and the switch is still closed, the time given is from the trip to the end of the fault.

IV.6.5 Flag of the operated phase Displays the phase or phases that have been involved in the relay trip. This is possible when the protection function is associated with a phase. For example instantaneous and time delay functions. Protections such as thermal image, frequency and unbalance are not associated with a particular phase. The trip of these In case that there is no phase associated tripping cause, a zero value is given. A zero value is also indicated as valid. Phase associated tripping cause C B A No No No No No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Flag Validity Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid

IV.6.6 Fault Distance This measure can be transfered in 3 different formats: counts, secondary (calculated) and primary. The format is selected with the setting "Measurements format" screen "DNP3 general". When counts IV.5.2Analogue measurements fault distance is given in% of the 120% of the line length. 279B

the background scale value. The

When secondary format or primary format are choosen, the range and number of decimal places as are fixed with DNP measurements settings. These settings are on the s measurement range is set to 0 the measure will be invalid. The fault locator can work in kilometers or miles. Length units are chosen by the enable setting in the "Fault Locator" screen. The fault distance is expressed in the units selected for this adjustment.

IV.6.7 Event (trip or start) Indicates whether the fault has been generated by a pickup of the functions (0) or by a trip (1).

IV.6.8 Operation Gives the ANSI C.37.2 code of the function triggered. When the fault causes the trip of two or more protection functions, the table below priority order is followed. The highest priority function is the first listed in the table bellow.


238


Example:

If a "Phase C overcurrent time delay" trip (51) and an "Time delay unit of current negative sequence" trip (46) occur in the same fault, the value 51 is given. Overcurrent time delay function has higher priority than the current negative sequence function. Tripped unit Operation Validity Phase C overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid Phase B overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid Phase A overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid Phase C overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid Phase B overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid Phase A overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid Neutral time delay unit 51 Valid Neutral instantaneous 50 Valid Sensitive neutral time delay unit 51 Valid Sensitive neutral instantaneous 50 Valid Isolated neutral 50 Valid Residual current or neutral unbalance 50 Valid Phase discontinuity or phases negative sequence 46 Valid Time delay unit of current negative sequence 46 Valid Current negative sequence instantaneous 46 Valid Phase A overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid Phase B overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid Phase C overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid Phase A overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid Phase B overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid Phase C overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid Neutral overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid Neutral overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid Phase A undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid Phase B undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid Phase C undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid Phase A undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid Phase B undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid Phase C undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid Undervoltage side A and B 27 Valid Voltage negative sequence 47 Valid Thermal overload 49 Valid Frequency level 1 81 Valid Frequency level 2 81 Valid Frequency level 3 81 Valid Frequency level 4 81 Valid Frequency level 5 81 Valid Frequency derivatived level 1 81 Valid Frequency derivatived level 2 81 Valid Frequency derivatived level 3 81 Valid Frequency derivatived level 4 81 Valid Underpower 37 Valid High-Set Overpower 32 Valid Low-Set Overpower 32 Valid High-Set Reverse Power 32 Valid Low-Set Reverse Power 32 Valid High-Set Reverse Reactive Power 32 Valid Low-Set Reverse Reactive Power 32 Valid Aparent Underpower 32 Valid High-Set Aparent Overpower 32 Valid Low-Set Aparent Overpower 32 Valid Teleprotection 85 Valid Undercurrent 37 Valid Restricted ground 87 Valid Neutral unbalance 1 50 Valid Neutral unbalance 2 50 Valid MHO 1 21 Valid


239


Tripped unit MHO 2 Breaker Failure Dead Zone Long start Successive starts Voltage phases Reversing High current lockout

Operation 21 50 50 48 66 0 0

Validity Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Invalid Invalid


240

MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

APPENDIX V. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL The communications module MODBUS RTU implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as slave station with a master position via the rear communication port (RS232, RS485 or Optical fibre).

V.1. PROTOCOL CHARACTERISTICS 29B

V.1.1 Message format 28B

Master question: Remote address

-

1 byte

Function code

-

1 byte

Data

-

variable number of bytes

CRC

-

2 byte

Remote address

-

1 byte

Function code

-

1 byte

Data

-

variable number of bytes

CRC

-

2 byte

Slave answer:



Remote address: PL300 address in respect to the Modbus protocol (range 1 to 255). Only broadcast messages are accepted (address 0) for synchronization with the function 16.



Function code : If >127 (Byte MSB at 1) means that the remote address has not fulfilled the required function and it is going to respond with an error code.



Data : Each data word is sent MSByte first, followed by LSByte.



CRC : LSByte is sent first, followed by MSByte.



CRC generator polynomy:



x16 + x15 + x2 +1

V.1.2 MODBUS functions 283B

The following functions are used within the defined by the MODBUS protocol: 

03

Read Setpoints and Actual Values



04




(functions 03 and 04 are used without distinction)



05

Execute Operation



07

Read Device Status



08

Loopback Test



16

Store Multiple Setpoints


241


V.1.3 Message examples 284B

Function codes 03 and 04


Reading of settings, digital status, measurements and counters. Example : Remote address : 01 Address : 0400 - Data : 00aa Address : 0401 - Data : 00ff Question : Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

Function code

1 byte

-

03

Data address

-

Example (hex)

2 bytes

04

data address

00 Data number

-

2 bytes

-

00

Data number (words)

02 CRC

-

2 bytes

-

xx xx

Answer: Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

03

Function code

-

Example (hex)

Bytes counter

-

1 byte

-

04

2 records = 4 bytes

Data1

-

2 bytes

-

00

Value in 0400

aa Data2

-

2 bytes

-

00

Value in 0401

ff CRC

-

2 byte

-

xx xx

Function 05 code

Execute Operation

Execute operation. Example : Remote address 01


242


Code operation : 01 (Command number 1) Question : Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

05

2 byte

-

00

Function code

-

Operation code

Operation range

2 byte

-

Command 1

00 -

CRC

Example (hex)

ff

Execute command

00

2 byte

-

xx

xx Answer : Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

05

Function code

-

Operation code -

2 byte

-

Value

-

2 byte

01

Command 1

00

2 byte -

CRC

Example (hex)

-

ff

-

xx

Execute command

00

xx

Function code 07

Read Device Status

Reading of the protection status. Question : Description

Bytes

Example (hex)

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

Function code

-

1 byte

-

07

CRC

-

2 byte

-

xx

xx

Answer: Description

Bytes

Example (hex)


243


Remote address

1 byte

-

01

Function code

-

1 byte

-

07

Status

-

1 byte

-

04

CRC

-

2 byte

-

xx

xx

Function 08 code

Loopback Test

Link state test (communications). Question: Description Remote address -

Bytes 1 byte

-

Function code Code

Example (hex)

-

01

1 byte

-

08

2 byte

-

00 must be 0

00 Data

-

2 byte

-

00 must be 0

00 CRC

-

2 byte

-

xx

xx Answer: Description

Bytes

Example (hex)

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

Function code

-

1 byte

-

08

Code

-

2 byte

-

00 must be 0

00 Data

-

2 byte

-

00 must be 0

00 CRC

-

2 byte

-

xx

xx

Function 16 code


Writing of protection values Example1: Command execution Remote address: 01 Address : 0080 - Data1: 0001 (Command1)


244


Question: Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

10

2 bytes

-

10

Data address

00

Data number (words)

Function code

-

Data initial address -

Example (hex)

00 Data number

-

2 bytes

-

02 (bytes) Bytes counter

-

Data1

1 byte

-

04

2 registers = 4 bytes

2 bytes

-

02

(bytes)

01 (Command 1) CRC

-

2 bytes

-

xx


Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

10

2 bytes

-

00

Function code

-


Example (hex)

80 Data number

-

2 bytes

-

00

01 (Words) CRC

-

2 bytes

-

xx

xx Example2: Unit date and timesynchronization Synchronize the date : 16/04/08 and time 15:38:00 Remote address:: 01 Address: 00F0 - Data1: 0000 (millisecondss) Address: 00F1 - Data 2: 0F26 (hour and minutes) Address: 00F2 - Data 3: 0410 (month and day) Address: 00F3 - Data 4: 0008 (- year)

Question: Description

Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

Example (hex) -

01


245


Function code

-


1 byte

-

10

2 bytes

-

00

F0 Data number

-

2 bytes

-

00

04 (Words) Bytes counter Data1

-

1 byte

-

08

2 bytes

-

00

(bytes)

00 Data 2

-

2 bytes

-

0F (hours)

26 (minutes) Data 3

-

2 bytes

-

04 (month)

10 (day) Data 4

-

2 bytes

-

00

08 (year) CRC

-

2 bytes

-

xx


Bytes

Remote address

1 byte

-

01

1 byte

-

10

Function code

-

Data initial address 2 bytes

Example (hex)

-

00 F0

Data number

-

2 bytes

-

00

04 (Words) CRC

-

2 bytes

-

xx

xx

V.1.4 Unit status request 285B

It is made with function: 07

Read Device Status

The unit status byte contains following information: 

Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter



Bit 1 : Non critical error



Bit 2 : Critical error



Bit 3 : Protection in service

The same information can be obtained by reading the address 000Ah.


246


V.1.5 Change request of digital signals 286B

There is a mechanism which allows to collect information of all digital signals changes along with the time instant when they occurred. By reading the address 5000h it can be obtained the number of pending changes in the buffer. From the address 5002h a buffer is available, where the 25 oldest unit changes can be read. Once received a message of changes, writing the value 0 in the address 5001h the master position validates the changes sent in the message. It is always demanded that the request comes with the initial address of the buffer of changes (5002h). The number of words is required to be multiple of 5 (it must be read blocks of complete changes). It can not be asked for more data than the buffer size or than the number of changes in queue (it means, if there is only one pending change, it is not possible to ask for two). Given that the maximum number of words which can be sent in a message is 127 (limited for the field of number of bytes in 1 byte), the buffer of changes is sized to contain 25 changes. 25 changes * 5 words / change = 125 words. (250 bytes). To know how many changes there are in a zone of changes reading it must be done a reading of the number of pending changes in the buffer through a reading of the address 5000h. In the low byte of the read register we will find the number of pending changes (which will be a number between 0 and 25) and in the byte 15 of the register it can be read the overflow indication of the changes in queue (for value 1 an overflow in the changes queue has occurred). Afterwards, changes can be requested up to the maximum number previously indicated. To validate the changes received we must write the value 0 in the address 5001h through the function 16. This writing makes possible that the changes in the remote station are considered as sent; otherwise the remote station would consider them again as pending. If the remote station had more changes, which would be indicated in the value of the number of pending changes and the master station could request them by repeating the process. To collect all the changes of the remote station, the process would have to continue until the reading of the pending changes indicates value 0. Structure format of a digital change : Changes : IDC + Binary time

IDC

:=

CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}

IDENTIF :=

UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>

CHANGE

:=

BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}

with

Res

:=

BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)

V

:=

BS 1[13] <0..1>

<0>

:=

Valid status

<1>

:=

Not valid status

:=

BS 1[14] <0..1>

<0>

:=

Status as "0" after the change

<1>

:=

Status as "1" after the change

:=

BS 1[15] <0..1>

<0>

:=

E

v

The validation bit V has not changed


247


e

<1>

:=

The validation bit V has changed

:=

BS 1[16] <0..1>

<0>

:=

The status bit E has not changed

<1>

:=

The status bit E has changed

With these two bytes and by assigning a code for each signal, it is identified each digital signal of control which has suffered any change and which is transmitted with the control measurements, as well as what has changed in the digital signal and the status and validation after the change. CP56Time2a:=CP56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2, Summer time, Day of the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4} This binary time is defined in the section 6.8 of the document IEC 870-5-4. The day of the week corresponding to value 1 is Sunday. The complete structure of the change has therefore the following format:

TIME CP56Time2a IDC

IDENFTIF e

v

E

V

Reserve

IDENTIF

Milliseconds (LSByte) Milliseconds (MSByte) IV RES1 Minutes (6 bits) SU RES2 HOURS (5 bits) DAY WEEK (3 bits) DAY OF THE MONTH (5 bits) RES3 MES (4 bits) RES4 YEAR (7bits)

V.1.6 Data request by user map 287B

The user map allows the non consecutive registers reading in a single message. It has an address zone (from the address 0180h, 124 registers) and a values zone in the user map (from the address 0100h , 124 records). In the address zone it must be written through the function 16 the addresses of those registers we wish to read.. Through the reading of the data zone, the data, whose addresses have been configured, could be read. It could be read or written from any of the user map addresses, as long as the end of them is not exceeded. It is demanded that the read addresses of the user map have associated a valid address in its address zone (this type of request is limited to the data zone: signals, Measurements and counters, addresses starting from 0400, 0440 and 0540 respectively).

V.1.7 Synchronization 28B

From address 00f0h : Address 00f0h 00f1h 00f2h 00f3h

MSB Milliseconds Hours Month -

LSB Milliseconds Minutes Day Year


248


The unit synchronization is made by function16, written on the address indicated and always the 4 words. It does not allow the partial writing of any data, the writing of the whole structure is always required. The unit does not correct at all the received value, and that is why the central position will must take into account the delay communication channel to correct the value of the date and hour sent. In such address the unit current time can also be read. Any address can be read, as long as the range does not exceed over the address 00f3h.

V.1.8 Command execution 289B

The command execution can be performed in two ways; with function 05 or with function 16. command number To execute a command through function 16, the command code must be written in the command address (0080h). Only 1 register writing is accepted.

V.1.9 Error codes 290B

The unit can send following error codes in answer to a message: 01 - Non implemented function 02 - Illegal address in the data field (reserved address or non valid range for required operation) 03 -> Illegal data value

Causes for error code sending: 

Reading function (03, 04) :

 It can not be read more than 127 registers: 03 -> Illegal data value 

Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field.

 Number of data required exceeds the allowed range according to data type: 03 -> Illegal data value  Change request where the number of registers is not multiple of 5 or it exceeds the number of change data: 03 -> Illegal data value

 Data request through user map with a non configured or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field 

Writing function (16) :

 

-> Illegal data value Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field

 Configuration of the user map with a reserved or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field

V.2. PARAMETERS 30B

The following parameters can be accessible through keyboard/display: Address of remote station : Address in respect to the protocol MODBUS/RTU. Value between 1 and 255 (broadcast address 0 non admitted). Baud rate : Value between 300 and 38400 bauds.


249


Parity : Even parity or without parity Waiting time for the RTS activation: Waiting delay after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 1000 msec. Waiting time for carrier stabilization: Waiting delay once activated the RTS signal before transmitting the first character of the message. Value between 0 and 1000 msec. For the case of RS485 this waiting delay is necessary and it must have a minimum value of 4 msec. Value between 0 and 1000 msec. Waiting time for deactivation of RTS : Waiting delay after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 4 and 1000 msec.

Console it is located among the general settings of the DNP.

V.3. UNIT ADDRESSES MAP 31B

Address (hex) 0000 - 0007 0008 0009 000A 0080 00F0 00F1 00F2 00F3 0100 017C 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406.. 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 0445 0446 0447 0048.. 0540 0542 0544 0546 0548... 5000

Description Unit identification Internal code Software version (charac 1) Software version(charac 2) Protection status Command address (Write Only) Command code to execute System date and Hour Milliseconds Hours and Minutes Month and Day Year User map User map values (124 values) User map addresses (124 values) Reading zone Digital status 1 Digital status 2 Digital status 3 Digital status 4 Digital status 5 Digital status 6 Digital status reserve Measurement 1 (see "Measurements to control") Measurement 2 Measurement 3 Measurement 4 Measurement 5 Measurement 6 Measurement 7 Measurement 8 Measurements reserve Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter reserve Zone of status changes in digital signals Number of changes waiting to be sent

Range

Step Unit

Format Default value

F03 F03 F09 F10 0-59999 0-24 / 0-59 0-12 / 0-31 0-99

F11 F12 F13 F14

F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095

to to to to to to to to

4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095

0-4294967295 0-4294967295 0-4294967295 0-4294967295

0 ..25

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal

F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 F02 F02 F02 F02 F02 F01


250


Address (hex) 5001 5002 HF

Description Validation of the sent changes (Write Only)) Digital changes reading zone (125 registers) Free memory zone Free

Range 0

Step Unit

Format Default value F01 F22 --

Measurements starting from the address 0440h will be the ones to be programmed. The order in which they are sent is also programmable. The programming is carried out through the Protections console SIPCON/P. It is allowed up to a maximum of 64 values The value of the measurements sent can be found in internal units (value between 4095 and 4095). Each value will have associated a scale range which could permit obtaining the value in physical units. In the same way, the digital states and the order in which they are sent can also be programmed, as well as the commands. For more information about the available magnitudes as well as their scale ranges consult the section: Other Functions -> Control Messages.

V.4. DATA FORMATS 32B

Name F01 F02 F03

Format 16 bits without sign 32 bits without sign 16 bits

F04

16 bits without sign

F05


F06


F07

16 bits

F08

16 bits

F09

16 bits

F10

16 bits

Description Range: 0... 65535 Range: 0... 4294967295 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register) Compacted bit (Bit to 1 activated indication) Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter Bit 1 : Non critical error Bit 2 : Critical error Bit 3 : Protection in service Bit 4 to 15 : Not used Value : Associated command 0 : Command 0 1 : Command 1 ... n : Command n Range : 0 .. 59999 Bit 0 to 7 : Minutes (Value between 0 and 59) Bit 8 to 15 : Hours (Value between 0 and 23) Bit 0 to 7 : Day (Value between 1 and 31) Bit 8 to 15 : Month (Value between 1 and 12) Bit 0 to 7 : Year (Value between 0 and 99) Bit 8 to 15 : Value 0, not used Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 0 Bit 1 : Digital signal 1 Bit 2 : Digital signal 2 Bit 3 : Digital signal 3 Bit 4 : Digital signal 4 Bit 5 : Digital signal 5 Bit 6 : Digital signal 6 Bit 7 : Digital signal 7 Bit 8 : Digital signal 8 Bit 9 : Digital signal 9 Bit 10 : Digital signal 10 Bit 11 : Digital signal 11 Bit 12 : Digital signal 12 Bit 13 : Digital signal 13 Bit 14 : Digital signal 14 Bit 15 : Digital signal 15


251


Name

Format

F11

16 bits

F12

16 bits

F13

16 bits

Description Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 16 Bit 1 : Digital signal 17 Bit 2 : Digital signal 18 Bit 3 : Digital signal 19 Bit 4 : Digital signal 20 Bit 5 : Digital signal 21 Bit 6 : Digital signal 22 Bit 7 : Digital signal 23 Bit 8 : Digital signal 24 Bit 9 : Digital signal 25 Bit 10 : Digital signal 26 Bit 11 : Digital signal 27 Bit 12 : Digital signal 28 Bit 13 : Digital signal 29 Bit 14 : Digital signal 30 Bit 15 : Digital signal 31 Compacted bit (Bit for 1activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 32 Bit 1 : Digital signal 33 Bit 2 : Digital signal 34 Bit 3 : Digital signal 35 Bit 4 : Digital signal 36 Bit 5 : Digital signal 37 Bit 6 : Digital signal 38 Bit 7 : Digital signal 39 Bit 8 : Digital signal 40 Bit 9 : Digital signal 41 Bit 10 : Digital signal 42 Bit 11 : Digital signal 43 Bit 12 : Digital signal 44 Bit 13 : Digital signal 45 Bit 14 : Digital signal 46 Bit 15 : Digital signal 47 Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 48 Bit 1 : Digital signal 49 Bit 2 : Digital signal 50 Bit 3 : Digital signal 51 Bit 4 : Digital signal 52 Bit 5 : Digital signal 53 Bit 6 : Digital signal 54 Bit 7 : Digital signal 55 Bit 8 : Digital signal 56 Bit 9 : Digital signal 57 Bit 10 : Digital signal 58 Bit 11 : Digital signal 59 Bit 12 : Digital signal 60 Bit 13 : Digital signal 61 Bit 14 : Digital signal 62 Bit 15 : Digital signal 63


252


Name

Format

F14

16 bits

F15

16 bits

F16

16 bits

Description Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 64 Bit 1 : Digital signal 65 Bit 2 : Digital signal 66 Bit 3 : Digital signal 67 Bit 4 : Digital signal 68 Bit 5 : Digital signal 69 Bit 6 : Digital signal 70 Bit 7 : Digital signal 71 Bit 8 : Digital signal 72 Bit 9 : Digital signal 73 Bit 10 : Digital signal 74 Bit 11 : Digital signal 75 Bit 12 : Digital signal 76 Bit 13 : Digital signal 77 Bit 14 : Digital signal 78 Bit 15 : Digital signal 79 Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal) Bit 0 : Digital signal 80 Bit 1 : Digital signal 81 Bit 2 : Digital signal 82 Bit 3 : Digital signal 83 Bit 4 : Digital signal 84 Bit 5 : Digital signal 85 Bit 6 : Digital signal 86 Bit 7 : Digital signal 87 Bit 8 : Digital signal 88 Bit 9 : Digital signal 89 Bit 10 : Digital signal 90 Bit 11 : Digital signal 91 Bit 12 : Digital signal 92 Bit 13 : Digital signal 93 Bit 14 : Digital signal 94 Bit 15 : Digital signal 95 Analogical value (value in internal units) MEA:=CP 16{OV, ER, Res, VALUE, S} with OV:=BS 1[1] not used always <0>) ER:=BS 1[2] <0..1> <0>:=VALUE valid <1>:=VALUE not valid Res:=BS 1[3] not used (always <0>) VALUE:= F 12[4..15] <0..+1-2-12> S:=BS 1[16] <0>:=VALUE positive <1>:=VALUE negative The overflow bit (Overflow, OV) is not used and is set to "0". In the event of VALUE overflow this is set to its maximum positive value, 4095. The maximum VALUE can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the nominal value.


253


Name

Format

F17

80 bits

Description Digital change structure (5 words) IDC + Binary time Byte 0..1: Change identifier IDC:=CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE} IDENTIF:=UI 10[1..10] <0..1023> CHANGE:=BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e} with Res:= BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>) V:= BS 1[13] <0..1> <0> := Valid state <1> := Non-valid state E:= BS 1[14] <0..1> <0> := State at "0" after the change <1> := State at "1" after the change v:= BS 1[15] <0..1> <0> := Validation bit V has not changed <1> := Validation bit V has changed e:= BS 1[16] <0..1> <0> := State bit E has not changed <1> := State bit E has changed Byte 2..8: Binary time in 7 octets. CP56Time2a:=CP 56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2,Summer schedule, Day of the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4} Byte 9 : Not used (For more details consult the section about request of digital signal changes)


254

IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

APPENDIX VI. IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL This function allows the communication with a pilot control centre, using the IEC 870-5-101communication protocol at a control message level. It cannot be used by RS485 port. The unit behaves as a remote RTU port. The format by character is the following one:



1 start bit



8 information bits



1 parity bit selectionable between no-parity, even parity or odd parity.



1 stop bit, selectionable between 1 and 2 stop bit.

The baud rate will be selected among 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.

VI.1. SETTINGS 3B

Console text

Display text

Link address

LINK. ADD.

Application Address

APPLIC. ADD.

Balanced mode

BALANCED

Baud rate

BAUDS

Channel Type

T.CHANNEL

Parity

PARITY

Stop bits

STOP BITS

RTS/CTS Control

RTS_CTS

Activation waiting time WAIT.CTS CTS (csec) Carrier waiting time (csec)

T.WAIT.CARR. T.

Meaning It allows the identification of the remote station number at a link level. Value between 0 and 65534. Default value 1. It allows the identification of the remote station number in the messages at an application level. Value between 0 and 65534. Default value 1. It indicates if the communication is established in a balanced way (1) or in a non-balanced (0). Default value 1. This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate. Possible values: 0-38400, 1-19200, 2-9600, 3-4800, 4-2400, 5-1200, 6300 bauds. Default value 2. This word-type parameter allows the available communication channel type. 0-Direct 1-By phone Default value 0. It allows the selection of the type of parity that will be used in the communication. 0 Even parity 1 Without parity 2 Odd parity Default value 0. It allows selecting the number of stop bits 0 - 1 stop bit 2 - 2 stop bits Default value 0. It allows selecting if RTS and CTS pin control is carried out. 0 - No. 1 Yes Default value 0. It shows the time, in cents of seconds, in which the function waits for the CTS activation, after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000. Default value 0. It shows the time, in cents of seconds, which has to be waited once the CTS is activated, in order to start the transmission, with the aim of stabilizing the carrier. Value between 0 and 500. Default value 0.


255


Console text

Display text

RTS activation time (csec)

ACT.RTS T.

RTS deactivation time (csec)

DEACT.RTS. T.

Response waiting time WAIT. RESP T. (csec)

Minimum time between transmissions T.BETWEEN TRANSM. (csec)

Transmission number

TRANSM N. LONG.DIR_A LONG.CAA LONG.COT LONG.IOA

Time format

TIME FORMAT

Measurements with time

MEASUREMENTS T

Counters with time

COUNTERS T.

Simple signal address

SP ADDRESS

Event address

EV ADDRESS

Double signal address

DP ADDR.

Measurement address

MEAS. ADDR.

Transformers tap address

TAP ADDR.

Meaning Waiting time for transmitting after having received in csec. Value between 0 and 500. Recommended values: 600 bauds - 4 csec. 1200 bauds - 3 csec. 2400, 4800 y 9600 bauds - 2csec. Default value 0. Waiting time for the deactivation of RTS after transmitting (csec). Value between 0 and 500. Recommended values: 600 bauds - 4 csec. 1200 bauds - 3 csec. 2400, 4800 y 9600 bauds - 2csec. Default value 0. Waiting time for the confirmation¡ of received message (Csec). Value between 1 and 500.. Default value 100. Minimum time that has to be elapsed (csec) between two consecutive transmissions. Value between 1 and 100. Recommended values: 600 y 1200 bauds - 2 csec. 2400 bauds 3 csec. 4800, 9600 y 19200 bauds - 5csec. 38400 bauds 6 csec. Default value 6. It shows the number of times a sent message is transmitted to control centre in case there is no confirmation. Value between 0 and 5. Default value 2. Number of bytes in Address Field of the Link. Value between 1 and 2. Default value 2. Number of bytes in Common addresses Field of Asdu. Value between 1 and 2. Default value 2. Number of bytes in the Cause of Transmission Field. Value between 1 and 2. Default value 1. Number of bytes in the Information Object Address Field. Value between 1 and 3. Default value 3. Time format to be used in the chronological changes: 0 without time 1 3 bytes. Format CP24time2a 2 5 bytes. Format CP40time2a 3 7 bytes. Format CP56time2a Default value 1. It shows if in the change message, the time in which the change has occurred is sent (1) or not (0). Default value 0. It shows in the counter spontaneous frozen message, the time in which the freezing has occurred is sent (1) or not (0). Default value 0. First SP type information object address or simple signal. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First EV type information object address or event. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First DP type information object address or double signal. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First MED type information object address or analogue measurement. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First TAP type information object address or transformer intake measurement. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0.


256


Console text

Display text

Counter address

COUNT. ADDR.

Bitstrings address

BIT ADDR.

Simple command address C

OC ADDR.

Simple command address C0

OC0 ADDR.

Double command address C1

OC1 ADDR.

Double command address C2

OC2 ADDR.

Measurement parameter address

PAR ADDR.

Queue full indication address

FULL ADDR.

Queue half- full indication address

HALF-FULL ADDR

GPS indication address

GPS ADDR.

GPS synchronized indication address

SINCR ADDR.

Queue full (%)

% FULL

Queue empty (%)

% EMPTY

Event update position

WORD EVENTS

Command execution mode

COMMAND MODE

Order return information usage

COMMAND INF.

Meaning First counter type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First bitstring type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First type C simple order type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First type C0 simple order type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First type C1 simple order type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. First type C2 simple order type information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. Measurement parameter type first information object address. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. System information signal address with the change queue full. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. System information signal address with the indication that the change queue full at the percentage shown in the setting X_PC_LL. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. System information signal address with the indication of GPS installed in the system. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. System information signal address with the indication that the system is synchronised properly by the GPS. It can have value from 0 to 65535. Default value 0. Change queue capacity to give an alarm when it is full, in percentage. It can have value from 0 to100. Default value 80. Change queue capacity to the previously mentioned alarm be deactivated, in percentage. It can have value from 0 to100. Default value 20. Start word for the event state update in the digital signal state buffer. It can have value from 0 to 128. Default value 128 (in case there is no event). Command or order execution modes. Mode 1 (0) direct execution Mode 2 (1) selection previous to the execution Mode 3 (2) simple orders or writings in direct execution and double orders and regulation commands with previous selection. Mode 4 (3) simple orders or writings with previous selection and double orders and regulation commands in direct execution. Mode 6 (5) simple orders with previous selection. These simple commands contemplate the OFF/ON treatment. In this mode, any other type commands are not allowed. Default value Mode 6. It shows if the return information associated to the commands and if the End Activation message is used for the orders. Mode 1 (0) nether return information or ACTTERM Mode 2 (1) return information and ACTTERM are sent Mode 3 (2) return information is sent for all the orders and ACTTERM only for analogue writings Mode 4 (3) ACTTERM message is sent for all the commands Default value Mode 4.


257


Console text

Display text

Counter freezing

FREEZE


MEAS. PAR. ADD.

End reduced profile

END PROFILE

GPS

GPS

Time correction factor

TRANSM. FAC.

ASDU maximum size

ASDU SIZE

SQ bit use

SQ BIT USE

Broadcast synchron. answer

SYNCYRO ANSWER

Cyclical measurements MEASUR. PERIOD period (min)

Meaning Periodical counter operation mode. Mode 1 (0) they are automatically frozen with the request Mode 2 (1) they are not automatically frozen with the request Mode 3 (2) they are frozen in each spontaneous periodical sending and in the initialization as invalid. Default value Mode 3. It shows if the measurement parameters have the same address as their measurements (1) or if they have their own address; its start address is given by the setting D_OD_PAR (0). Default value 1. It shows if the 101 profile used is the End Reduced. Default value 0. It shows if the system has GPS installed. Default value 0. Baud time factor, in order to correct the received time in the synchronization message, due to delays in this message sending, in csecs. Value between 0 and 1000. Default value 0. Byte maximum number the asdu can have. Value between 50 and 255. Default value 255. It shows if the messages have to be sent compacted during the general interrogation process (1) or not (0). Default value 1. It indicates if the Confirmation Activation sending message of the synchronization command has to be inhibited when it is sent with broadcast direction. At 1, this message is not sent. Default It value 0. Period of the cyclical measurement sending in minutes. Value between 0 and 60. With 0, measurements are not sent. Default value 0.

VI.2. TABLES 34B

In the communication console, the screens must be set with the data base to be sent via protocol 101 to the control centre. These setting screens are the following:

Digital signal configuration 101 In this table, they are included the simple signalling type signal, double signalling and bitstring, in case they exist. The following fields have to be defined:

 NUMBER101: Signal number that shows in which position the STATE buffer is going to refresh its corresponding bit. They are numbered starting from 1 up to 2048 possible signals.

 For simple signals, the numbering starts in 1 and the following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they are not introduced.

 For the events, once the word of the event state update start is given in the STATE buffer, the first value of the NUMBER field must be calculated with this word given by PO_EV.

 First event: PO_EV x 16 + 1  The following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they are not introduced.  For double signals, the indication of open, close, undetermined and conflicting states, but as there are only two bits to show the state of a double signal, the undetermined and the conflicting state have the same numbering as the close state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11 respectively.

 This field NUMBER for the double signal is calculated from the variable PO_DP, having into account that the first double signal will have the value resulting from calculating:

 PO_DP x 16 + 1, for open state  PO_DP x 16 + 2, for close, undetermined and conflicting state.


258

IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL  being PO_DP a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the double signals between the events and the bitstrings and it shows the word of the double signal state update start.

 If in the database there are events, the operation to calculate the word of double signal Start is the following one:

 PO_DP = PO_EV + (event number - 1) / 16 + 1  If there are no events, the most common case, this parameter is calculated from simple signals:  PO_DP = (simple signal number - 1) / 16 + 1  For the first Bitstring there will be 32 signals (1 for every bitstring bit) and so 32 registers with the NUMBER field.

 PO_ BITS x 16 +1.............................. PO_BITS x 16 + 32  being PO_BITS a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the bitstrings as the last element to refresh in the buffer after the double signals.

 In order to calculate this word, the same used for the double signals is applied. But in order to calculate what the double signal occupy, take into account that each signal needs 2 bits, so in each word only 8 double signals are refreshed.

 The operation to calculate the bitstrings start word is the following: 

PO_BITS = PO_DP + (number of double signals - 1) / 8 + 1

 For this calculation take into account the place, in words, the previous signals occupy in the buffer.  BD SIGNAL: It shows the signal number in the database of the PL300  NELEM: It shows the element number inside its type  For simple signals, it coincides with NUMBER field.  For events, it must go on as if they were simple signals, because internally they are treated in the same way. If, between the last simple signal and the first event, there is a step in the numbering, it has to be mentioned in this field.

 For double signals, it must start in 1 again. If, in the case of double signals, some registers have been refilled with the different status of the signals, open, close undetermined and conflicting, these registers belong to the same signal, so the NELEM field must be the same for all of them.

 The same happens in the case of the Bitstring, having for them 32 registers of the table with the same NELEM field.

 REVERSED: It shows if the signal reversed state is waited.  TYPE: It shows the type of signal 101: TYPE 0 1 2

ELEMENT TYPE Simple Signalling type element Double Signalling type element Bitstring type element

 CIN: it shows the incidence code for double signals. CIN 0 1 2 3 4

INCIDENCE INTERNAL CODE Change of the simple signalling value or bitstring Change of signalling value to open. Change of signalling value to close. Change of signalling value to undetermined. Change of signalling value to conflict.

Measurement configuration 101 In this table the normal, step and tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be defined:


259

IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL  NUMBER 101: measurement number regarding the Protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering in 1 up to 128 possible measurements. In case there are gaps in the database, those registers cannot be introduced in the table.

 MEASUREMENT BD: It indicates the measurement number in the PL300 database.  DEADBAND: change magnitude in the measurement in order to be sent to the control centre. A value higher than 1% of the background is recommended.

 For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.

 PERIOD: Time during which a change must be maintained in a signal to be sent to the control centre. It will be given in csecs.

 LOW: Low limit under which a measurement will be sent to thecontrol centre as alarm.  For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.

 HIGH: High limit over which a measurement will be sent to thecontrol centre as alarm.  For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.

 In the limit cases, both low and high, we do not pay attention to change magnitude but to the limits of one zone. If it exceeds the given zone between the high and low limit, even if it is a very small change, it is sent to the control centre. In the same way, if it had previously been exceeded, and the measurement value has a value between the limits again.

 BACKGROUND: Scale background for scaled measurements, engineering real value corresponding to the maximum value of the measurement (4095 counts).

 If spontaneous changes in measurements are not desired to be sent, the LOWLIM field value are recommended to be set at their minimum value,-4095, and HIGHLIM and BTRATA at their maximum value, that is, 4095 and 8190 counts, respectively.

 TYPE: Type of 101 measurement:  0

Unidirectional measurement.- Normalized TYPE F16.

 1

Bidirectional measurement. - Stepped TIYPE I16.

 2

Direct measurement

transformer tap, TAP.

 The measurements in that table are set in increasing order, that is, first of al the normalized ones, then the stepped ones, and finally the taps.

Counter configuration 101 In this table the normal, step and tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be defined:

 NUMBER 101: Measurement number regarding the Protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering in 1 up to 64 possible measurements. In case there are gaps in the database, those registers cannot be introduced in the table.

 COUNTER BD: It indicates the measurement number in the PL300 database.  PERIOD: Period of spontaneous freezing and sending of periodical counters. The period in minutes for the counter accumulation has to be divisor of 60 minutes. A 15-minute period is recommended for the counter periods. All the counters that are desired to be sent to the control centre in a cyclical way must have the same period, different to zero in the PERIOD field.

 If the counter periodical sending is not desired to be treated the PERIOD field has to be set at zero.  GROUP: Group the counter belongs to for the counter request by groups.  If the counters do not have an assigned group, since the control centre does not use the Counter Request by group, the GROUP field must be zero, so only the counter period would appear.

 More than four different groups are not allowed for the counters in the database.

101 order configuration The following fields have to be defined for each order:


260

IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL  NUMBER 101: Information object direction (IOA) of the order in the protocol IEC 870-5-101.  ORDER BD: Order in the PL300 database  ON / OFF: ON / OFF state of the order  TYPE: type of element over which the return information is received.  0

Simple signal

 1 Double signal  SIGNAL: Element number inside those of its type for the return information. This information is the same as the NELEM field of the signal table.

 STATE: This field has a different meaning depending on the order type.  In the case of order types, it shows the end state of the signal the order is associated to, a simple or a double signal.

 In the case of double orders, it shows if the state has to come reverse or not.. If the setting Command Execution Mode has Mode 6 value, the simple commands must be entered in the table as double commands, respecting the address of the information object that corresponds to them as simple commands. That is, they are entered as simple commands, but taking into account in this STATE field that they are treated as double commands.

 TIMING: It shows the time, in csec, it has to be waited until the return information associated to the order is received.

Configuration of signal and measurement groups 101 If the interrogation by group wants to be enabled, the following fields have to be defined for each order:

 GROUP: Group number. It can be any number from 1 to 16. They do not need to be consecutive and there can be gaps.

 IOA START This field has the information object address of the first element of the group. This address has to be a valid signal or measurement address.

 IOA END: This field has information object address of the last element of the group. This address has to be a valid signal or measurement address, and it must bet the same address type as the one of the first element.

 In the case of Reduced End profile, the Measurement interrogation is used as group 16, so this group must be configured in the table.

VI.3. INTEROPERABILITY PROFILE IEC 870 35B

5

101

The protocol IEC 870 5 parameters from the parameters and alternatives indicated in the standard.



VI.3.1 System or device (system specific parameter) 291B



System definition



Control station definition (Master)



Control station definition (Slave))

VI.3.2 Net configuration (net specific parameter) 29B



Point-to-point



Multipoint-party line



Multiple point-to-point



Multipoint-star


261


VI.3.3 Physical layer (net specific parameter) 293B

Baud rate (control address) Unbalanced interchange circuit V.24/V.28 Standard

Unbalanced interchange circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if > 1200 bit/s

Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27



100 bit/s



2 400 bit/s



2 400 bit/s



56000 bit/s



200 bit/s



4 800 bit/s



4 800 bit/s



64000 bit/s



300 bit/s



9 600 bit/s



9 600 bit/s



600 bit/s



19 200 bit/s



1 200 bit/s



38 400 bit/s


262


Baud rate (monitor address)

Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard

Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if > 1200 bit/s

Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27



100 bit/s



2 400 bit/s



2 400 bit/s



56 000 bit/s



200 bit/s



4 800 bit/s



4 800 bit/s



64 000 bit/s



300 bit/s



9 600 bit/s



9 600 bit/s



600 bit/s



19 200 bit/s



1 200 bit/s



38 400 bit/s

VI.3.4 Link layer (net specific parameter) 294B

The FT 1.2 mesh format, the simple character and the fixed time out interval are exclusively used in this Standard. Link Transmission Procedure

Address Field of the Link



Balanced transmission



Not present (balanced transmission only)



Unbalanced transmission



One octet



Two octets

Frame Length



Structured

2 5 5

Maximum length L (control direction)



Unstructured

2 5 5

Maximum direction)

length

L

(monitor

When the unbalanced link layer is used, the following ASDU types are return in class 2 messages (lower priority) with the transmission causes indicated below:



ASDUs standard assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:

Identification type

Transmission cause

9, 11, 13, 21

<1>


263




ASDUs special assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:

Identification type

Transmission cause

1, 3, 5, 7

<5>, <20

9, 11

<1>, <3>, <5>, <20

15, 16, 37, 132

<37

10, 12, 34, 35, 131

<3>

45, 46, 100, 101

<7>, <10>

102

<5>

47, 48, 49, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113

<7>

36> 36>

41>

VI.3.5 Application layer 295B

Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (first of all the least significative bits), as it is defined in the clause 4.10 of the IEC 870-5-4, is exclusively used in this standard.

ASDU common address (system specific parameter) 

One octet



Two octets

Information object address (system specific parameter) 

One octet



Structured



Two octets



Unstructured



Three octets

Transmission cause (system specific parameter) 

One octet



Two octets (with originator address)


264


ASDUs Standard selection Process information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)

                 

:

Single-point information

M_SP_NA_1

:

Single-point information with time tag

M_SP_TA_1

:

Double-point information

M_DP_NA_1

:

Double-point information with time tag

M_DP_TA_1

:

Step position information

M_ST_NA_1

:

Step position information with time tag

M_ST_TA_1

:

Bitstring of 32 bit

M_BO_NA_1

:

Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag

M_BO_TA_1

:

Measured value, normalized value

M_ME_NA_1

:

Measured value, normalized value with time tag

M_ME_TA_1

:

Measured value, scaled value

M_ME_NB_1

:

Measured value, scaled value with time tag

M_ME_TB_1

:

Measured value, short floating-point value

M_ME_NC_1

:

Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag

M_ME_TC_1

:

Integrated totals

M_IT_NA_1

:

Integrated totals with time tag

M_IT_TA_1

:

Event of protection equipment with time tag

M_EP_TA_1

:

Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag

M_EP_TB_1

   <30> <31> <32> <33> <34> <35> <36> <37> <38> <39> <40>

:

Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag

M_EP_TC_1

:

Packed single-point information with status change detection

M_PS_NA_1

:

Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor

M_ME_ND_1

:

Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a

M_SP_TB_1

:

Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a

M_DP_TB_1

:

Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a

M_ST_TB_1

:

Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a

M_BO_TB_1

:

Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a

M_ME_TD_1

:

Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a

M_ME_TE_1

:

Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a

M_ME_TF_1

:

Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a

M_IT_TB_1

:

Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a

M_EP_TD_1

:

Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a

M_EP_TE_1

:

Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TF_1 CP56Time2a

<128> <129> <130> <131> <132>

:

Single-point information with time tag CP40Time2a

M_SP_TB_1

:

Double-point information with time tag CP40Time2a

M_DP_TB_1

:

Step position information with time tag CP40Time2a

M_ST_TB_1

:

Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP40Time2a

M_ME_TD_1

:

Integrated totals with time tag CP40Time2a

M_IT_TB_1


265


System information in the control direction (station specific parameter)

      

:

Single command

C_SC_NA_1

:

Double command

C_DC_NA_1

:

Regulating step command

C_RC_NA_1

:

Set point command, normalized values

C_CE_NA_1

:

Set point command, scaled value

C_SE_NB_1

:

Set point command, short floating-point value

C_SE_NC_1

:

Bitstring of 32 bit

C_BO_NA_1

System inSSSystem information in the control direction (station specific parameter)



:

End of initialization

M_EI_NA_1

System information in the control direction (station specific parameter)

      

:

Interrogation command

C_IC_NA_1

:

Counter interrogation command

C_CI_NA_1

:

Read command

C_RD_NA_1

:

Clock synchronization command

C_CS_NA_1

:

Test command

C_TS_NB_1

:

Reset process command

C_RP_NC_1

:

Delay acquisition command

C_CD_NA_1

Control address parameters (station specific parameter)

   

:

Parameter of measured value, normalized value (threshold only)

P_ME_NA_1

:

Parameter of measured value, scaled value

P_ME_NB_1

:

Parameter of measured value, short floating-point value

P_ME_NC_1

:

Parameter activation

P_AC_NA_1

File transfer (station specific parameter)

      

:

File ready

F_FR_NA_1

:

Section ready

F_SR_NA_1

:

Call directory, select file, call file, call section

F_SC_NA_1

:

Last section, last segment

F_LS_NA_1

:

Ack file, ack section

F_AF_NA_1

:

Segment

F_SG_NA_1

:

Directory

F_DR_TA_1


266


Identifying the assigned types and causes of the transmission (station specific parameter) Type identification

Transmission cause

1

2 3

4

5

6

7

8 9 10



11



12

13

20 a 36

37 a 41

<1>

M_SP_NA_1



<2>

M_SP_TA_1



<3>

M_DP_NA_1



<4>

M_DP_TA_1



<5>

M_ST_NA_1



<6>

M_ST_TA_1



<7>

M_BO_NA_1



<8>

M_BO_TA_1

<9>

M_ME_NA_1

<10>

M_ME_TA_1

<11>

M_ME_NB_1

<12>

M_ME_TB_1

<13>

M_ME_NC_1

<14>

M_ME_TC_1

<15>

M_IT_NA_1





<16>

M_IT_TA_1





<17>

M_EP_TA_1

<18>

M_EP_TB_1

<19>

M_EP_TC_1

<20>

M_PS_NA_1

<21>

M_ME_ND_1

<30>

M_SP_TB_1





<31>

M_DP_TB_1





<32>

M_ST_TB_1



<33>

M_BO_TB_1



<34>

M_ME_TD_1



<35>

M_ME_TE_1



<36>

M_ME_TF_1

<37>

M_IT_TB_1

<38>

M_EP_TD_1

<39>

M_EP_TE_1

<40>

M_EP_TF_1

<45>

C_SC_NA_1







<46>

C_DC_NA_1







<47>

C_RC_NA_1





<48>

C_CE_NA_1





<49>

C_SE_NB_1





<50>

C_SE_NC_1

44

45

46

47



 





 





 











 

 






267


<51>

C_BO_NA_1

<70>

M_EI_NA_1

<100>

C_IC_NA_1

<101>

C_CI_NA_1

<102>

C_RD_NA_1

<103> <104>

 











C_CS_NA_1





C_TS_NB_1





<105>

C_RP_NC_1





<106>

C_CD_NA_1

<110>

P_ME_NA_1





<111>

P_ME_NB_1





<112>

P_ME_NC_1

<113>

P_AC_NA_1





<120>

F_FR_NA_1

<121>

F_SR_NA_1

<122>

F_SC_NA_1

<123>

F_LS_NA_1

<124>

F_AF_NA_1

<125>

F_SG_NA_1

<126>

F_DR_TA_1

<128>

M_SP_TB_1





<129>

M_DP_TB_1





<130>

M_ST_TB_1



<131>

M_ME_TD_1



<132>

M_IT_TB_1







VI.3.6 Application basic functions 296B

Station initialization (station specific parameter) 

Remote initialization

Data cyclical transmission (station specific parameter) 

Data cyclical transmission

Reading process (station specific parameter) 

Reading process

Spontaneous transmission (station specific parameter) 

Spontaneous transmission


268


Double transmission of information objects with spontaneous transmission cause (station specific parameter) The following element types can be transmitted in a succession caused by a simple state change in an information object. The particular addresses of the information objects, for which the double transmission is enabled, are defined in ht e project specific list.



Single point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 y M_PS_NA_1



Double point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 y M_DP_TB_1



Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1y M_ST_TB_1



Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, M_BO_TB_1



Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 y M_ME_TD_1



Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 y M_ME_TE_1



Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1 y M_ME_TC_1

General interrogation (station or system specific parameter) The addresses of the information objects assigned to each group have to be shown in a separate table.



Global



Group 1



Group 7



Group 13



Group 2



Group 8



Group 14



Group 3



Group 9



Group 15



Group 4



Group 10



Group 16



Group 5



Group 11



Group 6



Group 12

Clock synchronization (station specific parameter) 

Clock synchronization


269


Command transmission (object specific parameter) 

Direct command transmission



Select and execute command



Direct set point command transmission



Select and execute set point command



C-SE ACTTERM Used



No additional definition



Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)



Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)



Persistent output

Integrated total transmission (station or object specific parameter)  Mode A: local freeze with spontaneous transmission 

Mode B: local freeze with counter interrogation



Mode C: freeze and transmit by counter interrogation commands



Mode D: freeze by counter interrogation command, frozen values reported spontaneously



Counter read



General request counter



Counter freeze without reset



Request counter group 1



Counter freeze with reset






Counter reset







Addresses per group have to be defined

Parameter load (object specific parameter)  Threshold value


270




Smoothing factor



Low limit for transmission of measured value



High limit for transmission of measured value

Parameter activation (object specific parameter)  Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object Test procedure (station specific parameter)  test File transfer (station specific parameter) File transfer in monitor address  Transparent file 

Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment



Transmission of sequence of events



Transmission of sequence of recorded analogue values

File transfer in control address  Transparent file Background scan (station specific parameter)  Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay (station specific parameter)  Acquisition of transmission delay


271

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

APPENDIX VII. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL The IEC870-5-103 communication module implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as a slave station with the master center through the communication rear port (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre)

VII.1. 870-5-103 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FUNCTION 36B

The module implements the communication protocol, based in the IEC60870-5-103, in the protection, in order to communicate with a primary centre which has the protocol IEC60870-5-103 implemented. Its objective is collecting oscillo data, protection signalling and measurements, as well as receiving commands or orders. The transmission and reception mesh formats are set to the FT1.2 mesh format explained in section 6.2.4.2 of IEC 870-5-1 standard. The format per character:

 1 start bit.  8 information bits  1 parity bit, selectable between without parity or even parity  1 stop bit, selectable between 1 and 2 stop bits.  The baud rate will be selected among, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.  The communication is carried out through the communication rear connector (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre). In the same way the following functions are implemented:

 Initialization.  Clock synchronization.  General interrogation  General commands  Perturbation data transmission. The implemented functions are described in the standard IEC870-5-103. The application layer is based in the international standards IEC 870-5-3 (general structure of application data), IEC 870-5-4 (Definition and coding of the application information elements), IEC 870-5-5 (Application basic functions). The basic ASDUS implemented are described in the document IEC870-5-103 and they are:

ASDUs Compatible in Secondary to Primary direction.  <1> Message with time label.  <2> Message with time label and relative time.  <5> Identification.  <6> Clock synchronization.  <8> General interrogation end.  <9> Measurements II. With a variable number of measurements.  <23> Stored perturbation list.  <26> Stored perturbation list.  <27> Stored perturbation list.  <28> Ready for the perturbation digital signal transmission.  <29> Digital signal transmission.


272

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL  <30> Perturbation value transmission.  <31> Transmission end

ASDUs Compatible in Primary to Secondary direction.  <6> Clock synchronization.  <7> General interrogation start.  <20> General commands.  <24> Perturbation data transmission command.  <25> Perturbation data transmission acknowledge

VII.2. SETTINGS 37B

Associated text LCU ADDRESS BAUD RATE

PARITY T.

STOP BITS RTS.ACT T CARRIER T. RTS DEAC T.

SENDING FORMAT

Meaning It allows the identification of the number of the remote station. Value between 0 and 254. Default value 1. This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate: 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 - 38400 bauds. Default value 9600

19200

It allows the selection of the parity type to be used during the transmission. Even, odd or without parity The recommended default value is even, according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. It allows the selection of the stop bit number. 1 or 2 stop bits The recommended default value is 1 stop bit according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. RTS activation waiting time. Waiting time after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds). Carrier stabilization waiting time. Waiting time once the RTS signal is activated and before transmitting the first message character. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds). RTS deactivation waiting time. Waiting time after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds). Sending format: Compatible or extended. 0->compatible VDEW. 1->Extended private range. In compatible format : Control signals configured as compatible are only sent Only three measurements are sent in the measurement ASDU Commands configured as compatible are only accepted

For the correct operation of the perturbation data request function, the communication with the Procome console must be carried out through the you can choose between:

 -->25.  -->maximum. 25 must be selected.

VII.3. CONTROL SIGNALS 38B

The control signals can be configured according to the console screen:


273

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

 BD SIGNAL: It allows selecting the control signal within those existing in the unit.  TYP: Function Type.  INF: Information Number.  GI: It shows if the signal is included in the response to a general question. If this option is not selected, the changes generated by the signal are only activation changes.

 REVERSE: It reverses the signal state.

VII.4. CONTROL ANALOGUE MEASUREMENTS 39B

The control analogue measurements can be configured according to the console screen:

 BD MEASUREMENT: It allows selecting a measurement from the data base.  NUMBER: It shows the position in the measurement ASDU.  This table is only valid when the SENDING FORMAT setting is in EXTENDED.

VII.5. COMMANDS 40B

The commands can be configured according to the console screen:

 BD ORDER: It allows selecting an order from the BD  TYP: Function Type.  INF: Information Number.  DCO: It allows selecting from On and Off


274

IEC 61850PROTOCOL

APPENDIX VIII. IEC 61850PROTOCOL VIII.1. INTRODUCTION 41B

This protocol, implemented in the protection devices, is based on the communication protocol defined in the IEC 61850 standard and described in the following documents:

 IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview  IEC61850-2: Glossary  IEC61850-3: General requirements  IEC61850-4: System and project management  IEC61850-5: Communication requirements for functions and device models  IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs  IEC61850-7: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment  IEC61850-7-1: Principles and models  IEC61850-7-2: Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)  IEC61850-7-3: Common Data Classes  IEC61850-7-4: Compatible logical node classes and data classes  IEC61850-8: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)  IEC61850-8-1: Mappings to MMS (ISO/IEC9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2)  IEC61850-9: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)  IEC61850-9-1: Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link  IEC61850-9-2: Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3  IEC61850-10: Conformance testing

The Technical Committee 57 of the IEC (CT57) is in charge of developing and maintaining such standard. There is a corporation called UCA User Group which works very closely to this Technical Committee and which assist the customers and manufacturers in the integration of device owning this protocol. Ingeteam Power Technology is a member of this corporation. The IEC 61850 standard defines some basic aspects: the local area network (LAN ethernet), communication protocols (TCPIP, MMS), the modeling of the substation elements and services (using XML language) as well as the engineering tools. The architecture of an IEC 61850 system changes from master/slave to client/server. One of the most remarkable aspects of the IEC 61850 standard is the use of horizontal messages between protection devices. These messages called GOOSE (which are a subgroup of GSE: Generic Substation Event) can substitute physical wirings between devices. The use of XML language to describe the different elements and services of the substation is also a remarkable characteristic of this protocol. The icd/cid files based on the XML are those files that describe the data model and services of a protection and those that we will refer to all along this appendix. The particular implementation characteristics of this protocol are described in the PICS, MICS, TICS and PIXIT documents defined in the standard conformity test part In conclusion, the protection device behaves as a IEC 61850 data and service server. All the information, together with its organization is defined in an icd/cid configuration file (based on XML). All those protocol characteristics that can be conferred to a IEC 61850 server according to this standard, can be applied.


275


VIII.2. PREVIOUS STEPS TOCONFIGURETHE DEVICETR 42B

Each protection device is defined with a configuration file, with ICD extension (IED Capability description) in which all the data and services (capabilities) supported in the protection is described. This file is supplied with the device. This icd file has to be configured to be particularized and to be able to communicate with the IEC 61850 client of each substation. Apart from introducing the communication part, the private ones (PIXIT), DataSets and Reports to be sent to each client have also to be configured. Once this particularization has been done, the file changes into a CID file (Configured IED Description), with which the device is completely configured for its integration in a certain substation. In order to carry out all these steps and configure an IEC 61850 protection, Ingeteam Power Technology has developeda SW tool called eFS (Energy Factory Suite). The eFS is a software tool for the IEC 61850 system automation which has multiple modules that will be used to configure each substation protection devices; The software module that will be used to configure the device in each substation is the pacFactory. The other modules include in the eFS are not necessary. The complete protection icd file particularization, to change it into a configured file (cid) is carried in some steps. These steps will basically allow us:



To serve data and services (synchronization, orders…) to the different customers of the substation. Peer-to-peer horizontal communication between protection units (GOOSEs).  Protection setting.  By using the pacFactory modules, the protection will be easily configured, to be integrated within each IEC 61850 substation. The steps would be the following: aproject.

 the project. configuration.

he environment

 If this is the first time you access to project (there will be no IED in the list). It will be necessary to import.


276


VIII.2.1 IED Import to project 297B

 To import an IED to project, you have two options;



Import the IED from file; for this option is not necessary to communicate with any device.



Import the IED from device; automatic detection of network devices.

If you select this button

you detect all network devices. And the following window appears.

The first thing to consider is to check the device is between subnet ranges to communicate properly. For this, you need to add the subnet device to PC network card or change the IP address device for belonging to the same network PC. This last option is probably faster and easier. mask to configure and send to device. Refresh automatic detection to confirm the change and then you will work properly. From both options, import from file or from device,you get the dialog window show below.


277


Fill device family and select/ create

VIII.3. PROTECTION CONFIGURATION 43B

VIII.3.1 IED Properties 298B

If you just import an icd file, probably you need to update the communication data(IP address, mask and OSI parameters). For this, from main menu, on tools option window with different tabs.

IED properties, or from toolbar button on icon

will appear the following

Select AP1 tab and fill the communication parameters necessary for IED configuration.

The IP address and the status communication with device are shownon the application status bar. Ej.;


278


VIII.3.2 Communications 29B

n the tree view with the model data from device is shown. T This tree view shows the different logical devices (LDs) and the different logical nodes (LNs)within each. IEC 61850 standards, the configuration data sending by device (Reports or Goose messages) is performed in two steps: First, you have to define the Dataset which you send in the Report or Goose message. Second, you have to configure the Report Control Block (R.C.B) or Goose Control Block (G.C.B.) where all the characteristics of each report or goose message are. According to IEC 61850 standards, Datasets and Control Block are created on LN level, so first, select the LN level where you want to create it. If there is no LN selected, buttons for the Datasets, Report control blocks and transmission Gooses configuration will be disabled. Once Datasets, Report Control Blocks or transmission Gooses are configured, will be shown as branches on the LN. On the IEC 61850 Server configuration tab you have: A toolbar with the following options:

Dataset: Open the Dataset configuration dialog box. R.C.B: Open Report Control Blocksconfiguration dialog box. GOOSEs: Open the transmission Goose message configuration dialog box. GoosesRx: Open reception Goose message configuration dialog box. Collapse/Expand: Collapse or expand the dataset list on tab.

Data grid with dataset: The data grid shows the information group by Datasets. In each Dataset row are the Report Control Blockand Gooses associated with that Dataset.


279


Other access for Dataset configuration;

By right clicking on child nodes in tree view, a contextual menu will appear: On LN node allows:

Open the Dataset and Goose configuration dialog box. Create a new Dataset andnew Goose.

On Dataset allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated. On Report Control Block allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete.

On Goose Control Block allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete.

From data grid rows: On Dataset row allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated. Create a new Dataset andnew Goose.


280


On Report Control Block row allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete. On Goose Control Block row allows: Properties: Open configuration dialog box. Delete.

VIII.3.3 Datasets 30B

By clicking on Dataset (1) button configure the members of Dataset selected or define a new Dataset.

in each Dataset can be selected (both at basic and FCD level, selecting it in the filter on the tool bar).


281


Criteria used in the configuration of: his filter is included in the DataSet the data reference, which will be an structure including the data status, quality andtimestamp. the DataSet the data attributes references independently. This is because in Goose messages the data timestamp is not sent.

The FC (Functional Constrain) used for the Reports and Gooses messages are: ST: Para configuración de señales MX: Para configuración de medidas.

VIII.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB) 301B

The Report control block associated to a Dataset, will be configured by selecting the LLN0 node of the protection and clicking on the RCB. A dialog box to configure is as show below

You define or configure an existing RCB. It is also possible to configure the Dataset which is associated to, and also the trigger options and optional fields of each RCB, as well as if it is buffered or unbuffered.


282


VIII.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB) 302B

The transmission goose control blocks are configured in the same way as the RCBs. By clicking on GOOSEs button a dialog box appears as show bellow.

In this section you configure the details and the Access Point of the Goose, which contains the MAC-Multicast the gooses are sent to (as well as the VLAN and AppID parameters).

VIII.3.6 GooseSubscription 30B

In order to configure the receptiongooses, we have to import the IED which will publish the GOOSEs we want to subscribe to. So, run the iedFactory and import IEDs using the cid configuration files (which must have the transmission GOOSE Select thesubscriptor IED and open the configuration IEC 61850 Server in pacFactory application. To The subscription dialog box appears and you can select the publisher GOOSE control block we want to subscribe to. Select it and by clicking on left arrow button will appear in the subscriptions list. To finish, accept the subscription with


283


To check the subscription, navigateto line1 IED, in the LD GOOSERx or in LLN0 node. You have to see a Dataset and a GOCB that match with the GOCB of the protection (check it with the properties option).

VIII.3.7 Settings 304B

The protection settings can be initialized through substation Factoryapplication.

These initializations are written down in a cid file which will be sent to the protection that will consider them as initial settings. Every time a protection setting is changed from any interface (display, console, IEC 61850 customer or any other), the cid file is updated with the new value. The configuration file (cid) with the last setting values of the protection can always be retrieved through the FTP or through the IEC 61850 file service. Must be taken into account when a cid is sent, the protection will update settings with the new coming data in this cid file.

VIII.3.8 Commands 305B

The commands accepted by the protection are configured and mapped in the device (factory settings). Commands are

VIII.3.9 Private parts 306B

To finish with the IED particularization, the private data,which allow configuring the LOG system, have to be checked, and offset has to be given to the local time, and enable the storage of the oscillography/faults/settings in a file etc.

Insert private part


284


These private data leave the factory with default values and, depending on the needs, they are usually modified. The list of the parameters that can be configured and their meaning are the following:

 Maximum number of connections: it is the maximum number of MMS connections that are allowed simultaneously. It has a maximum of 6.

 Log file: configuration of the LOG file. Each active bit indicates where the unit debug information is going to be dumped.

 Local Time: Deviation of the local time regarding the UTC, positive or negative value of such deviation. If at 0, the local time coincides with the UTC.

 Configurator: IP port for the communication with the configurator. If this field is not filled, it has a default value (49200).

 Order mode: special mode where the order locking are not checked before executing them. If at 1, the lockings are not checked.

 Time Out Aplic: Indicates the time, in seconds, that must elapse without receiving any information through port 102 (MMS) before the server closes the connection. This value is used to avoid that connections that have stopped sending data during an indicated time (when a possible error) are still occupying an open connection of the server. .

 Telnet: indicates the TCP port through which the de Log information is taken out when this log is active.  Parsing: how restrictive we want the parsing is. With avalue different to zero. It checks that there is enough space for the writing of the setting values in the icd. In case there is no enough space, the icd is not validated

 Refresh time: after an order, the opClsOr and opOpnOr signals take some values regarding the state of the order. With Refreshing time, we indicate the time after which, once the order is received, we set the value of such signals at zero. The time will be in seconds.

 It can be also chosen if you want to store the oscillos, faults and settings in files, inside the unit file system, by selecting the ConfDomain tab.

oscillos/faults/setting s configuration tab

VIII.4. PROTECTION UPDATE 4B

Once all the configuration steps have been carried out in the pacFactory, this configuration has to be uploaded into the IED. For that, we will use Sending through FTP button.


285


By clicking on FTP sending button will appear a dialog box where you must fill the user name and the password, then

The unit is reset and starts with the new configuration after some minutes (depending on the data and service model sent). This time is needed because the device is self-configured from this cid file (no change into proprietary or binary format is done).


286

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

APPENDIX IX. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE The self-checking constantly performed by the unit, can detect the following situations:





Critical hardware error



Error in the converter reference voltage



Error in the converter



Error in the FLASH memory recording



Error in the relays activation



Error in the SPI communication (between micro and DSP)

Non critical hardware error

 

Clock synchronization error

HW error corrected

In the event of any failure detection, the alarm will remain until the failure is disappeared. This alarm can be visualised through:



Status screen



Control events



Events



Digital outputs



Led

IX.1. FAILURE DETECTION 45B

The failure detection can happen in various ways.

Status screen


287

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

through four signalisations:

 Protection in service  Critical error  Non critical error  Error in ADC converter By normal functioning, only the signalisation (in red) for protection in service must be on. Any of the other 3 signalisations indicate an unusual situation.

Control signals If the hardware status signal indicates that some unusual situation has appeared (critical error) in the unit. By 1 indicates Hardware OK.

Digital outputs A digital output can be programmed w activated by critical error. If the opposite logic is desired, this can be done through the programmable logic signals..

-

Leds The programmable Leds count with the same options as the digital outputs. The non programmable bicolour Led (OK/F) indicates:

 Correct functioning if green  Critical error detection if red

Events As well as indicating if the error is or not critical, the events also indicate the type of error detected and they are the ones quoted in the first part of this chapter.

IX.2. ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE 46B

The procedure will depend on the detected error and the unit status.

If the unit is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the unit is well supplied, contact the technical service. If the unit is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is:

 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on, contact the technical service.

 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if they are correct, turn off and on the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.

 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.  If error in the Flash memory recording is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service.


288

RECEPTION TESTS

APPENDIX X. RECEPTION TESTS X.1. MATERIAL NEEDED 47B

 Three phase voltage and current generator with variable frequency of class<0.5.  Chronometer unit with starting by current or voltage injection, with precision <0.001s.  Wiring.  Power supply of Vdc +-10% (Vdc depending on model).

X.2. MEASUREMENT TEST 48B

The Measurement range is up to 1,2 times the nominal value (5 A). The error in that range must be less than 0,5% of the 1,.2*nominal value. The protection range error must be less than 3% of the introduced value. The points to check are under the criterion of the worker who will make the tests, but the following ones are recommended: Current (A) 0.5 1 5 (nominal) 10 50

Voltage (V) 20 50 65 (approx. rated) 80

X.2.1 Measurements in display 307B

Measurements will be done by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits. Furthermore it must be taken into account that the Measurements must appear in display in primary, as well as secondary values (multiplied by the Measurement transformers ratio).

X.2.2 Measurements in console 308B

Measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits. Furthermore, it must be taken into account that in the console measurements must appear in both secondary values, in the state screen, and in primary values, in the measurements and control screen, (multiplying by the measurement transformers ratio). If power is measured, it must be taken into account that there is a factor by which the calculated power is divided before being sent to the console (Measurements and control). Make a test for several values for this (for instances 0.1, 1 and 10). This test must be carried out for all phases and checking the Measurements in the console.


289

RECEPTION TESTS

X.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 49B

The following settings will be introduced in the relay for the reception tests:

Digital Inputs Configuration DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 8 DI 9 DI 10 DI 11 DI 12 DI 13 DI 14 DI 15 DI 16 DI 17

Breaker status Reference voltage Free Free Free Free SV closing 52 close 1 SV closing 52 open 1 SV trip 52 close1 SV trip 52 open 1 External protection Closing order Opening order Free Free Free Free

Digital Outputs Configuration Output DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 DO 4 DO 5 DO 6 DO 7 DO DO DO DO DO DO DO

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Configured signal General trip Current recloser OR close order Current ongoing cycle Current definite trip Phase insta. trip OR Phase time trip Ground insta. trip OR ground time trip Phase insta. tripOR ground insta. tripOR OverV inst. trip OR UnderV inst. trip OR ground overV inst. trip Phase time trip Unbalance time trip OR Unbalance inst. trip Free Free Free Free HW status

Output type Trip Close Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing Nothing

LEDs configuration LED LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED LED LED LED

5 6 7 8

CONFIGURED SIGNAL Phase time pickup OR Ground time pickup OR. OverV time pickup OR UnderV time pickup OR Ground overV time pickup Phase inst trip OR Phase time trip Ground inst trip OR Ground time trip Phase inst trip OR Ground inst trip OR. OverV inst trip OR UnderV inst trip OR Ground overV inst trip Current ongoing cycle Current definite trip Current recloser locked HW status (green OK)

LED TYPE Memorized Memorized Memorized Memorized Not memorized Not memorized Not memorized Not memorized


290

RECEPTION TESTS

Configuration from lockings to functions r the recloser.

X.3.1 Hardware status 309B

relay and check that this contact opens.

X.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency) 310B

This protocol applies to any instantaneous voltage and current unit the unit has. The most usual are: 




Ground instantaneous overcurrent (and sensitive neutral



Phase instantaneous overvoltage



Phase instantaneous undervoltage



Overfrequency



Underfrequency

A test unit prepared for measuring the tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests. Disable the corresponding timed function and all the functions which are not being tested

X.3.2.1. Pickup and dropout in the trip Set the additional time of instantaneous to 0 seconds. They will be tested by making rising slopes of I, V or f (depending on the tested unit) from 90% to 110% of the setting taking note of the value at which the instantaneous is picking up. By reaching the tripping point, it must remain there for a while checking that there are no drop outs but it remains activated. Afterwards a descending slope to the drop out point will be made, taking note of this point value. The points to be checked are up to the operator but it is recommended to test the following settings: Current (A) 6 10 20 40

Voltage (V) 50 65 80

To test the undervoltage situation the slopes will be made the other way round: first the descending for pick up and after the rising for drop out.

X.3.2.2. Speed of the instantaneous trip It is about testing the tripping speed of the relay when tripping time is 0. Therefore the additional time of instantaneous will be set to 0 sec.


291

RECEPTION TESTS

It will be tested by applying a value higher than the starting value set (2 times for current, 1.2 times for voltage) noting down the time in which the instantaneous picks up. To carry out this test a chronometer will be used, which will be started by the signal injection and stopped by the trip relay operation. Suggested settings: same as the pick-up and drop-off settings. The tripping time must be less than 40 ms.

X.3.2.3. Instantaneous trip with additional time Same as the precedent, for different additional time settings. Note down the time in which the instantaneous trips. The error must not be higher than 5% of the programmed time or 50 ms (the higher of the two).

X.3.2.4. Function locking test corresponding function (this is general for any function).

X.3.3 Timed units (current and voltage) 31B

This protocol applies to any timed current and voltage unit. The most usual are: 




Ground timed overcurrent (and sensitive neutral)



Phase timed overvoltage



Phase timed undervoltage

A test set prepared for measuring tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests. Disable the corresponding instantaneous function and all the functions which are not being tested.

X.3.3.1. Pickup and dropout The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one. The type of trip curve will be set as definite time with a trip time of 0. Check that the digital outputs and corresponding LEDs are activated when tripping. After each test make a

X.3.3.2. Definite time The test will be carried out in similar way to the instantaneous one.

X.3.3.3. Tripping times through curves The test is carried out in the same way as for the definite time but setting the time delayed unit with all possible types of curves and different indexes shown on Appendix II, where the theoretical operating times are indicated. The time measurements will be repeated for different points of the tripping curve and for different settings according to the operator criteria.

X.3.4 Current unbalance units 312B

These units act when exceeding the I2 threshold (Negative sequence current)


292

RECEPTION TESTS

The tests will be the same as for the phase instantaneous and timed unit unless current is injected in the three phases and with certain values. The phase protection units must be disabled.

X.3.4.1. Pickups The instantaneous and the timed units are tested in the same way. The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.) and if it is a time delayed unit, the time curve is set to definite time. Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables. Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1 seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip. IR

120º

120º 120º

IT

IS

When it trips, the I2 trip will be calculated to see the error made in the following way:

I2.trip (s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3

The test must be repeated for different Ifixed and for different settings. The following will be recommended:

I2=I negative seq. set 1 2 4

I fixed 3 5 10

X.3.4.2. Trip times The proceeding is the same for both instantaneous and time delayed of unbalance. For timed unit the inverse time curves will be checked. Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables, and then the time to trip the protection is measured.

X.3.5 Broken conductor unit 31B

Before performing this test all the phase units must be disabled.


293

RECEPTION TESTS

X.3.5.1. Pickups It is tested in the same way as the unbalance unit. The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.). Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables. Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1 seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip. The test is repeated for different Ifixed: 

1A



2A



5A

At the end the trip error is calculated BROKEN CONDUCTOR UNIT

IR

120º

120º 120º

IT

SETTING

I pickup Phase R IR(A)

I2/I1 0,15 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5

IS

TRIP VALUE Phase S IS(A) Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed

Phase T IT(A) Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed Ifixed

I2/I1trip =(|IR|-|Ifixed|)/(|IR|+2·|Ifixed|)

X.3.5.2. Trip times The proceeding is the same as for the instantaneous of unbalance. Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables, and then the time to trip the protection is measured. The test is repeated for different Ifixed and different settings:

X.4. RECLOSER 50B

It is aimed to confirm several aspects:


294

RECEPTION TESTS  That for any kind of trip (with all the enablings at YES), the recloser is able to perform a complete reclosing cycle and that on each cycle state all corresponding signals are activated (outputs and leds).

 That all the phase and earth fault reclosings are correctly discriminated.  That the delays to be set (dead time, reclaim time and reference voltage time) are exactly respected.  That the enablings of allowed reclosings and trips operate correctly. In all the tests the enablings of trip after reclosing and reclosing after trip must be configured to YES. During the reclosing tests, the time to be measured is the one elapsed between the openings of the circuit breaker until the circuit breaker closing signal is given.

X.4.1 Initial tests 314B

Wire the breaker trip and closing outputs to a two-state relay which performs the line circuit breaker function. In this way this input must be 0V when a trip happens.

+125V

Breaker status

PROTECTION N

General trip

Breaker closure

Figure 1


295

RECEPTION TESTS

Before the tests: 

Check that the Recloser lockings, the external as well as the one of the panel, are disabled.



Set all the time delay (reclosing and blocking times) with different values, so that it makes it easier to see the differences between them.



The reclosing times will indicate which one of the three reclosings is being performed. To measure them it will be measured the interval from the breaker opening until the breaker closing order.

Check the following by each test: 

Every time a trip occurs, the ongoing cycle output must be activated and turn on the corresponding led unless a cycle of three reclosings has been performed, which will lead to Definitive trip.



When the reclosing occurs, the output cancellation of instantaneous must be activated (if this was programmed) and also the corresponding led while it is on reclaim time or until another trip occurs within this reclaim time.



Another trip occurs within this reclaim time.

X.4.1.1. TRIP (D),RECLOSURE (R),NORMAL (N)) Manual closing Wait the reclaim time after manual closing Provoke a trip Check that the led ongoing cycle turns on Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and that the output ongoing cycle is deactivated and the instantaneous is cancelled when the reclaim time is expired. Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral (if they exist), unbalance and broken conductor. In case of trips by ground or sensitive neutral the dead and reclaim times will be the earth-fault ones but for the rest of trips times must be the phase-fault ones

X.4.1.2. D,R,D,R,N Manual closing Wait the reclaim time after manual closing Provoke a trip Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time. Provoke a trip before the reclaim time is expired after automatic closing Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and the output ongoing cycle is deactivated. Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral, unbalance and broken conductor.


296

RECEPTION TESTS

X.4.1.3. D,R,D,R,D,R,N Manual closing Wait the reclaim time after manual closing Provoke a trip Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN2... Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off. Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral, unbalance and broken conductor

X.4.1.4. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R. Manual closing Wait the blocking time after manual closing Provoke a trip. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on. Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN1.. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time. Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time. Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off. Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral , unbalance and broken conductor.

X.4.1.5. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R,. DEF. TRIP Manual closing Wait locking time after manual closing Provoke a trip. Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on.


297

RECEPTION TESTS

Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time. Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing. Check that the LED Definitive trip turns on. Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral unbalance, broken conductor and also by external protection.

X.4.2 Enabling checking test 315B

X.4.2.1. Enabling of allowed trips It is started from all the allowed trips and one of them is disabled checking that it does not trip during the corresponding reclaim time. A locking time of at least 10 seconds must be given which allows confirming that they are operative when the desired trip is provoked. A table will be filled in checking that all the possibilities operate. Trips allowed after reclosing

Phase Instant./Timed

Standby

GND Instantaneous /Timed

SENSITIVE GND Instant./Timed

UNBALANCE Instant./Timed

BROKEN COND.

Trips allowed after reclosing

YES  NO YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

After R-1


YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

After R-2


YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

After R-3


YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

After R-4


YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

After MANUAL CLOSING


YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO

YES  NO


298

RECEPTION TESTS

X.4.2.2. Recloser enabling It is started from all the reclosings as allowed and it is continued disabling some of them, checking that they do not operate after the corresponding trips. Reclosings allowed after trip R-1 R-2 R-3 R-4

Phase Instantaneous /Timed YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO

GND Instantaneous /Timed YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO

SENSITIVE GND Instantaneous /Timed YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO

UNBALANCE Instantaneous/ Timed YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO

BROKEN CONDUC TOR YES  YES  YES  YES 

EXTERNAL PROTECTION NO NO NO NO

YES YES YES YES

   

NO NO NO NO

X.4.3 Tests with/without reference voltage 316B

The waiting time of the reference voltage is set to a lower value than the reclosing time. During a reclosing cycle the Vref. is taken away and it is checked that after the waiting time set the cycle is interrupted and it moves on to definitive trip (the time to reach Definitive trip since the breaker opens is measured in order to check the correct operation of the recloser).

X.4.4 Recloser locking test 317B

It is checked that the recloser does not perform the reclosings when:   be seen only in to the status Definitive trip and activates its corresponding signal. 

It is set out of service through the push-button R.



It is set out of service through the control command.



It is set out of service through the protection command.

In the three cases the output “Locked recloser” must be activated.

X.4.5 Time measurements 318B

X.4.5.1. Recloser time It is measured the time, from the breaker opening until the breaker closing command. It must coincide with the programmed time. The times to be programmed are up to the operator, but it is recommended to test the minimum and maximum allowed.

X.4.5.2. Reclaim time It is measured the time while the output cancellation of instantaneous is activated (if it is programmed) which is coincident with the reclaim time after a reclosing. The times to be programmed are up to the operator but it is recommended to test the minimum and maximum allowed.


299

RECEPTION TESTS

X.5. COIL SUPERVISION 51B

It is an automatism integrated by 4 inputs and 2 outputs. Inputs Trip circuit with breaker open 1 Trip circuit with breaker closed 1 Closing circuit with breaker open 1 Closing circuit with breaker closed1

Outputs Trip circuit failure 1 Closing circuit failure 1

it failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated. lure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated. failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated. must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated

X.6. CHECKING OF THE DISPLAY AND CLOCK OPERATION 52B

 Connect the relay to the power supply. Check that the two-coloured led Ok/F is shown in green. On the display it must appear the following text:

Protection PL300 Multifunction

Xx

 Xx defines the firmware version. By pressing INTRO it should appear SEE TIME

 By pressing INTRO again, any unit time will appear. Check that the second digits change. DATE ##-##-## TIME ##-##-##

 Turn off the unit and wait 1 min. it was turn off, which indicates that the battery is working well.

 Press ESC. It should be seen SEE TIME

 Press ESC. It should be seen again Protection PL300 Multifunction

Xx


300

RECEPTION TESTS

X.7. TIME SETTING OF THE UNIT 53B

and date will appear.

Press OK and check that the relay receives the date/hour which has been sent


301

DEFAULT SETTINGS

APPENDIX XI. DEFAULT SETTINGS The units leave the factory with the following setting programming, unless the user expresses the contrary:

Accessible only through keyboard/display 

Communication configuration:







Port COM1 (front) 

Address

4



Baud rate

38400



Parity

even



Stop Bits

1

In units without Ethernet output:



Rear port COM2 configuration



Puerto COM2

PROCOME



Address



Baud rate

38400

4



Parity

even



Stop Bits

1



Control signals

None (units in TCP type IH)



RTS (in box or TCP type IB)

In units with Ethernet output:



Rear port COM2 configuration

DNP



Ethernet port configuration

PROCOME

Accessible through Protection console and keyboard/display 

Frequency

50 Hz



Language

Spanish



Phase sequences

A, B, C



Enable buttons

NO



Enabling push button by command

NO



Locking Key R

NO



Enabling functional key remote

NO



Locking LEDs

NO



Allow lock by protocol

NO



Ground parameters (in units with transformer for VN measurement):

calculated voltage



Power supply (agony) (in units with Vdc measurement):



IRIG-B Format:



Overcurrent protection (1)



NO B002 (without year)

Phase TOC 

Enable

YES



Pick up

6.00



Characteristic curve

TF



Time index

0.05



Definite time

2.00


302

DEFAULT SETTINGS



















NO

Ground TOC 

Enable

YES



Pick up

1.00




TF



Time index

0.05



Definite time

2.00



Torque control

NO

Phase IOC 

Enable

YES



Pick up

10.00



Timing

0.10



Torque control

NO

Ground IOC 

Enable

YES



Pick up

2.00



Timing



Torque control

0.50 NO

Sensitive ground TOC 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.100




TF



Time index

0.05



Timing

5.00



Torque control

NO

Sensitive ground IOC 

Enable



Pick up



Timing



Torque control

NO 0.500 2.00 NO

Current Unbalance time 

Enable

NO



Pick up

1.00




TF



Time index

0.05



Timing

2.00



Torque control of current unbalance time unit

NO

Current Unbalance instantaneous 

Enable

NO



Pick up

2.00



Timing

0.50



Torque control of current unbalance instantaneous

NO

Boosting by voltage 



Torque control

Boosting by voltaje

NO

Regulator locking 

Enable

NO


303

DEFAULT SETTINGS











6.00

Phase instantaneous special operation 

Enable

NO



Special definite time (sec)

1.00



Special function time (sec)

0.00

Ground instantaneous special operation 

Enable

NO




0.00




0.00

Sensitive ground instantaneous special operation 

Enable

NO




0.00




0.00

Instantaneous overcurrent protection (HIGH 1)







Locking current

Phase instantaneous (high) 

Enable

YES



Pick up(A)

15.00



Definite time (sec)

0.00



Torque control

NO

Ground instantaneous (high) 

Enable

YES



Pick up(A)

5.00



Definite time (sec)



Torque control

0.00 NO

Overcurrent protection (HIGH 2)







Phase TOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05



Definite time timing

0.00



Torque control

NO

Ground TOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05




0.00



Torque control

NO



Ground type

Transformer

Phase IOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10



Instantaneous timing

0.00



Torque control

NO


304

DEFAULT SETTINGS 







Ground IOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




0.00



Torque control

NO



Ground type

Transformer

Sensitive ground TOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.005




TF



Time index

0.05




0.00



Torque control

NO

Sensitive ground IOC (HIGH) 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.005




0.00



Torque control

NO

Overcurrent protection, zones 2 and 3











Settings for phases in zone 2 

Enable

NO



Pick up in zone 2 (A)

0.10



Additional time for zone 2 (sec)

0.00

Settings for phases in zone 3 

Enable

NO




0.10




0.00

Settings for ground in zone 2 

Enable

NO




0.10




0.00

Settings for ground in zone 3 

Enable

NO




0.10




0.00

Zone 3 address

F

Generals 








Broken conductor 

Enable (phase unbalance)

NO



Broken phase detection pick up

0.30



Broken phase detection timing

0.50

Isolated ground 

Enable



External locking

NO NO


305

DEFAULT SETTINGS



Low current

0.010



High current

0.010



Low voltaje



High voltaje

3.0



First trip timing

1.00



Time for switch to instantaneous (sec)

10.0

3.0
















Directional 

Phase directional angle

45



Ground directional angle

45



Directional locking due to lack of polarization

NO

V Polarization 

Polarization V

1.0



Ground directional criteria

S0



Phase directional criteria

Quadrature

Widths directional trip zone 

Width phase zone (grades)

170



Width ground zone (grades)

170

Sensitive ground directional 

Directional type

Angular Criteria



Minimum threshold Vn(V)

1.0



Minimum power (W)

0.00



Characteristic angle

0



Minimum current (A)

0.005

Watrimetic ground 

Directional type



Minimum active power (W)



Minimum current (A)

Angular Criteria 0 0.10










Voltage control of the phase time 

Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05



Definite time

0.00

Voltage control. 

Enable

NO



Torque control

10.0

Voltage control of the phase instantaneous 

Pick up (A)

0.10



Definite time (sec)

0.00

Voltage control 

Enable

NO



V. control (V)

10.0


306

DEFAULT SETTINGS 

Locking due to high current







Phases 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10



Definite time

0.00



Trip number

1



Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10



Definite time

0.00



Trip number

1

Ground

Two levels undercurrent Enable

NO



Level 1 pickup (A)

0.10



Level 1 additional timing (sec)

0.00



Level 2 pickup (A)

0.10



Level 2 additional timing (sec)

0.00









Level 1

Level 2

Overcurrent protection, Cold load











Phase TOC 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05




0.00

Ground TOC 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05




0.00



Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




0.00

Phase IOC

Ground IOC 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




0.00

Sensitive ground TOC 

Enable



Pick up

NO 0.005


307

DEFAULT SETTINGS










TF



Time index

0.05




0.00

Sensitive ground IOC 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.005




0.00

Cold load 

Enable



Cold load time(s)

600

NO



Actuation time(s)

1.00

Voltage protection















Overvoltage time 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




TF



Time index

0.05




0.00

Overvoltage instantaneous 

Enable

NO



Pick up

10.0




0.00

Undervoltage time 

Enable



Pick up

NO






Time index

0.05




0.00

0.10 TF

Undervoltage instantaneous 

Enable

NO



Pick up

10.0




0.00

Unbalance time 

Enable

NO



Pick up

0.10




0.00

Unbalance instantaneous 

Enable




NO 0.00

Voltage generic (Single pole overvoltage) 

Voltage unit type

UnderV



Unit time pick up

2.0



Unit time characteristic curve

TF



Unit time time index

0.05



Unit time definite time curve timing

0.00



Unit instantaneous pick up

2.0


308

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Unit instantaneous timing

0.00

Frequency protection









Supervision minimum voltage 

Supervision minimum voltage (V



Cycle number of frequency pick up



Cycle number of D81 pick up

40 3 3

Recloser settings associated to low frequency protection 

Enable

NO



Minimum frequency conditions to reclose

NO



Minimum frequency to reclose (Hz)

45.00



Reclosing time (sec)

1



Reclaim time (sec)

1

Frequency gradient (1) 

Enable

NO



Supervision minimum current

0.00



SPV Maximum Freq. step 1

45.00



Frequency step 1

0.20



Definite time step 1 (sec.)

0.00




45.00



Frequency step 2

0.20




0.00




45.00



Frequency step 3

0.20




0.00




45.00



Frequency step 4

0.20




0.00

Frequency function 

Enable step 1

NO



Frequency step 1 (Hz)

45.00



Definite time step 1 (sec)

0.00



Frequency type step 1

Maximum



Enable step 2

NO




45.00




0.00




Maximum



Enable step 3

NO




45.00




0.00




Maximum



Enable step 4

NO




45.00




0.00




Maximum



Enable step 5

NO




45.00


309

DEFAULT SETTINGS





0.00




Maximum

In trip due to fault 

Operation way

Threepole



Enable

Disable



Trip signal

Pulse



Topology 52

Independent



Phase restoration (A)

0.10



Ground restoration (A)

0.10



Retrip definite time(sec)

0.0000



Trip definite time (sec)

0.0000

Opening with load 

Enable



Load threshold (A)

0.1

NO



Definite time failure in load 1 (sec)

0.0000



Definite time failure in load 2 (sec)

0.0000

Breaker failure protection (II)










Breaker failure protection (I)







Breaker failure with low load or ground 

Enable



Two-phase trip permission

NO



Enable detection per neutral

NO



Ground current threshold (A)

0.10



Retrip definite time (s)

0.000



Trip definite time (s)

0.000



Trip signal

Pulse

NO

Rear arch detection 

Enable



Pick up (A)

0.05

NO



Rear arch time (sec)

0.01



Broken conductor criteria threshold (V)

1



Incr. I threshold of flashover (A)

0.02



Definite time flash 1 (sec)

0.00



Definite time flash 2 (sec)

0.00



Number of locking cycles after closing

1

Dead zone 

Enable



Dead zone threshold (A)

0.1

NO



Definite time (sec)

0.000

Protection Scheme



Selecting the protection scheme

Permissive overreach



Drop time input RTP (s)

0.00



Locking additional time (s)

0.00



Signal loss time (s)

0.00



Enable ECO

NO


310

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Time ECO (s)

0.0



Enable reverse direction locking

NO



Time reverse direction locking (s)

0.0

Protection trip masks



Enable



Unconditional trip mask







NO



Phase instantaneous zone 1

NO




NO




NO



Phase time

NO



Ground instantaneous zone 1

NO




NO




NO



Ground time

NO



Broken conductor

NO



Unbalance instantaneous

NO



Unbalance time

NO

Permissive trip mask 


NO




NO




NO



Phase time

NO




NO




NO




NO



Ground time

NO



Broken conductor

NO




NO




NO



Unbalance time

NO

Locking trip mask 


NO




NO




NO



Phase time

NO




NO




NO




NO



Ground time

NO



Broken conductor

NO




NO




NO



Unbalance time

NO

Thermal image protection



Enable



Heating time constant (min)

NO 3


311

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Cooling time constant (min)

3



Alarm threshold (%)

80



Nominal current

5.00



Restoration threshold (%)

50

Power protection















 

Minimum power 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%).

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Maximum power (Hi-Set) 

Enable



Pick up (%)

1.0

NO



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Maximum power (Lo-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Reverse active power (Hi-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Reverse active power (Lo-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Reverse reactive power (Hi-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Reverse reactive power (Lo-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Power Nominal current (A)

1A

Apparent power protection







Minimum apparent power 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Maximum apparent power (Hi-Set) 

Enable

NO



Pick up (%)

1.0



Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Maximum apparent power (Lo-Set) 

Enable

NO


312

DEFAULT SETTINGS















Fixed time (sec)

0.00

Enable

NO



Additional time (sec)

2.00

TOC limitations ( to ground time characteristic)



Ground curve limit current

100.00



Neutral TOC block if IOC started

NO

Phase TOC limits ( to phases time characteristic) Phase TOC block if IOC started

NO

Second harmonic restraint



Enable phases

NO



Enable ground

NO



Threshold %I2f/If

5



Phase minimum current (A)

0.10



Ground minimum current (A

0.10

Digital inputs Flicker



Minimum number of changes to activate flicker signal

0



Maximum number of changes to remove flicker signal

0



Flicker checking Interval (sec)

0

Time cancellations



Phase time

Without locking



Ground time

Without locking



Sensitive ground time

Without locking



Phase time high

Without locking



Ground time high

Without locking



Sensitive ground time high

Without locking



Unbalance time

Without locking

User curve 1 Without programming

User curve 2

 

1.0



 

Pick up (%)

Fuse failure

 



Without programming

Fault locator



Enable

NO



Real component of the single pole impedance (Ohms/Km)

0.0000



Imaginary component of the single pole impedance (Ohms/Km)

0.0000



Real component of the direct impedance (Ohms/Km)

0.0000



Imaginary component of the direct impedance (Ohms/Km)

0.0000



Line length (Kms)

0.0



Direct sequence of the line admittance

0.0



Single pole sequence of the line admittance

0.0



Data of the rest of the net


313

DEFAULT SETTINGS









0.000



Imaginary component of the direct impedance local source

0.000



Real component of the direct impedance remote source

0.000



Imaginary component of the direct impedance remote source

0.000



Real component of the direct impedance in parallel with the line



Imaginary component of the direct impedance in parallel with the line

0.000 0.000

Sensitivities 

Phase current sensitivity

0.0



Ground current sensitivity

0.0



Phase voltage sensitivity



Ground voltage sensitivity

0.0



Current detection

NO



Analogue output permanence time

0

0.0

Enable synchronism 

Enable function

NO



Enable condition A neither B

NO



Enable condition B but not A

NO



Enable condition A but not B

NO



Enable undervoltage conditions

NO



Enable frequency difference

NO



Enable Angle difference

NO



Pick up of the unit of voltage difference between side A and side B

2



Pick up of the unit of angle difference between side A and side B

5



Pick up of the unit of frequency difference between side A and side B



Pick up of the undervoltage unit for permission in side A

50



Pick up of the undervoltage unit for permission in side B

50



Close permission checking time

0




B

0.05

Spring slack

 

Real component of the direct impedance local source

Synchronism checking







Spring slack time (se.).

15.0

Voltage presence



Primary nominal compound voltage (KV)

20.0



Voltage absence threshold (% of the nominal)

50



Voltage presence threshold (%of the nominal)

80

Breaker supervision




10



Time span for excessive number of trips

300



Sum kI2 alarm for maintenance



Sum kI2 initial(setting)



Enable trip circuit supervisión

NO



Enable close circuit supervisión

NO

65535 0

KI2 calculation



Calculation time

KI2



Waiting time (sec)

0.00


314






Operation logic



Trip sealing

YES



Opening failure time

0.500



Closing failure time

0.500

Pole discordance



Enable

NO



Discordance time (s)

0.01



Pole failure time (s)

0.00



Definite opening time (s)

0.01

Supervision









Enable

NO



Minimum threshold (V)

20



Maximum threshold (V)

24

Temperature supervision 

Enable

NO



Minimum threshold (ºC)

-40



Maximum threshold (ºC)

50

Recloser (1)



Recloser in service



Recloser time





External supply supervision

NO



Time for recloser 1º for faults between phases

0.50



Time for recloser 1º for faults to ground

0.50




5




5




20




20




20




20

Cycle control 

Waiting time of reference voltaje

1



Reclaim time for faults between phases

10



Reclaim time for faults to ground

10



Reclaim time after manual closing

10



Number of programmed reclosers

4



Sequence coordination of the recloser

NO

Recloser (2)



Trip permission



Units with trip permitted on standby 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S


315

DEFAULT SETTINGS



Isolated ground

S



IOC sensitive ground

S



TOC sensitive ground

S

 Units with trip permitted reclaim time recloser 1º











IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

Units with trip permitted reclaim time recloser 2º 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S


IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S


IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

Units with trip permitted reclaim time recloser external manual close 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S


316

DEFAULT SETTINGS





IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

Recloser (3)



Recloser permission



Recloser permission 1º after trip due to:







IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

Recloser permission2º after trip due to: 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

Recloser permission 3º after trip due to: 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S



Isolated ground

S




S




S

 Recloser permission 4º after trip due to: 

IOC phases

S



TOC phases

S



IOC ground

S



TOC ground

S



Broken conductor

S




S


317

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Isolated ground

S




S




S

Recloser (5)



Trip permission



Units with trip permitted on standby











Phase instantaneous H1

S




S



Phase time H2

S



Ground instantaneous H1

S




S



Ground time H1

S



Sensitive ground instantaneous H2

S



Sensitive ground time H2

S



S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S



Phase time H2

S


318

DEFAULT SETTINGS








S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S

Units with trip permitted reclaim time external manual closing 


S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S

Recloser (6)



Recloser permission



Recloser permission 1º after trip due to:










S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S



Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S



S




S


319

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Phase time H2

S




S




S



Ground time H1

S




S




S

Locking(I)

 Current protection











IOC phases

Without locking



TOC phases

Without locking



IOC ground

Without locking



TOC ground

Without locking



Broken conductor

Without locking



Directional

Without locking




Without locking




Without locking



Isolated ground

Without locking



Time

Without locking




Without locking

Voltage protection 

Overvoltage time

Without locking



Overvoltage instantaneous

Without locking



Undervoltage time

Without locking



Undervoltage instantaneous

Without locking



Unbalance time

Without locking




Without locking



Voltage generic (single pole overvoltage

Without locking

Instantaneous overvoltage 

Phase instantaneous (high)

Without locking



Ground instantaneous (high)

Without locking

Current protection (HIGH) 

TOC phases (HIGH)

Without locking



TOC ground (HIGH)

Without locking



IOC phases (HIGH)

Without locking



IOC ground (HIGH)

Without locking



TOC sensitive ground (HIGH)

Without locking



IOC sensitive ground (HIGH)

Without locking

Frequency protection 





Frequency protection

Without locking

Overvoltage protection, zones 2 and 3 

Settings for phases in zone 2

Without locking




Without locking




Without locking




Without locking

Frequency gradient 

Frequency gradient (1)

Without locking


320


Locking (II)



Recloser 

















Current recloser locking

Without locking

Breaker failure protection 

Pole discordance

Without locking



Breaker failure low load or ground

Without locking

Current protection-cold load 

TOC phases

Without locking



TOC ground

Without locking



IOC phases

Without locking



IOC ground

Without locking




Without locking




Without locking



Synchronism enabling

Without locking



Fuse failure

Without locking



Frequency recloser locking

Without locking



Recloser locking

Without locking

Various

Voltage control 

Voltage control (phase time)

Without locking



Voltage control (phase instantaneous)

Without locking

Locking by high current 

Phases

Without locking



Ground

Without locking

Power protection 

Minimum power

Without locking



Maximum power (Hi-Set)

Without locking



Maximum power (Lo-Set)

Without locking



Reverse active power (Hi-Set)

Without locking



Reverse active power (Lo-Set)

Without locking



Thermal image

Without locking



Reverse reactive power (Hi-Set)

Without locking



Reverse reactive power (Lo-Set)

Without locking



Apparent minimum power

Without locking



Apparent maximum power (Hi-Set)

Without locking



Apparent maximum power (Lo-Set)

Without locking

Breaker failure locking 

Breaker failure locking with flashover

Without locking



Breaker failure locking when opening

Without locking



Rear arch detection locking

Without locking



Dead zone locking

Without locking

Generals



Relay in service

SI



Breaker number (position)

9999



Phase current transformatio ratio

1


321


Ground current transformatio ratio

1



Sensitive ground current transformatio ratio

1



Voltage transformatio ratio

1



Secondary nominal simple voltage(V)

63.5



Voltage type

Simple



Voltage measurement

A-B-C



Measurement correction factor







Constant for active energy counter



Constant for reactive energy counter

1 1



Constant for power

1.000

Protocol TCP/IP 

P protection address

194.164.0.231



Undernet mask

255.255.255.0



Gateway

194.164.0.66



Number of connections

1



IP master address

0.0.0.0



UCL address

0

Configuration Digital inputs



DI 1

52-Breaker status



DI 2

52-Close command



DI 3

52-Opening order



DI 4

Not allocated input



DI 5

Not allocated input



DI 6

Not allocated input



DI 7

Not allocated input



DI 8

Not allocated input



DI 9

Not allocated input



DI 10

Not allocated input



DI 11

Not allocated input



DI 12

Not allocated input



DI 13

Not allocated input



DI 14

Not allocated input



DI 15

Not allocated input



DI 16

Not allocated input



DI 17

Not allocated input



Normal status mask (open/ closed) of digital inputs



DI 1

NA



DI 2

NA



DI 3

NA



DI 4

NA



DI 5

NA



DI 6

NA



DI 7

NA



DI 8

NA


322


DI 9

NA



DI 10

NA



DI 11

NA



DI 12

NA



DI 13

NA



DI 14

NA



DI 15

NA



DI 16

NA



DI 17

NA



Activation time (ms

0

 Logic input configuration





LOGIC INPUT 1

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 2

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 3

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 4

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 5

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 6

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 7

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 8

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 9

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 10

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 11

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 12

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 13

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 14

Not allocated input



LOGIC INPUT 15

Not allocated input



Normal status of logic inputs



LOGIC INPUT 1

Open



LOGIC INPUT 2

Open



LOGIC INPUT 3

Open



LOGIC INPUT 4

Open



LOGIC INPUT 5

Open



LOGIC INPUT 6

Open



LOGIC INPUT 7

Open



LOGIC INPUT 8

Open



LOGIC INPUT 9

Open



LOGIC INPUT 10

Open



LOGIC INPUT 11

Open



LOGIC INPUT 12

Open



LOGIC INPUT 13

Open



LOGIC INPUT 14

Open



LOGIC INPUT 15

Open

Programming logic outputs


323

DEFAULT SETTINGS  

Without programming

Digital output configuration



Output activation time (O1 to O14)

0.10



S1 opening order

General trip OR 52-Breaker



O2 Breaker closing order

79I-Recloser current OR 52-



O3 50/51 Phase B OR Trip 50/51 Phase C



O4 50NH1- Ground Inst.Trip.(High1)



OR 51N-Gnd. Inst.Trip



O5



O6



O7



O8 to O14



 trip 50/51 Phase A OR Trip

 50N- Ground Inst.Trip OR





Leds Configuration



LED 1



LED 2

  



Trip 50/51 Phase A OR Trip

LED 4 50NH1- Gnd.Inst. trip High1) OR

50N- Gnd.Inst. trip OR

51N-



LED 7



LED 8

LED 6

79I- Intens. Definite time 79I-Locked Intens. recl. Type HW

Command configuration through keyboard Without programming

Text configuration

 

General trip. Type

LED 3 50/51 Phase B OR Trip 50/51

 

 

Not allocated.

Without programming

Measurement historical



Time span for calculation of sample measurements

5



Historical register interval

00:15



Calendar ask with the days of the week

YES



Monday

YES


324

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Tuesday

YES



Wednesday

YES



Thursday



Friday

YES



Saturday

YES



Sunday

YES



Mask

NO



Daily register start time

0



Daily register end time

24

Oscillo configuration







YES

Digital signal to register in each channel 

Channel Nº 0

General trip



Channel Nº 1

Trip 50/51 Phase A



Channel Nº 2

Trip 50/51 Phase B



Channel Nº 3

Trip 50/51 Phase C



Channel Nº 4

50N-Gnd. Inst trip



Channel Nº 5 trip.(High1)

50NH1- Gnd. Inst



Channel Nº 6

51N- Gnd. time trip



Channel Nº 7 (BF)

50BF-Breaker failure trip



Channel Nº 8

79I- Intens.on-going cycle



Channel Nº 9

79I-Locked.Intens.recloser



Channel Nº 10 to 31

Not allocated channel

Digital signals that cause pick up 

General trip

Yes



Overcurrent trip

Yes



Rest of the signals

No



Samples per messages

Maximum



Oscillo duration in cycles

30



Prefault duration in cycles

10

Event masks





Communications 

Local mode (operation from keyboard and display)

No



Remote mode (operation through rear port)

No



Local mode (operation through front port)

No

Current protection (R-1) 

Phase A - Time pick up

No



Phase B - Time pick up

No



Phase C - Time pick up

No



Ground- Time pick up

No



Phase A - Instantaneous pick up

No



Phase B - Instantaneous pick up

No



Phase C - Instantaneous pick up

No



Ground- Instantaneous pick up

No



Phase A

No

Time output activation


325

DEFAULT SETTINGS







Phase B - Time output activation

No



Phase C - Time output activation

No



Ground- Time output activation

No



Phase A

Instantaneous output activation

No



Phase B - Instantaneous output activation

No



Phase C - Instantaneous output activation

No



Ground- Instantaneous output activation

No



Sensitive ground

Pick up

No



Sensitive ground

Output activation

No



Sensitive ground - Time pick up

No



Sensitive ground - Instantaneous pick up

No



Sensitive ground - Time output activation

No



Sensitive ground - Instantaneous output activation

No



Current unbalance - Time pick up

No



Current unbalance - Instantaneous pick up

No



Current unbalance - Time output activation



Current unbalance - Instantaneous output activation

No No

Current protection (R-3) 

Broken conductor detection

unit pick up

No



Broken conductor detection

Output activation

No



Activation of breaker failure output

No



Activation of trip circuit failure output(coil supervision)

No



Activation of close circuit failure output (coil supervision)

No



Exceed the limit of the breaker supervision accumulator

No



Breaker supervision accumulator overflow

No

Voltage protection (R-2) 

Time pick up phase A overvoltage

No



Time pick up phase B overvoltage

No



Time pick up phase C overvoltage

No



Time pick up ground overvoltage

No



Instantaneous pick up phase A overvoltage

No



Instantaneous pick up phase B overvoltage

No



Instantaneous pick up phase C overvoltage

No



Ground instantaneous pick up overvoltage

No



Activation time output phase A overvoltage

No



Activation time output phase B overvoltage

No



Activation time output phase C overvoltage

No



Activation time output ground overvoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase A overvoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase B overvoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase C overvoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output ground overvoltage

No



Time pick up phase A undervoltage

No



Time pick up phase B undervoltage

No



Time pick up phase C undervoltage

No



Instantaneous pick up phase A undervoltage

No



Instantaneous pick up phase B undervoltage

No


326

DEFAULT SETTINGS









Instantaneous pick up phase C undervoltage

No



Activation time output phase A undervoltage

No



Activation time output phase B undervoltage

No



Activation time output phase C undervoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase A undervoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase B undervoltage

No



Activation instantaneous output phase C undervoltage

No

Inputs (R-1) 

Activation digital input IN-1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No



Deactivation digital input IN-1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No

Inputs (R-2) 


No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No



Recloser internal locking (generic)

No



Recloser external unlocking

No



Recloser external locking

No



No reference voltaje

No



Recloser order

No



Definitive trip

No



Recloser at rest

No

Recloser


327

DEFAULT SETTINGS

On-going cycle recloser

No




No



Breaker close command

No



Breaker open command

No



Breaker closing

No



Breaker opening

No











Command

Command protection 

Thermal image alarm

No



Thermal image trip

No



Voltage unbalance pick up

No



Phase reverse pick up

No



Voltage unbalance trip

No



Phase reverse trip

No

Synchronism 

Close permission due to undervoltage side A

No



Close permission due to undervoltage side B

No



Close permission due to synchronism

No



No Close permission

No



Activation digital output OUT-1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No



Deactivation digital output OUT-1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No

Outputs


328

DEFAULT SETTINGS








No

Logic signals 

Activation digital signal 1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No



Deactivation digital signal 1

No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No




No

Rear arch detection verification V 

Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole A

No



Pick up rear arch detect. verif V Pole A

No



Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole A

No



Restor. rear arch detect. verif V Pole A

No



Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole B

No



Pick up rear arch detect. verif V Polo B

No



Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. V Pole B

No



Restor. rear arch detect. Verif. V Polo B

No



Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif V Pole C

No



Pick up rear arch detect. verif. V Polo C

No



Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole C

No



Restor. rear arch detect. verif. V Pole C



Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V



Pick up rear arch detect. verif V

No No No


329

DEFAULT SETTINGS











Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V

No



Restor. rear arch detect. verif. V

No

Inputs (R-3) 

Digital input activation IN-16

No



Digital input activation IN-17

No



Digital input deactivation IN-16

No



Digital input deactivation IN-17

No

Breaker failure 

Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase A

No



Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase A

No



Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase A

No



Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase A

No



Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase B

No



Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase B

No



Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase B

No



Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase

No



Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase C

No



Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase C

No



Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase C

No



Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase C

No



Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Neutral

No



Pick up Failure 52 through Int. Neutral

No



Trip Failure 52 through Int.Neutral

No



Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Neutral

No



Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase

No



Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase

No



Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase

No



Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase

No

Breaker failure when opening 

Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase A

No



Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase B

No



Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase C

No



Failure 52 in Load 1

No



Failure 52 in Load

No



Failure 52 in Load 2

No



Restoration Failure 52 in Load

No



Dead zone pick up

No



Dead zone trip

No



Dead zone restoration

No

Rear arch detection 

Pick up Rear arch detection Pole A

No



Trip Rear arch detection Pole A

No



Restoration Rear arch detection Pole A

No



Pick up Rear arch detection Pole B

No



Trip Rear arch detection Pole B

No


330

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Restoration Rear arch detection Pole B

No



Pick up Rear arch detection Pole C

No



Trip Rear arch detection Pole C

No



Restoration Rear arch detection Pole C

No



Pick up Rear arch detection

No



Trip Rear arch detection

No



Restoration Rear arch detection

No

Control measurement selection



MEASUREMENT 0

I maximum



MEASUREMENT 1

Free



MEASUREMENT 2

VA



MEASUREMENT 3

VB



MEASUREMENT 4

VC



MEASUREMENT 5

V average



MEASUREMENT 6

VAB



MEASUREMENT 7

VBC



MEASUREMENT 8

VCA



MEASUREMENT 9

U compound average



MEASUREMENT 10

IN



MEASUREMENT 11

IA



MEASUREMENT 12

IB



MEASUREMENT 13

IC



MEASUREMENT 14

I average



MEASUREMENT 15

P(Active power)



MEASUREMENT 16

Q(Reactive power)



MEASUREMENT 17

S(Apparent power)



MEASUREMENT 18

Frequency



MEASUREMENT 19

Free



MEASUREMENT 20

Cos A



MEASUREMENT 21

Cos B



MEASUREMENT 22

Cos C



MEASUREMENT 23

Cosine average



MEASUREMENT 24

Distortion IC (ICD)



MEASUREMENT 25

Distortion IB (IBD)



MEASUREMENT 26

Distortion IA (IAD)



MEASUREMENT 27

Distortion VC (VCD)



MEASUREMENT 28

Distortion VB (VBD)



MEASUREMENT 29

Distortion VA (VAD)



MEASUREMENT 30

Average distortion I (ID)



MEASUREMENT 31

Average distortion V (VD)



MEASUREMENT 32

INS



MEASUREMENT 33

VN



MEASUREMENT 34

INAIS



MEASUREMENT 35

Single pole Sequence I


331

DEFAULT SETTINGS





MEASUREMENT 36

Direct sequence I



MEASUREMENT 37

Reverse sequence I



MEASUREMENT 38

Single pole Sequence V



MEASUREMENT 39

Direct sequence V



MEASUREMENT 40

Reverse sequence V



MEASUREMENT 41

Free



MEASUREMENT 42

Temperature



MEASUREMENT 43

Opening 52 Total



MEASUREMENT 44

Count. total Reclosers



MEASUREMENT 45

Count. 1º Recloser



MEASUREMENT 46

Count. 2º Recloser



MEASUREMENT 47

Count. 3º Recloser



MEASUREMENT 48

Count. 4º Recloser



MEASUREMENT 49

Opening 52 trips



MEASUREMENT 50

P(Active P.) phase A



MEASUREMENT 51

P(Active P.) phase B



MEASUREMENT 52

P(Active P.) phase C



MEASUREMENT 53

Q(Reactive P.) phase A



MEASUREMENT 54

Q(Reactive P.) phase B



MEASUREMENT 55

Q(Reactive P.) phase C



MEASUREMENT 56

P maximum



MEASUREMENT 57

Q maximum



MEASUREMENT 58

P phase A maximum



MEASUREMENT 59

P phase B maximum



MEASUREMENT 60

P phase C maximum



MEASUREMENT 61

Q phase A maximum



MEASUREMENT 62

Q phase B maximum



MEASUREMENT 63

Q phase C maximum



MEASUREMENT 64

I fault phase A



MEASUREMENT 65

I fault phase B



MEASUREMENT 66

I fault phase C



MEASUREMENT 67

I fault ground



MEASUREMENT 68

I fault Sensitive ground



MEASUREMENT 69

Sum KI2 pole A



MEASUREMENT 70

Sum KI2 pole B



MEASUREMENT 71

Sum KI2 pole C

Control digital signal selection



Digital Signal 0

General pick up

 

Digital Signal 1

General trip

Digital Signal 2 Sens. ground

General pick up without



Digital Signal 3 ground

General trip without Sens.



Digital Signal 4

Overcurrent pick up


332

DEFAULT SETTINGS  

Digital Signal 5

Overcurrent trip


Overcurrent pick up without




Overcurrent trip without



Digital Signal 8

Trip 50/51 Phase A



Digital Signal 9

Trip 50/51 Phase B



Digital Signal 10

Trip 50/51 Phase C



Digital Signal 11

Free



Digital Signal 12

Free



Digital Signal 13

Free



Digital Signal 14

Free



Digital Signal 15

50- Pick up Phases Inst.



Digital Signal 16

50- Trip Phases Inst



Digital Signal 17

50N- Pick up Neutral Inst.

 

Digital Signal 18

50N- Trip Neutral Inst.

Digital Signal 19 Inst.

50NS- Pick up Sens Neutral



Digital Signal 20 Inst.

50NS- Trip Sens Neutral



Digital Signal 21 (High1)

50H1- Pick up. Phases Inst



Digital Signal 22 (High1)

50H1- Trip Phases Inst



Digital Signal 23 Inst.(High1)

50NH1- Pick up Neutral



Digital Signal 24 Inst.(High1)

50NH1- Trip. Neutral



Digital Signal 25

Free



Digital Signal 26

Free



Digital Signal 27

Free



Digital Signal 28

Free



Digital Signal 29

Free



Digital Signal 30

Free



Digital Signal 31

Free



Digital Signal 32

Free



Digital Signal 33

Free



Digital Signal 34

Free



Digital Signal 35

Free



Digital Signal 36

Free



Digital Signal 37

Free

 

Digital Signal 38

Free



Digital Signal 39 CURR.Phases

50HC- Pick up HI-

Digital Signal 40 Phases

50HC- Trip. HI-CURR.


333


Digital Signal 41 CURR.Neutral

50NHC- Pick up.HI-



Digital Signal 42 Neutral

50NHC- Trip..HI-CURR.



Digital Signal 43

51- Pick up Phase time



Digital Signal 44

51- Trip. Phase time



Digital Signal 45

51N- Pick up Neutral time



Digital Signal 46

51N- Trip. Neutral time



Digital Signal 47 time.

51NS- Pick up Sens.Neutral



Digital Signal 48 time

51NS- Trip Sens.Neutral



Digital Signal 49

Free



Digital Signal 50

Free



Digital Signal 51

Free



Digital Signal 52

Free



Digital Signal 53

Free

 

Digital Signal 54

Free

Digital Signal 55 neutral

67NA-Pick up Isolated



Digital Signal 56

67NA- Trip Isolated neutral



Digital Signal 57

49- Thermal image warning



Digital Signal 58

49- Thermal image Trip



Digital Signal 59

46T- Pick up unbalance time

 

Digital Signal 60

46T- Trip. unbalance time

   

Digital Signal 61 instant. Digital Signal 62 Digital Signal 63 conductor

46- Pick up unbalance 46- Trip unbalance instant. 46FA- Pick up Broken

Digital Signal 64

46FA- Trip Broken conductor

Digital Signal 65 (BF)

50BF- Pick up breaker failure



Digital Signal 66 (BF)

50BF- Trip. breaker failure



Digital Signal 67

Free



Digital Signal 68

Free



Digital Signal 69

Free



Digital Signal 70

Free



Digital Signal 71

Free



Digital Signal 72

Free



Digital Signal 73

Free



Digital Signal 74

Free



Digital Signal 75

50V-Activation 50V



Digital Signal 76

51V- Activation 51V (Modo2)



Digital Signal 77

51V- Activation 51V (Mode1)


334


Digital Signal 78

CF- Cold load pick up



Digital Signal 79

FF- Fuse failure pick up



Digital Signal 80

FF- Activation fuse failure



Digital Signal 81

Free



Digital Signal 82

Free



Digital Signal 83

Free



Digital Signal 84

Free



Digital Signal 85

Free



Digital Signal 86

Free



Digital Signal 87

Free



Digital Signal 88

Free



Digital Signal 89

Free



Digital Signal 90

Free



Digital Signal 91

Free



Digital Signal 92

Free



Digital Signal 93

Free



Digital Signal 94

Free



Digital Signal 95

Free



Digital Signal 96

Free



Digital Signal 97

Free



Digital Signal 98

Free



Digital Signal 99

Free



Digital Signal 100

Free



Digital Signal 101

Free



Digital Signal 102

Free



Digital Signal 103

Free



Digital Signal 104

Free



Digital Signal 105

Free



Digital Signal 106

Free



Digital Signal 107

Free



Digital Signal 108

Free



Digital Signal 109

Free



Digital Signal 110

Free



Digital Signal 111

Free



Digital Signal 112

Free



Digital Signal 113

Free



Digital Signal 114

Free



Digital Signal 115

Free



Digital Signal 116

Free



Digital Signal 117

Free



Digital Signal 118

Free



Digital Signal 119

Free



Digital Signal 120

Free


335


Digital Signal 121

Free



Digital Signal 122

Free



Digital Signal 123

Free



Digital Signal 124

Free



Digital Signal 125

Free



Digital Signal 126

Free



Digital Signal 127

Free



Digital Signal 128

Free



Digital Signal 129

Free



Digital Signal 130

Free



Digital Signal 131

Free

 

Digital Signal 132

Free

Digital Signal 133 service

79I-.Intens. recloser. In



Digital Signal 134

79I- Intens. recloser.Locked



Digital Signal 135

79I- Recloser and current



Digital Signal 136

79I- On going Intens.cycle

 

Digital Signal 137

79I-Definite Intens. trip

Digital Signal 138 cancellation

79I- Instantaneous



Digital Signal 139 trips

79I-Excessive number of



Digital Signal 140

79I- On going cycle 1



Digital Signal 141




Digital Signal 142




Digital Signal 143




Digital Signal 144

79I-Reclaim time man. close



Digital Signal 145

79I- Reclaim time 1º Recl.



Digital Signal 146




Digital Signal 147




Digital Signal 148

79I-T Reclaim time 4º Recl.



Digital Signal 149

Voltage Pres. side A



Digital Signal 150

Voltage Pres. side B



Digital Signal 151

Free



Digital Signal 152

Free



Digital Signal 153

Free



Digital Signal 154

Free



Digital Signal 155

Free



Digital Signal 156

Free



Digital Signal 157

Oscillo pick up



Digital Signal 158

Free



Digital Signal 159

52-Breaker closed



Digital Signal 160

52-Breaker opening failure



Digital Signal 161

52-Breaker closing failure


336


Digital Signal 162

52-Breaker closing order



Digital Signal 163

52-Breaker opening order



Digital Signal 164

52-Trip circuit failure.1



Digital Signal 165

52-Trip circuit failure.2



Digital Signal 166

52-Close circuit failure 1



Digital Signal 167

52-Close circuit failure 2



Digital Signal 168

52-Exceeded kI2



Digital Signal 169

52-Exceeded kI2 phase A



Digital Signal 170

52 Exceeded kI2 phase B



Digital Signal 171

52-Exceeded kI2 phase C



Digital Signal 172

AUT- Local status



Digital Signal 173

AUT-Open spring



Digital Signal 174

AUT-Voltage presence



Digital Signal 175

50CSC-Regulator locking



Digital Signal 176

Forward phase A



Digital Signal 177

Reverse phase A



Digital Signal 178

Forward phase B



Digital Signal 179

Reverse phase B



Digital Signal 180

Forward phase C



Digital Signal 181

Reverse phase C



Digital Signal 182

Forward Ground



Digital Signal 183

Reverse Ground



Digital Signal 184

Forward Sensitive ground



Digital Signal 185

Reverse Sensitive ground



Digital Signal 186

FF



Digital Signal 187

FR



Digital Signal 188

Direct. retrolocking



Digital Signal 189

Non direct. retrolocking



Digital Signal 190

Prelocking



Digital Signal 191

Pretrip



Digital Signal 192

Retrotrip



Digital Signal 193

Free



Digital Signal 194

Free



Digital Signal 195

Free



Digital Signal 196

Free



Digital Signal 197

Free



Digital Signal 198

Free



Digital Signal 199

Counter set to 0



Digital Signal 200

Table 1 active



Digital Signal 201

Table 2 active



Digital Signal 202

Table 3 active



Digital Signal 203

Table 4 active



Digital Signal 204

Table 5 active


337


Digital Signal 205

Table 6 active



Digital Signal 206

ST-Recloser



Digital Signal 207

ST- Phase inst



Digital Signal 208

ST-Phase inst H1



Digital Signal 209

Free



Digital Signal 210

ST-Phase time



Digital Signal 211

Free



Digital Signal 212

ST- Ground inst



Digital Signal 213

ST-Ground inst H1



Digital Signal 214

Free



Digital Signal 215

ST-Ground time



Digital Signal 216

Free



Digital Signal 217

ST- Sensitive ground inst



Digital Signal 218

Free



Digital Signal 219

ST- Sensitive ground time



Digital Signal 220

Free



Digital Signal 221

ST-Time unbalance



Digital Signal 222

ST-Instantaneous unbalance



Digital Signal 223

ST-Broken conductor



Digital Signal 224

ST-Isolated ground



Digital Signal 225

ST-Cold load



Digital Signal 226

ST-Thermal image



Digital Signal 227

RTS Control



Digital Signal 228

Input 1



Digital Signal 229

Input 2



Digital Signal 230

Input 3



Digital Signal 231

Input 4



Digital Signal 232

Input 5



Digital Signal 233

Input 6



Digital Signal 234

Input 7



Digital Signal 235

Input 8



Digital Signal 236

Free



Digital Signal 237

Free



Digital Signal 238

Free



Digital Signal 239

Free



Digital Signal 240

Free



Digital Signal 241

Free



Digital Signal 242

Free



Digital Signal 243

Free



Digital Signal 244

Free



Digital Signal 245

Output 1



Digital Signal 246

Output 2



Digital Signal 247

Output 3


338

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Digital Signal 248

Output 4



Digital Signal 249

Output 5



Digital Signal 250

Output 6



Digital Signal 251

Output 7



Digital Signal 252

Free



Digital Signal 253

Free



Digital Signal 254

Free



Digital Signal 255

Free



Digital Signal 256

Free



Digital Signal 257

Free



Digital Signal 258

Free



Digital Signal 259

Logic 1



Digital Signal 260

Logic 2



Digital Signal 261

Logic 3



Digital Signal 262

Logic 4



Digital Signal 263

Logic 5



Digital Signal 264

Logic 6



Digital Signal 265

Logic 7



Digital Signal 266

Logic 8



Digital Signal 267

Logic 9



Digital Signal 268

Logic 10



Digital Signal 269

Logic 11



Digital Signal 270

Logic 12



Digital Signal 271

Logic 13



Digital Signal 272

Logic 14



Digital Signal 273

Logic 15



Digital Signal 274

Relay in service



Digital Signal 275

HW state

Control order selection



Order 0

Free



Order 1

Activate output 1



Order 2

Activate output 2



Order 3

Activate output 3



Order 4

Activate output 4



Order 5

Activate output 5



Order 6

Activate output 6



Order 7

Activate output 7



Order 8

Activate output 8



Order 9

Activate output 9



Order 10

Activate output 10



Order 11

Activate output 11



Order 12

Activate output 12



Order 13

Activate output 13


339


Order 14

Activate output 14



Order 15

Free



Order 16

Free



Order 17

Free



Order 18

Free



Order 19

Free



Order 20

Free



Order 21

Free



Order 22

Breaker 52. Open



Order 23

Free



Order 24

Breaker 52. Close



Order 25

Free



Order 26

Recloser in service



Order 27

Free



Order 28

Recloser out of service



Order 29

Free



Order 30

Free



Order 31

Free



Order 32

Free



Order 33

Free



Order 34

Free



Order 35

Free



Order 36

Free



Order 37

Free



Order 38

Free



Order 39

Free



Order 40

Free



Order 41

Free



Order 42

Free



Order 43

Free



Order 44

Free



Order 45

Free



Order 46

Free



Order 47

Free



Order 48

Free



Order 49

Free



Order 50

Free



Order 51

Free



Order 52

Free



Order 53

Free



Order 54

Free



Order 55

Free



Order 56

Free


340

DEFAULT SETTINGS





Order 57

Free



Order 58

Free



Order 59

Free



Order 60

Table 1 activation



Order 61

Table 2 activation



Order 62

Table 3 activation



Order 63

Table 4 activation



Order 64

Table 5 activation



Order 65

Table 6 activation

DNP3 Generals



LCU address

1



MASTER address

0



Baud rate

9600



Parity

without parity



Stop Bits

1



RTS fixed

NO



Communication Control

NO



ACK waiting time (csec)

500



Synchronization time (min)

0



ACK confirmation at linkage level

NO



Number of max. application bytes

1024



Change sending

Absolute



Counter freezing

with time



State sending

0



Number of measurement bits

16 bits



Number of counter bits

32 bits



Non-requested messages

NO



Preventing collisions

NO



Definite collision time (csec)

10



Variable collision time (csec)

7



Resend time (sec)

20



Number of non-requested repetitions

0



Special

0



Measurement format

Counts



CTS waiting time (msec)

200



Carrier waiting time (msec)

40



Stabilization time (msec)

40


341

DEFAULT SETTINGS



DNP3 digital signal selection DNP3 NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 46 48 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

BD SIGNAL 50- Phases Inst. Pick up ON- Ground Inst. Pick up 50NS- Sens Ground Inst. Pick up 50H1- Phases Inst. Pick up (High1) 50NH1- Ground Inst. Pick up(High1) 51-Phase time pick up 51N- Ground pick up 51NS- Sens Ground time pick up 67NA-Isolated ground pick up 46T-Unbalance time pick up 46- Unbalance Inst. Pick up 46BC-Broken conductor pick up 50BF-Breaker failure pick up(BF) 50- Phases Inst. trip 50N- Ground Inst. trip 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip 50H1- Phases Inst trip (High1) 50NH1- Ground Inst. trip (High1) 51- Phase time trip 51N- Ground time trip 51NS- Sens Ground time trip 67NA- Isolated ground trip 46T- Unbalance time trip 46- Unbalance inst trip 46FA- Broken conductor trip 50BF- Breaker failure (BF) trip Trip 50/51 Phase A Trip 50/51 Phase B Trip 50/51 Phase C Overcurrent pick up Overcurrent trip . 52- Exceeded kI2 52- Exceeded kI2 phase A 52- Exceeded kI2 phase B 52- Exceeded kI2 phase C Relay in service HW status 52-breaker closed AUT- Local status 52- Breaker opening failure 52- Breaker closing failure 52- Breaker closing command 52- Breaker opening command General pick up General trip 52- Trip 1 circuit failure 52- Trip 2 circuit failure 52- Trip 1 close failure 52- Trip 2 close failure Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

REVERSE

CLASS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


342

DEFAULT SETTINGS

DNP3 NUMBER 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 86 87 88 89 90 91 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135

BD SIGNAL Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Logic 1 Logic 2 Logic 3 Logic 4 Logic 5 Logic 6 Logic 7 Logic 8 Logic 9 Logic 10 Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 79I- Intens. Recloser.In service 79I- Intens. on-going cycle 79I- Intens. definite trip 79I-Excessive No. of trips 79I-Intens. Recloser locked 79I-Current recloser.. Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 Input 17 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 59T- Phase OverV .time pick up 27T- UnderV .time pick up 59- Phase OverV inst pick up 27- UnderV .inst pick up 64T- Neutral OverV .time pick up 64- Neutral OverV .inst. pick up 47T- V unbalance pick up 47- Phase reverse pick up 81- Frequency pick up level 1 81- Frequency pick up level 2 81- Frequency pick up level 3 81- Frequency pick up level 4 81- Frequency pick up level 5 59T- Phase OverV .time trip 27T- UnderV .time trip 59- Phase OverV .inst trip

REVERSE

CLASS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


343

DEFAULT SETTINGS

DNP3 NUMBER 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148



BD SIGNAL 27- UnderV .Inst.trip 64T- Neutral OverV .time trip 64- Neutral OverV .Inst.trip 47T- V unbalance trip 47- Phase reverse trip 81- Frequency trip level 1 81- Frequency trip level 2 81- Frequency trip level 3 81- Frequency trip level 4 81- Frequency trip level 5 81- Frequency trip Voltage prot. Pick up Voltage prot trip

CLASS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DNP3 measurement configuration

DNP3 NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



REVERSE

BD MEASUREMENT VA VB VC V average VAB VBC VCA U compound average VN IA IB IC I average IN INS I maximum P(Active power) Q(Reactive power) Mean cosine Frequency

DEADBAND 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CLASS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

DNP3 counter configurations DNP3 NUMBER COUNTER BD DEADBAND CLASS Without programming



DNP3 order configuration NUMBER DNP3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ORDER BD Activate output 1 Activate output 2 Activate output 3 Activate output 4 Activate output 5 Activate output 6 Activate output 7 Activate output 8 Activate output 9

ON/OFF On On On On On On On On On


344

DEFAULT SETTINGS

10 11 12 13 14 22 24 26 28



Activate output 10 Activate output 11 Activate output 12 Activate output 13 Activate output 14 Breaker 52. Opening Breaker 52. closing Recloser in Service Recloser out of Service

Measurement format (DNP3 and MODBUS)

MEASUREMENTS DECIMAL NUMBERS Without programming



On On On On On On On On On

RANGE

MODBUS Generals



Remote station address



Baud rate

19200



Parity

Without parity



RTS activation waiting time(msec)



Carrier stabilization waiting time(msec) 10



Deactivation waiting time(msec) 4



MODBUS digital signal configuration

MODBUS NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

1

1

BD SIGNAL 50-Phase Inst.Pick up 50N-Ground Inst.Pick up 50NS- Sens Ground Inst.Pick up 50H1- Phase Inst.Pick up (High1) 50NH1- Ground Inst.Pick up.(High1) 51- Phase time pick up 51N- Ground time pick up 51NS- Isolate ground pick up 46T-Unbalance time pick up 46- Unbalance inst. pick up 46BC Broken conductor pick up 50BF-Breaker failure pick up (BF) 50- Phase Inst.trip 50N- Ground Inst. trip 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip 50H1- Phase Inst. Trip (High1) 50NH1- Ground Inst.trip (High1) 51-Phase time trip 51N-Neutral time trip 51NS- Sens Ground trip 67NA- Isolate ground trip 46T- Unbalance time trip 46- Unbalance inst trip 46FA- Broken conductor trip 50BF- Breaker failure trip(BF) Trip 50/51 Phase A Trip 50/51 Phase B

REVERSE


345

DEFAULT SETTINGS

MODBUS NUMBER 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 86 87 88 89 90 91 94 95 96

BD SIGNAL Trip 50/51 Phase C Overcurrent pick up Overcurrent trip 52-Exceeded kI2 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A 52-Exceeded kI2 phase B 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C Relay in service HW status 52-breaker closed AUT- Local status 52-Breaker opening failure 52- Breaker closing failure 52- Breaker opening order 52- Breaker closing order General pick up General trip 52-Circuit failure Trip.1 52-Circuit failure Trip.2 52-Close Circuit failure 1 52-Close Circuit failure 2 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Logic 1 Logic 2 Logic 3 Logic 4 Logic 5 Logic 6 Logic 7 Logic 8 Logic 9 Logic 10 Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 79I- Intens. recloser in service 79I- Intens. on-going cycle 79I- Intens. definite trip 79I-Excessive No. of trips 79I- Intens. Reclos.locked 79I-recloser current Input 9 Input 10 Input 11

REVERSE


346

DEFAULT SETTINGS

MODBUS NUMBER 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148



BD SIGNAL Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 Input 17 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 59T- Phase OverV time pick up 27T- UnderV time pick up 59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up 27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up 64T- Neutral OverV time pick up 64- Neutral OverV inst pick up 47T- V unbalance pick up 47- Phase reverse pick up 81- Frequency pick up level 1 81- Frequency pick up level 2 81- Frequency pick up level 3 81- Frequency pick up level 4 81- Frequency pick up level 5 59T-Phase OverV time trip 27T- Phase UnderV time trip 59- Phase OverV inst trip 27- UnderV time trip 64T- Neutral OverV time trip 64- Neutral OverV inst trip 47T-.V unbalance trip 47- Phase reverse trip 81-Frequency trip level 1 81- Frequency trip level 2 81- Frequency trip level 3 81- Frequency trip level 4 81- Frequency trip level 5 81- Frequency trip Voltage protection pick up Voltage protection trip

REVERSE

MODBUS measurement configuration

MODBUS NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

MEASUREMENT BD VA VB VC V average VAB VBC VCA U compound average VN IA IB


347

DEFAULT SETTINGS

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



IC I average IN INS I maximum P(Active Power) Q(Reactive Power) Average Cosine Frequency

MODBUS counter configurations

NUMBER MODBUS Without programming



MODBUS order configuration

MODBUS number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 22 24 26 28



COUNTER BD

ORDER BD Activate output 1 Activate output 2 Activate output 3 Activate output 4 Activate output 5 Activate output 6 Activate output 7 Activate output 8 Activate output 9 Activate output 10 Activate output 11 Activate output 12 Activate output 13 Activate output 14 Breaker 52. Opening Breaker r 52. Losing Recloser in service Recloser out of service

ON/OFF On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On

IEC60870-5-101 Protocol



Generals (1) 

Linking address

32



Application address

32



Swing mode

NO



Baud rate

4800



Channel type

Direct



RTS/CTS Control

NO



Parity

Even



Stop Bits

1



CTS activation waiting time (csec)

0



Carrier waiting time (csec)

0



RTS activation time (csec)

0


348

DEFAULT SETTINGS







RTS deactivation time (csec)

0



Response waiting time (csec)

100



Minimum time between transmissions (csec)

100



Number of transmissions

2



"Address Field of the Link"

1



"Common Address of ASDU"

2



"Cause of transmission"

1



"Information Object Address"

2



Time format

3 bytes



Measurements with time

YES



Counters with time

NO

Generals (2) 

Simple signal address

10001



Event address

0



Double signal address

0



Measurement address

30001



Transformer tap address

0



Counter address

0



Bitstrings address

0



Simple order address C

20001



Simple order address C0

0



Double order address C1

0



Double order address C2

0




0



Queue full indication address

60001



Queue half-full indication address

60002



GPS indication address

0



GPS synchronized indication address

0



Queue full (%)

80



Queue empty (%)

20



Event refreshment position

128



Command execution mode

Mode6



Use of return order information

Mode4



Counter freezing

Mode 1



Same address parameters and measurements

NO



Reduced meta profile

NO



GPS

NO



Time correction factor

50



ASDU maximum time

254



SQ bit usage

YES



Broadcast synchronization response

NO



Cyclical measurement period (min)

10

Digital signal 101 configuration NUNBER 101 1 2 3 4

SIGNAL BD 50-Phase Inst.Pick up 50N-Ground Inst.Pick up 50NS-Sens Ground Inst.Pick up 50H1- Phase Inst.Pick up (High1)

NELEM 1 2 3 4

REVERSE 0 0 0 0

TYPE 0 0 0 0

CIN 0 0 0 0


349

DEFAULT SETTINGS

NUNBER 101 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

SIGNAL BD 50NH1- Ground Inst.Pick up (High1) 51- Phase time pick up 51N- Ground time pick up 51NS- Sensitive ground pick up 67NA- Isolated ground pick up 46T- Unbalance time pick up 46- Unbalance inst. pick up 46BC- Broken conductor pick up 50BF- Breaker failure pick up (BF 50- Phase Inst. Trip 50N- Neutral Inst. Trip 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip 50H1- Phase Inst. Trip (High1) 50NH1- Neut. Inst. Trip (High1) 51- Phase time trip 51N- Neutral time trip 51NS- Sens Ground trip. 67NA- Isolate ground trip 46T- Unbalance time trip 46- Unbalance inst. trip 46BC- Broken conductor trip 50BF- Breaker failure trip (BF) Trip 50/51 Phase A Trip 50/51 Phase B Trip 50/51 Phase C Overcurrent pick up Overcurrent trip 52-Exceeded kI2 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A 52-Exceeded kI2 phase B 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C Relay in service HW status 52-Breaker close AUT- Local status 52- Breaker opening failure 52- Breaker closing failure 52- Breaker closing order 52- Breaker opening order General pick up General trip 52- Circuit Trip failure.1 52- Circuit Trip failure 2 52- Close Circuit failure 1 52- Close Circuit failure 2 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7

NELEM 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

REVERSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TYPE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


350

DEFAULT SETTINGS

NUNBER 101 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 87 88 89 90 91 92 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

SIGNAL BD Logic 1 Logic 2 Logic 3 Logic 4 Logic 5 Logic 6 Logic 7 Logic 8 Logic 9 Logic 10 Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 79I- Curr. Reclos in service 79I- Curr. on-going cycle 79I- Curr. Definit. Trip 79I-Excessive No. of trips 79I- Curr. Reclos locked 79I-Reclose current Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 Input 17 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 59T- Phase OverV time pick up 27T- UnderV time pick up 59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up 27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up 64T- Neutral OverV time pick up 64- Neutral OverV inst pick up 47T- V unbalance pick up 47- Phase reverse pick up 81- Frequency pick up level 1 81- Frequency pick up level 2 81- Frequency pick up level 3 81- Frequency pick up level 4 81- Frequency pick up level 5 59T- Phase OverV time trip 27T- Phase UnderV time trip 59- Phase OverV inst trip 27- Phase OverV inst trip 64T- Neutral OverV time trip 64- Neutral OverV inst trip 47T- V unbalance trip 47- Phase reverse trip 81- Frequency trip level 1 81- Frequency trip level 2

NELEM 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 87 88 89 90 91 92 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

REVERSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TYPE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


351

DEFAULT SETTINGS

NUNBER 101 144 145 146 147 148 149



SIGNAL BD 81- Frequency trip level 3 81- Frequency trip level 4 81- Frequency trip level 5 81- Frequency trip Voltage protection pick up Voltage protection trip

REVERSE 0 0 0 0 0 0

DEADBAND 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

PERIOD 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

LOW -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095 -4095

HIGH 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095

BACKGROUND 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TYPE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

GROUP

101 order configuration

NUMBER 101 20001 20001 20002 20002



CIN 0 0 0 0 0 0

101 counter configuration

NUMBER 101 COUNTER BD PERIOD Without programming



TYPE 0 0 0 0 0 0

101 measurement configuration

N.101 MEASUREMENT BD VA VB VC V average VAB VBC VCA U compound average VN IA IB IC I average IN INS I maximum P(Active Power) Q(Reactive Power) Average Cosine Frequency



NELEM 144 145 146 147 148 149

ORDER BD Breaker 52. Opening Breaker 52. Closing Recloser in service Recloser out of service

ON/OFF TYPE SIGNAL Off 0 On 0 On 0 Off 0

STATE 0 0 0 0

TIME. 500 500 0500 500

101 group configuration

GROUP IOA START IOA END Without programming



IEC60870-5-103 Protocol


352




Generals 

Remote station address

1



Baud rate

38400



Parity

Even



Stop Bits

1



RTS activation time(msec)

0



Carrier waiting time (msec)

0



RTS deactivation time (msec)

0



Sending format

Extended private range

103 digital signal configuration BD SIGNAL 50-Phase Inst.pick up 50N-Neutral Inst.pick up 50NS-Sens neut. Inst.pick up 50H1- Phase Inst.pick up (High1) 50NH1- Neutral Inst.pick up.(High1) 51- Phase time pick up 51N- Neutral time pick up 51NS- Sens neut.time pick up. 67NA-Isolated neut.time pick up 46T-Unbalance time pick up 46- Unbalance inst. pick up 46FA-Broken conductor pick up 50BF-Breaker failure pick up (BF) 50- Phase Inst trip 50N- Neutral Inst trip 50NS- Sens neut Inst trip.N Sens 50H1- Phase Inst.Inst trip.Fases(High1) 50NH1- Neutral Inst Inst trip.Neut.(High1) 51-D Phase time trip 51N-Neutral time trip 51NS- Sens neut time trip. 67NA- Isolated neut time trip 46T- Unbalance time pick up 46- Unbalance inst. pick up 46FA- Broken conductor trip 50BF- Breaker failure trip(BF) Trip 50/51 Phase A Trip 50/51 Phase B Trip 50/51 Phase C Overcurrent pick up Overcurrent trip 52-Exceeded kI2 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A 52-Exceeded kI2 phase B 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C Relay in service HW status 52-Breaker closed AUT- Local status 52-Breaker opening failure 52- Breaker closing failure 52- Breaker closing order 52- Breaker opening order General pick up General trip 52-Trip circuit failure 1 52-Trip circuit failure.2

TYP 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130

INF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

GI REVERSE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


353

DEFAULT SETTINGS

BD SIGNAL 52-Close circuit failure 1 52- lose circuit failure 2 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Logic 1 Logic 2 Logic 3 Logic 4 Logic 5 Logic 6 Logic 7 Logic 8 Logic 9 Logic 10 Logic 11 Logic 12 Logic 13 Logic 14 Logic 15 79I- Intens. Reclos. In service 79I- Intens. on-going cycle 79I- Intens. Definite trip 79I-Excessive No. of trips 79I- Intens. Reclos locked 79I-Recloser current Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 Input 17 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Phase OverV time pick up 27T- UnderV time pick up 59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up 27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up 64T- Neutral OverV time pick 64- Neutral OverV inst pick up

TYP INF 130 51 130 52 130 55 130 56 130 57 130 58 130 59 130 60 130 61 130 62 130 63 130 64 130 65 130 66 130 67 130 68 130 69 130 70 130 71 130 72 130 73 130 74 130 75 130 76 130 77 130 78 130 79 130 80 130 81 130 82 130 83 130 84 130 87 130 88 130 89 130 90 130 91 130 92 130 95 130 96 130 97 130 98 130 99 130 100 130 101 130 102 130 103 130 104 130 105 130 106 130 107 130 108 130 109 130 110 130 121 130 122 130 123 130 124 130 125 130 126

GI REVERSE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


354

DEFAULT SETTINGS

BD SIGNAL 47T- V unbalance pick up 47- Phase reverse pick up 81- Frequency pick up level 1 81- Frequency pick up level 2 81- Frequency pick up level 3 81- Frequency pick up level 4 81- Frequency pick up level 5 59T- Phase OverV time trip 27T- Phase UnderV time trip 59- Phase OverV inst trip 27- Phase UnderV inst. trip 64T- Neutral OverV time trip 64- Neutral OverV inst. p 47T- V unbalance trip 47- Phase reverse trip 81-Frequency trip level 1 81- Frequency trip level 2 81- Frequency trip level 3 81- Frequency trip level 4 81- Frequency trip level 5 81- Frequency trip Voltage protection pickup Voltage protection trip



TYP 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130

103 measurement Configuration

MEASUREMENT BD VA VB VC V VAB VBC VCA U compound average VN IA IB IC I average IN INS I maximum P(Active Power) Q(Reactive Power) Average cosine Frequency



INF GI REVERSE 127 X 128 X 129 X 130 X 131 X 132 X 133 X 134 X 135 X 136 X 137 X 138 X 139 X 140 X 141 X 142 X 143 X 144 X 145 X 146 X 147 X 148 X 149 X

NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

103 order Configuration

ORDER BD Activate output 1 Activate output 2 Activate output 3 Activate output 4 Activate output 5

TYP 131 131 131 131 131

INF 1 2 3 4 5

DCO On On On On On


355

DEFAULT SETTINGS

Activate output 6 Activate output 7 Activate output 8 Activate output 9 Activate output 10 Activate output 11 Activate output 12 Activate output 13 Activate output 14 Breaker 52.Opening Breaker 52. Closing Recloser in service Recloser out of service

131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 22 24 26 28

On On On On On On On On On On On On On


356

DEFAULT SETTINGS 10 48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain Tel + 34 944 039 600 Fax +34 944039 679

[email protected]


Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A. www.ingeteam.com

357

PL300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION

Recommend Documents